initial commit of ebook 24755HEADmain

1 files changed, 8923 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/24755.txt b/24755.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f7826f0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/24755.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,8923 @@
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of Captain Cook, by W.H.G. Kingston
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: Captain Cook
+       His Life, Voyages, and Discoveries
+
+Author: W.H.G. Kingston
+
+Release Date: March 5, 2008 [EBook #24755]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ASCII
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK CAPTAIN COOK ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Nick Hodson of London, England
+
+
+
+
+Captain Cook, his Life, Voyages and Discoveries, by W.H.G. Kingston.
+
+________________________________________________________________________
+This book is not a series of fictitious adventures of the great Captain
+Cook, the eighteenth century navigator and explorer, but a
+straightforward statement of his life and achievements.  It is therefore
+more of a biography than an adventure book for boys.  However, the man
+was so great that his biography can indeed be read as a well-written
+book of adventures.
+
+________________________________________________________________________
+CAPTAIN COOK, HIS LIFE, VOYAGES AND DISCOVERIES, BY W.H.G. KINGSTON.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER ONE.
+
+CAPTAIN COOK--HIS LIFE, VOYAGES, AND DISCOVERIES.
+
+EARLY TRAINING.
+
+Among all those Englishmen who, from a humble origin, have risen to an
+honourable position, Captain James Cook is especially worthy of record.
+His parents were of the peasant class--his father having commenced life
+as a farm-labourer, and his mother being a cottager's daughter.
+Probably, however, they were both superior to others of the same
+station, as the husband, in process of time, became farm-bailiff to his
+employer--a Mr Thomas Skottowe.  This was about the year 1730, and the
+farm of which he had the management was called Airy-Holme, near Ayton,
+in Yorkshire.  Not far from this place, at the village of Marton, near
+Stockton-upon-Tees; his son James was born, on October 27, 1728.  James
+was one of nine children, all of whom he survived, with the exception of
+a sister who married a fisherman at Redcar.
+
+The father of this family spent the latter years of his life with his
+daughter at Redcar, and was supposed to have been about eighty-five
+years old at the time of his death; so that he must have had the
+satisfaction of seeing his son rising in his profession, though probably
+he little thought of that son as establishing a fame which would be
+handed down in history.
+
+James Cook does not appear to have enjoyed any peculiar educational
+advantages, but owed his subsequent advancement chiefly to his own
+intelligence, perseverance, and diligence.  He first went to a village
+school, and was afterwards sent, at the expense of Mr Skottowe, to an
+ordinary commercial school, kept by a Mr Pullen.  He continued there
+four years, and was then apprenticed to Mr William Sanderson, a grocer
+and haberdasher at the fishing town of Straiths, ten miles from Whitby.
+It may be supposed that the occupation in which he was engaged was not
+suited to his taste.  The sea was constantly before his eyes, and the
+desire to seek his fortune on it sprang up within him, and grew stronger
+and stronger, till in about a year after he went to Straiths he obtained
+a release from his engagement with Mr Sanderson, and apprenticed
+himself to Messrs. Walker and Company, shipowners of Whitby.  He went to
+sea for the first time when he was about eighteen, on board one of their
+vessels--the Truelove collier, [Note 1] of four hundred and fifty tons
+burden, trading between Newcastle and London.  The lad soon showed that
+he was well fitted for his new profession, and in 1748, not two years
+after he had commenced it, we find him especially directed to assist in
+fitting for sea the Three Brothers, a new ship of six hundred tons.
+While he served on board this ship she was hired by Government as a
+transport; and on her being paid off she was employed in the Norway
+trade.
+
+After making several voyages in the Three Brothers up the Baltic, young
+Cook was promoted to the rank of mate on board the Friendship.  He had
+by this time gained the goodwill of his employers; and had made several
+other friends on shore, who, before long, were enabled to render him
+essential service.  He was now known as a thorough seamen; indeed, from
+the moment he went on board ship, he had steadily applied his mind to
+acquiring a knowledge of his profession.  Still he served on as mate of
+the Friendship till the breaking out of the war between England and
+France in 1756, when he made up his mind to push his fortunes in the
+Royal Navy.  He knew that at all events there was a great probability of
+his being pressed into the service, and he had good reason to hope that
+he might be placed ere long on the quarter-deck, since many young men at
+that time had been who went to sea, as he had done, before the mast.  He
+accordingly volunteered, and entered as an able seaman on board the
+Eagle, of sixty guns, then commanded by Captain Hamer, but shortly
+afterwards by Captain Palliser, who became the well-known Sir Hugh
+Palliser--Cook's warm and constant friend.
+
+As soon as the young sailor's Yorkshire friends heard that he had
+entered on board a man-of-war, they exerted themselves on his behalf,
+and a letter of introduction was procured from Mr Osbaldeston, Member
+for the county, to his captain, who, having already remarked the
+intelligence and assiduity Cook exhibited in all his professional
+duties, was the more ready to give him a helping hand.
+
+Considering how best he could assist the young man, who had served too
+short a time in the Navy to obtain a commission, Captain Palliser
+advised that a master's warrant should be procured for him--this being a
+position for which, both from age and experience, he was well fitted.
+[Note 2.]  This was done; and on May 10, 1759, James Cook was appointed
+to the Grampus, sloop of war, and was now in a fair way of gaining the
+object of his ambition.  He had, however, to undergo a trial of patience
+at the first outset of his career; for the former master returning, his
+appointment was cancelled.  His friends were not idle, and four days
+after this he was made master of the Garland; but on going to join her
+he found that she had already sailed for her destination.  On the
+following day, May 15, he was appointed to the Mercury, on the point of
+sailing for the North American station to join the fleet under Sir
+Charles Saunders, which, in conjunction with the army under General
+Wolfe, was engaged in the siege of Quebec.  The termination of that
+contest gained for Great Britain one of her finest provinces.  To this
+success Cook contributed in his particular department; and it is
+remarkable that he should have been in various ways instrumental in
+giving to his country the three finest provinces she possesses--Canada,
+the Australian settlements, and New Zealand.
+
+James Cook was now about thirty-two years of age, and although the
+position in life he had filled for the previous twelve years was not one
+(especially in those days) conducive to refinement of manners, he
+appears from the first to have conducted himself with propriety and
+credit.  He had already shown his superiority as a seaman.  He was now
+to exhibit his talents in the more scientific part of his profession, in
+which officers in the Navy were in those days greatly deficient.
+
+It was necessary to take the soundings in the channel of the Saint
+Lawrence, between the Isle of Orleans and the north shore, directly in
+front of the French fortified camp of Montmorency and Beauport, in order
+to enable the admiral to place his ships so as to oppose the enemy's
+batteries, and to cover the projected landing of the British army under
+Wolfe, and a general attack on their camp.  Captain Palliser, who now
+commanded the Shrewsbury, a seventy-four gun ship, recommended Cook for
+this difficult and dangerous service.  He was engaged on it for many
+consecutive nights, it being a work which could not be performed in the
+daytime.  At length his proceedings were discovered by the French, who
+laid a plan to catch him.  They concealed in a wood near the water a
+number of Indians with their canoes.  As the Mercury's barge, in which
+Cook was making the survey, passed, the canoes darted out on him and
+gave chase.  His only chance of escape was to run for it.  He pushed for
+the Isle of Orleans with a whole host of yelling savages paddling at
+full speed after him.  On they came, every moment gaining on his boat.
+The English hospital, where there was a guard, was before him; towards
+this he steered, the bows of the Indian canoes almost touching the
+barge's stern; a few strokes more, and the Indians would have grappled
+him.  He sprang from his seat over the bow of his boat, followed by his
+crew, just as the enemy leaped in overwhelming numbers over the
+quarters.  They carried off the barge in triumph, but Cook and his
+comrades escaped; and he succeeded, in spite of all difficulties, in
+furnishing the admiral with a correct and complete draft of the channel
+and soundings.  This was the more extraordinary, as Sir Hugh Palliser
+afterwards expressed his belief that before this time Cook had scarcely
+ever used a pencil, and knew nothing of drawing; and it is one of many
+proofs that the ardent seaman not only threw his soul into the duties of
+his profession, but that this determination enabled him quickly to
+master every subject to which he applied his mind.
+
+While his ship remained in the Saint Lawrence, Cook, at the desire of
+the admiral, made an accurate survey of the more difficult parts of that
+river below Quebec.  So complete and perfect was the chart which he
+executed, and which, with his sailing directions, was afterwards
+published, that until a late period no other was thought necessary.  So
+little were the English acquainted with the navigation of the river
+before this, that when, early in the season, the fleet under
+Rear-Admiral Darell arrived at its mouth, some difficulty was expected
+in getting up it.  Fortunately, when off the island of Caudec, the
+inhabitants, mistaking the English ships for their own fleet, sent off
+their best pilots.  These were of course detained, and proved of great
+use in taking the English fleet up the river.
+
+After the conquest of Canada had been accomplished, Admiral Saunders
+despatched the larger ships to England, following himself in the
+Somerset, and leaving the command of the fleet in North America to
+Captain Lord Colvill, who had his commodore's flag flying on board the
+Northumberland.  To this ship Cook was appointed as master, by warrant
+from his lordship, on September 22, 1739.  The squadron wintered at
+Halifax.  Cook employed the leisure which the winter afforded him in
+acquiring that knowledge which especially fitted him for the service in
+which he was thereafter to be engaged.  At Halifax he first read Euclid,
+and began to study astronomy and other branches of science, in which,
+considering the few books to which he had access, and the want of
+assistance from others, he made wonderful progress.  In the following
+year, 1760, a lieutenant's commission was presented to him as a reward
+for his services.
+
+In 1762 the Northumberland was engaged in the recapture of Newfoundland.
+The activity which Cook displayed in surveying its harbour and heights
+attracted the attention of Captain Graves, the acting governor, and
+commander of the Antelope.  Captain Graves, on becoming farther
+acquainted with Cook, formed a high opinion of his abilities, while he
+admired the energy and perseverance he exhibited in surveying the
+neighbouring coasts and harbours.
+
+At the end of the year Cook went to England, and on December 21 he
+married, at Barking, in Essex, Miss Elizabeth Batts, a young lady of
+respectable family, to whom he had some time before been engaged.  As
+she died in 1835, at the age of ninety-three, she must at the time of
+her marriage have been twenty years old.  Her husband was tenderly
+attached to her, but his married life, like that of most sailors, had
+long and frequent interruptions.  She bore him six children, three of
+whom died in their infancy.
+
+Soon after Cook's marriage, peace with France and Spain was concluded.
+On this Captain Graves was again appointed Governor of Newfoundland.  As
+the island was of great importance to England, he obtained from the
+Government, with some difficulty, an establishment for the survey of its
+coasts, and offered the direction of it to Cook, who, notwithstanding
+his recent marriage, accepted the offer.  In the following year, 1764,
+Sir Hugh Palliser being appointed Governor of Newfoundland and Labrador,
+Cook was made Marine Surveyor of the Province, the Grenville schooner
+being placed under his command.  The charts made by Cook enlightened the
+Government as to the value of Newfoundland, and induced them, when
+drawing up articles of peace with France, to insist on arrangements
+which secured to Great Britain the advantages which its coasts afford.
+Not content, however, with merely surveying the shore, Cook penetrated
+into the interior of the country, and discovered several lakes hitherto
+unknown.
+
+On August 5 an eclipse of the sun occurred, an observation of which was
+taken by Cook from one of the Burgeo Islands, near the south-west end of
+Newfoundland.  The paper that he wrote on it was published in the
+Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society.  This fact alone proves
+that he must already have become a good mathematician and astronomer.
+The last time he went to Newfoundland as marine surveyor was in 1767.
+
+We have now briefly traced the career of James Cook from his childhood
+to the period when he had established his character as an able seaman, a
+scientific navigator, and a good officer.  He was soon to have an
+opportunity of proving to his country and to the world in general the
+very high degree in which he possessed these qualities, and which
+enabled him to accomplish an undertaking which has proved of inestimable
+benefit to millions of the human race.  By his means, discovery was made
+of fertile lands of vast extent, previously trodden only by the feet of
+wandering savages; and numberless tribes, sunk in the grossest idolatry
+and human degradation, were made known to the Christian world.  And
+Christians, roused at length to a sense of their responsibility, began
+to devise means, under the blessing of God, for teaching these, their
+ignorant brethren of the human family, the knowledge of the only true
+God, and the way of eternal life.
+
+------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+Note 1.  In the biographies of Cook the name of the vessel in which he
+first went to sea is given as the Freelove--evidently a misprint.  I
+have never known a vessel of that name, whereas the Truelove is a
+favourite name.
+
+Note 2.  Masters in the Navy were in those days appointed by warrant,
+and were very generally taken direct from the merchant service without
+going through any preparatory grade, as at present.  They are now also
+commissioned officers, and on retiring receive commanders' rank.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER TWO.
+
+FIRST VOYAGE OF DISCOVERY.  AUGUST 1768 TO JULY 1771.
+
+In the year 1763, on the restoration of peace, the desire to explore
+unknown seas and to discover new countries revived among the English,
+and was warmly encouraged by King George the Third.  Two expeditions
+were at once fitted out to circumnavigate the globe--one under Lord
+Byron, and the other under Captains Wallis and Carteret; the former
+commanding the Dolphin, in which Lord Byron had just returned, the
+latter the Swallow.  As, however, Captains Wallis and Carteret
+accidentally parted company at an early period of their voyage, and kept
+different routes, they are generally considered as having led two
+separate expeditions.
+
+Before the return of these ships, another expedition was determined on,
+the immediate object of which was to observe a transit of Venus which it
+had been calculated by astronomers would occur in 1769.  It was believed
+that one of the Marquesas, or one of the Friendly Islands, called, by
+Tasman, Amsterdam, Rotterdam, and Middleburg, would be an advantageous
+spot for making the proposed observation.
+
+The King was memorialised by the Royal Society, and through his
+Majesty's intervention the Lords Commissioners of the Admiralty
+undertook to furnish a suitable vessel and crew to convey the
+astronomers and other scientific persons who might be selected to carry
+out the proposed objects.  The Royal Society had fixed on Mr Alexander
+Dalrymple to take the direction of the expedition; but as he was not in
+the Royal Navy, Sir Edward Hawke, then at the head of the Admiralty,
+would not hear of his being appointed.  Mr Dalrymple, on the other
+hand, would not consent to go unless he received a brevet commission as
+captain.  It was necessary, therefore, to find some one else, and Mr
+Stephens, the Secretary of the Admiralty, a warm supporter of the
+expedition, mentioned Cook to the Board, and suggested that Sir Hugh
+Palliser's opinion should be asked respecting him.  This, as may be
+supposed, was in every respect favourable; and consequently Lieutenant
+Cook was directed to hold himself in readiness to take command of the
+proposed expedition.  Sir Hugh Palliser was requested to select a fit
+ship for the purpose, and with Cook's assistance he fixed on a barque of
+three hundred and seventy tons, to which the name of the Endeavour was
+given.  She mounted ten carriage and ten swivel guns; her crew, besides
+the commander, consisted of eighty-four persons, and she was provisioned
+for eighteen months.
+
+The well-known Sir Joseph Banks, then Mr Banks, one of the chief
+promoters of the expedition, volunteered to accompany it.  On leaving
+Oxford he had visited the coasts of Newfoundland and Labrador, to obtain
+information on scientific subjects.  Although he suffered no small
+amount of hardship on that occasion, he returned home with unabated zeal
+in the cause he had adopted, and ready again to leave all the advantages
+which his position afforded him, for the discomfort and dangers of a
+long voyage in unknown seas.  Mr Banks was, however, more than a
+philosopher--he was a large-hearted philanthropist, and he was animated
+with the hope of diffusing some of the advantages of civilisation and
+Christianity among the people who might be discovered.  He engaged, as
+naturalist to the expedition, the services of Dr Solander, a Swede by
+birth, educated under Linnaeus, from whom he had brought letters of
+introduction to England.  Mr Banks also, at his own charge, took out a
+secretary and two artists--one to make drawings from subjects of natural
+history, the other to take sketches of scenery and the portraits of the
+natives who might be met with.  He had likewise four personal
+attendants, two of whom were negroes.
+
+The Government, on its part, appointed Mr Charles Green, who had long
+been assistant to Dr Bradley at the Royal Observatory, Greenwich, to
+assist Lieutenant Cook in the astronomical department of the expedition;
+and in every respect the persons engaged in this celebrated expedition
+were well fitted to attain the objects contemplated.
+
+While these preparations were going forward, Captain Wallis returned
+from his voyage round the world.  He expressed his opinion that a
+harbour in an island he had discovered, and called King George's Island,
+since well-known as Otaheite or Tahiti, was a fit spot for observing the
+transit of Venus.  That island was accordingly to be the first
+destination of the Endeavour.  After having accomplished the primary
+object of the voyage, the commander was directed to proceed in making
+discoveries through the wide extent of the Great Southern Ocean.
+
+Lieutenant Cook received his commission as commander of the Endeavour
+(which was then in the basin in Deptford Yard) on May 25, 1768.  On the
+27th he went on board, and immediately began fitting her for sea.  The
+work in dockyards was not executed so rapidly in those days as it is
+now, and it was upwards of two months before the vessel was ready.  On
+July 30 she dropped down the river; but it was not till August 15 that
+she reached Plymouth.  On Friday, August 26, the wind becoming fair, the
+Endeavour finally put to sea, and commenced the first of one of the most
+memorable series of voyages which have ever been performed by a single
+vessel.  Next to Commander Cook in authority in the Endeavour were her
+two lieutenants--Zachary Hicks and John Gore; her senior mate was
+Charles Clerke, who accompanied Cook in each of his subsequent voyages,
+and succeeded to the command of the third expedition on the death of his
+beloved captain.  He had previously served as midshipman under Lord
+Byron in his first voyage round the world.
+
+A long sea voyage is almost always felt to be extremely tedious and dull
+to landsmen; but every change in the atmosphere, the varied appearance
+presented by the sea, the numberless creatures found in it, the birds
+which hovered about the ship or pitched on the rigging, all afforded
+matter of interest to the enlightened persons on board the Endeavour.
+
+At Madeira the naturalists of the expedition set to work collecting
+specimens.  The social condition of the people has probably altered
+little since those days, though the monasteries, which then existed,
+have long since been abolished.  The nuns of the convent of Santa Clara
+especially amused Mr Banks and his companions by the simplicity of the
+questions they put on hearing that they were philosophers.  Among
+others, they requested them to ascertain by their art whether a spring
+of pure water existed within the walls of their convent, and also when
+the next thunderstorm would occur.
+
+On leaving Madeira the course was shaped for Rio de Janeiro, which was
+reached on November 13.  The voyagers were not treated by the viceroy
+with the courtesy which might have been expected.  The object of the
+voyage was utterly beyond the comprehension of that functionary, who
+could form no other conception of the matter than that it had something
+to do with the passing of the North Star through the South Pole.  This
+ignorance and suspicion caused the voyagers a great deal of annoyance
+during the whole of their stay; though the viceroy could not refuse them
+water and other necessaries.  When, at length, these were procured, and
+the Endeavour was going out of the harbour, she was fired at from the
+forts of Santa Cruz.  Cook immediately sent on shore to demand the cause
+of this act.  The excuse offered by the commandant of the port was that
+he had received no orders from the viceroy to allow the ship to pass.
+It appeared that the letter had been written, but that through neglect
+it had not been forwarded.  Through the whole of the contest with the
+viceroy, Cook behaved with equal spirit and discretion.  Among the
+remarks which Cook makes in his journal on Brazil, is one on the fearful
+expense of life at which the royal gold mines in that country were
+worked.  No less than forty thousand negroes were annually imported to
+labour in the royal mines.  In the year 1766, through an epidemic, the
+number required falling short, twenty thousand more were drafted from
+the town of Rio.  A very similar account may be given of the silver and
+other mines on the other side of the continent; while the treacherous
+system which was organised to supply the demand for labour from among
+the inhabitants of the Pacific Islands must be looked on with even
+greater horror and indignation than that which existed for supplying
+Brazil with slave labour.  So strictly were the Brazilian gold mines
+guarded, that no stranger was allowed to visit them, and any person
+found on the roads leading to them was immediately hanged by the guards
+stationed there.  Altogether Cook formed a very unfavourable opinion of
+the inhabitants of Brazil, though few parts of the tropics surpass it in
+beauty of climate, fertility of soil, and power of production.
+
+After a stay of three weeks in the harbour of Rio, the Endeavour put to
+sea on December 7, and stood down the coast of South America.  On
+approaching the latitudes of the Falkland Islands, the crew, complaining
+of cold, received what was called a Magellanic jacket, and a pair of
+trousers made of a thick woollen stuff called Fearnought.  Instead of
+going through the Straits of Magellan, as was the custom in those times,
+the Endeavour was steered from the Strait of Le Maire between Helen
+Island and Tierra del Fuego.  On her anchoring in the Bay of Good
+Success, several of the party went on shore.  Thirty or forty Indians
+soon made their appearance, but, distrustful of the strangers, quickly
+retreated to a distance.  On this, Mr Banks and Dr Solander advanced,
+when two of the Indians approached them and sat down.  As the Englishmen
+drew near, the savages rose and each threw away from him a stick which
+he had in his hand, returning immediately to their companions and making
+signs to the white men to follow.  This they did, and friendly relations
+were at once established between the two parties.  Three of them were
+induced to go on board, and were chiefly remarkable for the entire want
+of interest with which they regarded all the novelties by which they
+were surrounded.  One of them, who was conjectured to be a priest, did
+little else than shout all the time he was on board.  He was supposed,
+by this, to be engaged in the performance of some heathenish
+incantation.  When these three men were landed, their fellow-savages
+showed great eagerness to learn what they had seen in the strange big
+canoe, as they would probably have termed the English ship.
+
+On December 16, Mr Banks and Dr Solander, with Mr Green, Mr
+Monkhouse the surgeon, and several attendants, landed, with the
+intention of ascending a mountain seen in the distance, and penetrating
+as far as they could into the country.  The atmosphere when they set out
+was like that of a warm spring day in England.  It being the middle of
+summer, the day was one of the longest in the year.  Nothing could have
+been more favourable for their expedition.  They had gone through a
+wood, and were about to pass over what at a distance they had taken to
+be a plain, but which proved to be a swamp covered thickly with tangled
+bushes three feet high.  Still they pushed across it, and reached the
+mountain, on which Mr Banks and Dr Solander commenced collecting
+specimens.  Most of the party were greatly fatigued, and Mr Buchan, the
+draughtsman, was seized with a fit.  He was therefore left with some of
+the party while the rest went forward.  The weather, however, changed--
+the cold became intense, and snow fell very thickly.  Dr Solander had
+warned his companions not to give way to the sensation of sleepiness
+which intense cold produces, yet he was one of the first to propose to
+lie down and rest.  Mr Banks, however, not without the greatest
+difficulty, urged him on, but the two black servants lay down and were
+frozen to death, and a seaman who remained with them nearly shared the
+same fate.  The survivors collected together at night, but their
+provisions were exhausted; one or two were very ill, and they were a
+long day's journey from the ship.  There appeared, indeed, a great
+probability that the chief objects of the voyage would be frustrated by
+the death of the principal scientific persons engaged in it.  After a
+night of great anxiety, a vulture they had shot being their only food,
+the snow partially cleared off, and they made their way to the beach,
+which was not so far distant as they had supposed.
+
+After this disastrous adventure the party again went on shore, and found
+a tribe of savages, numbering fifty persons, living in a collection of
+conical huts, rudely formed of boughs, and open on the lee side.  The
+people, who are stout and clumsily formed, had their faces painted, and
+were very imperfectly covered with seal-skins.  Their chief article of
+clothing, indeed, was a small cloak which they wore on the side on which
+the wind comes when walking or sitting.  They lived chiefly on
+shell-fish, and in search of them wandered from place to place.  They
+were considered as among the most dull and stupid of the human race.  No
+wonder, indeed, considering the few objects on which their minds could
+be expanded.  A farther acquaintance with these tribes has shown that
+they have minds as capable of receiving good impressions as other human
+beings, and that they are not destitute of a considerable amount of
+intelligence.
+
+The Endeavour took her departure from Cape Horn on January 26, 1769.
+She ran for seven hundred leagues without land being seen.  After that
+she passed several coral islands, the appearance of which is now
+familiar to most people, but in those days was but little-known.  To
+three of them the names of Lagoon Island, Bow Island, and Chain Island
+were given; several of them were inhabited.
+
+On April 11 she sighted Otaheite, [now known as Tahiti] called King
+George's Island by Captain Wallis, which appeared high and mountainous,
+and on the 13th came to an anchor in Matavai Bay.  As she approached the
+land numerous canoes came off, their crews carrying young plantains and
+other green branches as a sign of friendship.  Several of the boughs
+were handed on board, and it was intimated that they should be placed in
+different parts of the ship to show that the voyagers also wished for
+peace.  The natives exhibited great satisfaction on this being done.
+They gladly exchanged cocoanuts, fruit resembling apples, bread-fruit,
+and small fish, for beads and other trifles.  They had a pig, which they
+would not part with for anything but a hatchet; this Cook would not
+allow to be given, considering that if a hatchet was given them it would
+be considered from that time forward to be the proper price of a pig.
+
+The bread-fruit, with which the voyagers now first became acquainted,
+grows on a tree about the height of an ordinary oak.  Its leaves are
+about a foot and a half long, of an oblong shape, deeply sinuated like
+those of the fig-tree, which they resemble in consistency and colour;
+they also, on being broken, exude a white, milky juice.  The fruit is
+about the size and shape of a child's head, and the surface is
+reticulated.  It is covered with a thin skin, and has an oblong core
+four inches long.  The eatable part, which lies between the skin and the
+core, is as white as snow, and of the consistency of new bread.  It must
+be roasted before it is eaten, being first divided into three or four
+parts.  Its taste is insipid, with a slight sweetness somewhat
+resembling the crumb of wheaten bread mixed with a Jerusalem artichoke.
+
+The first person who came off was Owhaw.  He was well-known to Mr Gore,
+and to others who had been there with Captain Wallis.  It was hoped that
+he would prove useful, and he was therefore taken on board and every
+attention shown him.  Captain Cook at once issued a set of rules to
+govern the ship's company in all their intercourse with the natives.
+They were as follows:--
+
+"1.  To endeavour by every fair means to cultivate a friendship with the
+natives; and to treat them with all imaginable humanity.
+
+"2.  A proper person or persons will be appointed to trade with the
+natives for all manner of provisions, fruit, and other productions of
+the earth; and no officer or seaman, or other person belonging to the
+ship, excepting such as are so appointed, shall trade or offer to trade
+for any sort of provision, fruit, or other productions of the earth,
+unless they have leave so to do.
+
+"3.  Every person employed on shore, on any duty whatsoever, is strictly
+to attend to the same; and if by any neglect he loses any of his arms or
+working tools, or suffers them to be stolen, the full value thereof will
+be charged against his pay, according to the custom of the Navy in such
+cases; and he shall receive such further punishment as the nature of the
+case may deserve.
+
+"4.  The same penalty will be inflicted on every person who is found to
+embezzle, trade, or offer to trade with any part of the ship's stores of
+what nature soever.
+
+"5.  No sort of iron, or anything that is made of iron, or any sort of
+cloth, or other useful or necessary articles are to be given in exchange
+for anything but provisions."
+
+Though there can be no doubt as to Captain Cook's own feelings and
+wishes, his subordinates did not always act in accordance with them; and
+his judicious and benevolent designs with regard to the natives were
+thus frequently frustrated.  As soon as the ship was secured, he, with
+Mr Banks, Dr Solander, and a party of men under arms, went on shore,
+where they were received by hundreds of the natives, whose countenances
+exhibited their friendly feelings.  At first, however, the simple people
+were so struck with awe that they approached their visitors crouching
+down almost on their hands and feet, while they carried in their hands
+the green boughs as emblems of peace.  The leader presented Captain Cook
+with a bough, which he and his companions received with looks and
+gestures of kindness and satisfaction.  Each of the Englishmen also
+immediately gathered a bough, and carried it in the same way the natives
+did theirs.  The party then proceeded about a mile and a half towards
+the place where Captain Wallis' ship, the Dolphin, had watered.  Here a
+halt was called, and the natives having cleared away all the plants that
+grew on the ground, the principal persons among them threw their green
+branches on the bare spot, and made signs that their visitors should do
+the same.  Captain Cook at once yielded to this request.  The marines
+being drawn up, each as he passed dropped his bough on those of the
+Indians, the officers then doing the same.  The natives now intimated to
+Captain Cook that he might make use of the ground for any purpose he
+desired; but as it was not suitable for the purpose of the expedition,
+the offer was declined.
+
+The party now took a circuitous route of four or five miles through
+groves of trees which were loaded with cocoanuts and bread-fruit, and
+afforded the most grateful shade.  Under these trees were the
+habitations of the people, most of them in the daytime presenting the
+appearance of a roof without walls.  Mats at night were let down to
+afford such privacy and shelter as the habits of the people and the
+genial climate required.  The whole scene seemed to realise to the
+voyagers the poetical fables of Arcadia.
+
+The reception Captain Wallis met with from these people was in the first
+instance very different from that which Captain Cook and his companions
+now received.  No sooner did the Dolphin, which the savages called a
+huge canoe without an outrigger, appear, than several thousand people,
+in canoes laden with stones, came off and attacked her.  Not until they
+had been repeatedly fired on, and many of their number had been killed,
+did they retire.  Several shots were fired at the crowds on shore before
+they would disperse.  The people then saw that it would be hopeless to
+contend with the strangers, and with green boughs in their hands sued
+for peace.  After this, Captain Wallis was treated with great attention,
+especially by a female chief, whom he called a queen or princess, and
+who lived in a house much larger than any others in the neighbourhood.
+On Captain Cook's arrival, no trace of her house was to be found, and
+the princess herself had disappeared.  Indeed, the voyagers were
+convinced that as yet they had seen none of the leading chiefs of the
+island.  The next day, however, two persons of greater consequence than
+any who had yet appeared came off, called Matahah and Tootahah; the
+first fixing on Mr Banks as his friend, and the latter on Captain Cook.
+The ceremony consisted in the natives taking off a great part of their
+clothing, and putting on that of their white friends.  A similar
+ceremony exists among some of the tribes of North America.  The dress of
+the natives was formed from cloth made of the bark of the paper-mulberry
+tree.
+
+Captain Cook, Mr Banks, and others accompanied these chiefs on shore,
+where they met another chief, Tubourai Tamaide, and formed a treaty of
+friendship with him.  He invited them to his house, and gave them a
+feast of fish, bread-fruit, cocoanuts, and plantains, dressed after the
+native fashion.  The natives ate some of the fish raw, a feat the
+Englishmen could not accomplish.  The general harmony was interrupted by
+Dr Solander and Mr Monkhouse finding that their pockets had been
+picked, the one of an opera glass, the other of his snuff-box.  Mr
+Banks on this started up and struck the butt end of his musket violently
+on the ground.  On this, most of the people ran away, but the chief
+remained.  To show his concern, and that he had nothing to do with the
+theft, he offered Mr Banks several pieces of native cloth as a
+compensation.  When Mr Banks refused it, and let him understand that he
+required only what had been taken away, the chief went out, and in half
+an hour returned with the snuff-box and the case of the opera glass.
+His countenance fell when he found the case empty, and taking Mr Banks
+by the hand, he led him out towards the shore at a rapid rate.  On the
+way, followed by Dr Solander and Mr Monkhouse, he passed a woman, who
+handed him a piece of cloth, which he took, and went on till he reached
+another house, where a woman received them.  He intimated that they
+should give her some beads.  These with the cloth were placed on the
+floor, when the woman went out, and in half an hour returned with the
+glass.  The beads were now returned, and the cloth was forced on Dr
+Solander, who could not well refuse it, though he insisted on giving a
+present in return.  This, among other instances, shows that the people
+had a sense of justice, and were raised above the savage state in which
+the inhabitants of many of the surrounding islands were plunged.
+
+A spot was at last fixed on, away from habitations, where the
+astronomical instruments could be set up, protected by a fort; and on
+the 10th, Captain Cook, accompanied by Mr Banks, Dr Solander, and Mr
+Green, went on shore with a party of men to commence operations.  A
+number of natives, on seeing them, collected to watch their proceedings;
+though they had no weapons, it was intimated to them that they must not
+cross a line which the captain drew in front of the ground it was
+proposed to occupy.  Having taken all the precautions he considered
+necessary, he left a midshipman and a party of marines to guard the
+tent, and, with Mr Banks and the other gentlemen, set off on an
+excursion through the woods, accompanied by Owhaw, who, however, seemed
+very unwilling that they should go far from the shore.  One of their
+objects was to obtain poultry and pigs.  Owhaw's unwillingness to
+proceed arose, they believed, from the fact that their live-stock had
+been driven into the interior by the natives lest their white visitors
+should lay violent hands on them.
+
+As fresh meat or poultry was much wanted, Mr Banks, seeing some ducks,
+fired and killed three at one shot, which so astonished the natives that
+most of them fell flat on the ground as if knocked down by the same
+discharge.  They soon recovered, however, and proceeded with the white
+men.  The Englishmen were walking somewhat apart, when, shortly after
+the above-mentioned incident, two shots were heard.  Owhaw, on this,
+seemed to think, as the visitors did, that something was wrong, and
+signing to them to keep together, sent most of the natives away.  Three
+chiefs, however, remained, who instantly broke off green boughs from the
+nearest trees, and extended them towards the English, to show that they
+wished to be on terms of friendship, whatever had happened.  The
+Englishmen, of course, full of anxiety, hurried back to the tent.  On
+their arrival they found that the natives had fled, and that one of them
+had been killed.  It appeared that a native had suddenly seized the
+sentry's musket and made off with it, when the midshipman, most
+improperly, ordered the marines to fire.  This they did, into the very
+middle of the flying crowd; but finding that the thief did not fall,
+they pursued and shot him dead.  It is easy to fancy Captain Cook's
+grief and annoyance at this incident.  In spite of his humane desire to
+treat the natives justly and kindly, and to cultivate their goodwill,
+and notwithstanding all his precautions against violence, blood had been
+shed.  Though the native had acted wrongly, death was too severe a
+punishment for his fault.  The chiefs who had remained with Cook behaved
+very well.  Calling the people around, they enabled him to explain to
+them that though the English would allow no liberties to be taken, yet
+their desire was to treat them with kindness.
+
+Notwithstanding these assurances, the next morning very few natives came
+near the ship, and she was consequently warped closer in, more
+effectually to protect the intended fort.  Before long, however, the
+natives got over their alarm, and the two chiefs Tubourai Tamaide and
+Tootahah returned, bringing in their canoes not branches only, but two
+young trees, and would not venture on board till these had been received
+as emblems of peace.  They each also brought, as propitiatory gifts, a
+hog and bread-fruit ready dressed--both very acceptable articles at that
+time.  In return, a hatchet and a nail were given to each of them.
+
+At this time the expedition had the misfortune to lose Mr Buchan, the
+landscape-painter brought out by Mr Banks.
+
+Rapid progress was made with the forts, and on April 18, Mr Banks's
+tent being set up, he slept on shore for the first time.  The natives
+had by this time completely recovered from their alarm, and an abundance
+of provisions was offered for sale.  Their friend Tubourai Tamaide even
+brought his wife and family to the fort, and did not hesitate to throw
+himself down and sleep on Mr Banks's bed.  The voyagers were gradually
+gaining an insight into the manners and customs of the people.  Mr
+Monkhouse, in one of his walks, learned their mode of treating their
+dead.  He found the body of the poor man who had been shot.  It was
+wrapped in cloth, and placed on a high platform supported by stakes,
+with a roof over it; near it were some instruments of war and other
+articles.  Two other bodies were seen near, in a similar position, the
+bones of which were perfectly dry.  The first was near the hut in which
+the man had lived.  On the approach of the white man to the bodies the
+natives showed considerable uneasiness, and seemed greatly relieved when
+the examination was over.
+
+A few days afterwards Tootahah amused them by a concert.  There were
+four performers on flutes having two stops, which were sounded by
+application to the end of the nose, instead of the mouth; one nostril
+being stopped by the hand.
+
+Longer excursions from the shore than they had at first ventured to take
+gave the explorers a good notion of the fertility and resources of the
+country.  After passing a belt of fertile land, about two miles wide,
+they came to a range of barren hills.  These being crossed, they
+descended into a wide plain, watered by a river issuing from a fertile
+valley, which was nearly a hundred yards wide, and at a considerable
+distance from the sea.
+
+This plain was thickly studded over with houses, the inhabitants of
+which seemed to live in the full enjoyment of the ample productions of
+their country.  As they became better acquainted with the people, it was
+discovered that, amiable as the people appeared, they had many vicious
+habits.  They were generally expert and pertinacious thieves, although
+some of the chiefs appear to have been exempt from this vice, or to have
+been ashamed of practising it on their liberal visitors.
+
+The fort was completed on April 26, and six swivel guns were mounted on
+it.  This seemed very naturally to excite the apprehensions of the
+people, and some fishermen who lived near wisely moved farther off.
+Owhaw, indeed, intimated by signs that the English would begin to fire
+their guns in four days.  Notwithstanding this, Tubourai Tamaide and
+other chiefs, with their wives, came into the fort and ate without
+showing any signs of fear.  Again the commander's patience was tried by
+the misconduct of one of his own people.  The butcher had taken a fancy
+to a stone hatchet in the hands of the wife of the above-named chief,
+and because she refused to give it to him for a nail, he threatened to
+kill her.  Being proved guilty of this crime, as well as of an
+infraction of the rules drawn up by the commander, he received a severe
+flogging, in the presence of a number of the natives.  It speaks well
+for their kind feelings that when they saw the first strokes given they
+begged that the rest of his punishment might be remitted, and when
+Captain Cook would not consent to this they burst into tears.  Indeed,
+numberless instances proved that these people were mere children of
+impulse.  They had never been taught to disguise or suppress their
+feelings; easily affected by all the changes of the passing hour, their
+sorrows were transient, and their joy and pleasure speedily excited.
+Unaccustomed to dwell on the past, or to allow themselves to be troubled
+with thoughts of the future, all they desired was to gratify the desire
+of the moment.  About this time--the beginning of May--an event occurred
+which threatened disappointment to the object of the expedition.  This
+was the disappearance, from the middle of the fort, of the quadrant, a
+large instrument in a case, on which the possibility of making the
+proposed observations entirely depended.  Search was instantly made in
+every direction, and at length, through the intervention of the friendly
+chiefs, portions were discovered in the possession of the natives.  They
+had been carried off by different people, but fortunately, not broken,
+and finally all the parts were collected and the instruments set up.  At
+the suggestion of the Earl of Morton, before leaving home, Captain Cook
+sent out two parties to observe the transit of Venus from different
+situations--one to the east, the other to the westward.  The anxiety for
+such weather as would be favourable to the success of the experiment was
+powerfully felt by all parties concerned; they could not sleep the
+preceding night; but their apprehensions were removed by the sun's
+rising without a cloud on the eventful morning of June 3.  The weather
+continued with equal clearness throughout the day, so that the
+observations at each post were successfully made.  At the fort Captain
+Cook, Mr Green, and Dr Solander were stationed.  The passage of the
+planet Venus over the sun's disc was observed with great advantage.
+
+The explorers had been, from the first, anxious to see the person who
+had been looked upon by Captain Wallis as the queen of the island, and
+at length, a number of people being collected at the tents, Mr
+Mollineux, the master, declared that one of the females, who was sitting
+quietly among the rest, was the lady herself.  She, at the same time,
+acknowledged him to be one of the strangers she had before seen.  Her
+name, they soon learned, was Oberea.  She was tall and stout, and must
+have been handsome in her youth.  Her countenance indicated much
+intelligence, and she was also unusually fair.  She was thenceforth
+treated with great attention, and many presents were offered her.  It
+was curious that among them all she seemed to value most a child's doll.
+On this, Tootahah, who was apparently at that time the principal chief
+on the island, jealous of the favours shown to Oberea, was not content
+till he also had a doll given to him.  For the moment he valued it more
+than a hatchet, probably supposing that its possession conferred some
+mark of dignity; or perhaps he took it for one of the gods of the white
+men.  Whatever the position really held by Oberea, her moral conduct was
+not superior to that of most of her countrywomen.  She seems to have
+been the repudiated wife of Oamo, one of the principal chiefs of the
+island.  There appeared to have been three brothers, chiefs--Whappai,
+the eldest, Oamo, and Tootahah.  As soon as a son is born to a head
+chief, he succeeds as king, and generally the father becomes regent.
+Whappai had a son who was thus king, but Tootahah, having distinguished
+himself as a leader in battle, was chosen as regent instead of Whappai,
+and a son of Oamo and Oberea was the heir-apparent.  It was thus
+manifest to our voyagers that even among those simple savages--"the
+children of nature" as they were sometimes called--ambition for
+greatness and jealousy of power were passions not unknown nor unfelt,
+any more than they are among civilised and highly cultivated nations and
+races of men.
+
+Among the attendants of Oberea was Tupia, who had been her minister in
+the days of her power, and was now a priest, and possessed of
+considerable influence.  He from the first attached himself to the
+English, and soon expressed a strong desire to accompany them whenever
+they should leave the country.  As it was very important to have an
+intelligent native of a South Sea island attached to the expedition,
+Captain Cook gladly availed himself of this desire, and Tupia was
+subsequently received on board the Endeavour as interpreter.
+
+During his first visit to the island, Captain Cook learned very little
+about the religion of the people.  He came to the conclusion that they
+believed in one God or Creator of the universe, and in a number of
+subordinate deities, called Etuas, as also in a separate state of
+existence with different degrees of happiness.  They did not seem to
+fancy that their deities took any notice of their actions.  Their
+religion, such as it was, had therefore no restraining influence over
+them.  Their priests were called Tahowas.  The office was hereditary.
+All ranks belonged to it.  The chief priest was generally the younger
+brother of a good family, and was respected in a degree next to the
+king.  Of the little knowledge existing in the country the priests
+possessed the greatest share, especially with regard to navigation and
+astronomy.  The name Tahowa signifies, indeed, a man of knowledge.  Like
+all heathen superstitions, their system was one of imposture; and the
+priests supported their authority by cunning, and by working on the
+credulity of the people.  Captain Cook was not aware at that time that
+it was their custom to offer up human sacrifices, and that they
+exercised a fearful influence over the people by selecting for victims
+those who had in any way offended them.  The persons fixed on, often
+young men or girls in the pride and strength of youth, were followed,
+unsuspicious of the fate awaiting them, and were struck down by the
+clubs of the assistant priests without warning.  They were then offered
+up at their morais to the Etuas, whose anger they desired to propitiate.
+The priests professed also to cure diseases by incantations very
+similar to those practised by the medicine-men or mystery-men among the
+Indians of North America.  A society existed, called the Arreoy, the
+object of which was to set at defiance all the laws of morality which
+the rest of the people acknowledged.  Many of the principal people of
+the island belonged to it.  By its rules any woman becoming a mother was
+compelled instantly to strangle her infant.  Both Captain Cook and Mr
+Banks spoke to some who acknowledged that they had thus destroyed
+several children, and, far from considering it as a disgrace, declared
+that it was a privilege to belong to the association.  For a long period
+this dissolute society existed, and opposed all the efforts of the
+Christian missionaries to get it abolished.  From the lowest to the
+highest, the people were addicted to thieving; for even the principal
+chiefs could not resist temptation when it came in their way.  On one of
+their expeditions Mr Banks and his companions had the greater part of
+their clothes stolen from them while they were asleep.  They had no
+doubt that Oberea was concerned in the robbery.
+
+Still the people possessed qualities which won the regard of their
+visitors.  In all their habits they were scrupulously clean.  They
+regularly bathed three times in the day, washed their mouths before and
+after eating, and their hands frequently during each meal.  It was the
+custom for the chiefs to take their meals alone, seated on the ground,
+with leaves instead of a cloth spread before them, and their food ready
+cooked in a basket by their side.  Their chief animal food consisted of
+pigs and dogs, the latter being carefully kept for the purpose, and fed
+entirely on vegetable diet.  It was agreed that South Sea dog was but
+little inferior to English lamb.  The meat was either broiled or baked
+in earth-ovens.  A hole was dug in the ground, and a fire lighted in it,
+small stones being mixed with the wood.  When the hole was sufficiently
+hot, the fire was raked out, and a layer of hot stones placed at the
+bottom; on this leaves were put.  The animal to be cooked was laid on
+the top of them, and covered, first with more leaves, and then with the
+remainder of the hot stones; the whole being then covered up with earth.
+All the fish and flesh eaten by the natives was baked in the same way.
+
+An excursion in the pinnace, made by Captain Cook and Mr Banks, round
+the island, gave them a perfect knowledge of its shape and size.  It
+consists of two peninsulas joined by a narrow neck of land, and was
+found to be about thirty leagues in circumference.  Though they were
+received in a very friendly way, the natives stole their clothes or
+whatever they could lay hands on.  On this excursion they met with a
+representation of one of their Etuas, or deities.  It was the figure of
+a man constructed of basket-work, rudely made, and rather more than
+seven feet high.  The wicker skeleton was completely covered with
+feathers, which were white where the skin was to appear, and black in
+the parts which it is their custom to paint or stain.  On the head was a
+representation of hair; there were also four protuberances, three in
+front and one behind, which the English would have called horns, but
+which were called by the natives Tate Ete (little men).
+
+In the northern peninsula they visited a burying-place, the pavement of
+which was extremely neat; upon it was raised a pyramid five feet high,
+covered with the fruit of two plants peculiar to the country.  Near the
+pyramid, under a shed, was a small image of stone, of very rude
+workmanship--the first specimen of stone-carving which had been seen
+among the people.  Continuing their voyage, they came to a district
+belonging to Oberea, and were entertained at her house, which, though
+small, was very neat.  Not far from it they saw an enormous pile, which
+they were told was the morai of Oamo and Oberea, literally their
+burying-place and temple.  It was a pile of stone-work, raised
+pyramidically upon an oblong base or square two hundred and sixty-seven
+feet long and eighty-seven wide.  It was like the small mounds erected
+for sun-dials, with steps leading on all sides to the summit.  The steps
+at the sides were broader than those at the ends, and it terminated in a
+ridge like the roof of a house.  There were eleven steps, each four feet
+high, so that the height of the pile was forty-four feet; each course
+was formed of white coral stone, neatly squared and polished; the rest
+of the mass, for there was no hollow within, consisted of round pebbles.
+Some of the coral stones were measured, and found to be three feet and
+a half by two feet and a half.  The foundation was of stones squared,
+and one of them measured four feet seven inches by two feet four inches.
+It was surprising that such a structure should have been raised without
+iron tools to shape the stones, or mortar to join them.  The quarried
+stones must have been brought from a considerable distance by hand, and
+the coral must have been raised from under the water, where, though
+there is an abundance, it is at a depth of never less than three feet.
+To square these stones must have been a work of incredible labour,
+though the polishing might have been more easily effected by means of
+the sharp coral sand from the sea-shore.  The whole pyramid was not
+straight, but formed a slight curve, and made one side of a spacious
+area or square of three hundred and sixty feet by three hundred and
+fifty-four feet, enclosed by a stone wall, and paved throughout its
+whole extent with flat stones.  Several trees, called _etoa_ and
+plantains, were growing through the pavement.  On the top of the pyramid
+stood the figure of a bird carved in wood, and near it lay the broken
+figure of a fish carved in stone.  About a hundred yards to the west of
+this building was another paved court, in which were several small
+stages raised on wooden pillars seven feet high.  These were altars,
+called Ewattas, and upon them were placed provisions of all sorts as
+offerings to their gods.  In the neighbourhood of the morai were found
+large numbers of human bones.  These were said to have been the remains
+of the inhabitants killed a few months before by the people of Tirrabou,
+in the south-east peninsula, who had made a sudden descent on the coast.
+The jaw-bones had been carried away as trophies, as the Indians of
+North America carry off the scalps of their enemies.  The natives
+conjectured, probably, that the English would not approve of human
+sacrifices, and therefore refrained from offering up any, or did so only
+when they knew that their visitors would not interrupt them in their
+horrible proceedings.
+
+The inhabitants of Otaheite were remarkably intelligent, and their minds
+were capable of a high state of cultivation.  The climate was considered
+healthy, and the natural productions of the island abundant.  The
+bread-fruit was, perhaps, the most valuable.  They had also cocoanuts,
+thirteen sorts of bananas, plantains; a fruit not unlike an apple, sweet
+potatoes, yams, cacao; a kind of _arum_, the _yambu_, the sugar-cane; a
+fruit growing in a pod, like a large kidney bean; the pandana tree,
+which produces fruit like the pine-apple, and numerous edible roots of
+nutritious quality.  Among other trees must be mentioned the Chinese
+paper-mulberry, from which their cloth was, and is still, manufactured,
+and two species of fig-trees.  There were no serpents and no wild
+quadrupeds on the island, except rats.  Their tame animals were hogs,
+dogs, and poultry, and there were wild ducks, pigeons, paroquets, and a
+few other birds.  The complexion of the people was olive or light brown;
+that of the women of the upper classes being very clear, with
+well-formed faces and expressive eyes, the nose only being flatter than
+is admired in Europe.  In their persons, as already observed, they were
+remarkably cleanly; and they certainly showed that they were neither
+treacherous nor revengeful.  Mr Banks, Dr Solander, and Captain Cook
+himself, were constantly in their power, often in their villages,
+sleeping in separate huts, without any watch or guard.
+
+Contrary to the usual custom, the men wore their hair long or tied up in
+a bunch, while the women wore it cropped short round their ears.  The
+bodies of both sexes were tattooed, but not their faces.  They
+manufactured three sorts of cloth for dress.  The finest and whitest was
+made from the paper-mulberry tree, and was used for the dresses of the
+chief people.  The second, used by the common people, was made from the
+bread-fruit tree, and the third from a tree resembling a fig-tree.  The
+latter was coarse and harsh, and of the colour of the darkest brown
+paper; but it was valuable because it resisted the wet, while the others
+did not.  The women of the upper class wore three pieces of cloth; one,
+eleven yards long and two wide, was wrapped round the waist, and hung
+down like a petticoat; while the two others were formed like the South
+American poncho, the head being put through a hole in the middle, so as
+to leave the arms at liberty.  The men dressed in much the same way,
+except that instead of allowing the cloth to hang down like a petticoat,
+they brought it between their legs so as to have some resemblance to
+breeches.  The higher a person's rank, the more clothes he wore, some
+throwing a large piece loosely over the shoulders.  They shaded their
+eyes from the sun with hats made at the moment required, of cocoanut
+leaves or matting, and the women sometimes wore small turbans, or a
+head-dress which consisted of long plaited threads of human hair, wound
+round and round, with flowers of various kinds stuck between the folds,
+especially the Cape jessamine, which was always planted near their
+houses.  The chiefs sometimes wore the tail feathers of birds stuck
+upright in their hair.  Their personal ornaments besides flowers were
+few; but both sexes wore ear-rings of shells, stones, berries, or small
+pearls.
+
+Their houses were always built in woods, sufficient space only being
+cleared to prevent the droppings from the boughs from rotting the roofs.
+They were simply formed of three rows of parallel stakes for the
+support of the roof, the highest part of which was only nine feet from
+the ground, while the eaves reached to within three feet and a half.
+The houses were thatched with palm-leaves, and the floor was covered
+some inches deep with soft hay.  They were, indeed, scarcely used for
+any other purpose than as dormitories, the people living almost
+constantly in the open air.  The great chiefs, however, had houses in
+which privacy could be enjoyed; and there were guest-houses for the
+reception of visitors, or for the accommodation of the people of a whole
+district.  Some were two hundred feet long, thirty broad, and twenty
+high under the ridge; on one side of them was an area enclosed with low
+palings.  They were maintained at the public expense.
+
+The style of cookery among these islanders has already been described.
+They baked in their earth-ovens hogs and large fish, as also the
+bread-fruit.  The baked pork and fish were considered more juicy and
+more equally done than by any mode of cooking known at home.  Of the
+bread-fruit they made various dishes, by putting to it either water or
+the milk of the cocoanut, and then beating it to a paste with a stone
+pestle, and afterwards mixing it with ripe plantains and bananas.  They
+made an intoxicating beverage from a plant they called _Ava_.  The
+chiefs only indulged in the vice of drinking to excess, and even they
+considered it a disgrace to be seen intoxicated.  They sometimes drank
+together, and vied with each other in taking the greatest number of
+draughts, each draught being about a pint.  They ate a prodigious
+quantity of food at each meal, and would finish off by swallowing a
+quart of pounded bread-fruit of the consistency of custard.
+
+They had various amusements, and were especially fond of dancing, in
+which they kept admirable time, their movements being often graceful;
+but their gestures too generally showed the very debased condition of
+their morals.  Their musical instruments were flutes and drums.  The
+flutes were made of hollow bamboo, about a foot long.  The drums were
+blocks of wood of cylindrical form, solid at one end, but scooped out
+and covered at the other with shark's skin.  They were beaten by the
+hands instead of sticks.  The natives sang to these instruments, and
+often made extempore verses.
+
+The men delighted especially in wrestling.  They also practised archery
+and spear-throwing.  They shot, not at a mark, but to try how far they
+could send an arrow; their spears, however, they threw at a mark,
+generally the bole of a plantain, at the distance of twenty yards.
+These spears were about nine feet long.  They also, in war, used clubs
+of hard wood, often well carved, and six or seven feet long; pikes,
+headed with the stings of sting-rays; and slings, which they wielded
+with great dexterity.  Thus armed, they fought with obstinacy and fury,
+and gave no quarter to man, woman, or child who, while their passion
+lasted, fell into their hands.  Although they could not be said to live
+under a regular form of government, there was a certain subordination
+established among them, not unlike that of European nations under the
+feudal system.
+
+Their tools were few and rude: an adze of stone, a chisel or gouge of
+bone--generally that of a man's arm between the wrist and elbow--a rasp
+of coral, and the sting of a sting-ray, with coral sand as a file or
+polisher.  With these tools they built their houses and canoes, hewed
+stone, and felled, clove, carved, and polished timber.  Their axes were
+of different sizes, but even with the largest it took them several days
+to cut down a tree.  The canoes were often large, and constructed with
+great labour and ingenuity.  They were of two builds: one, the _Ivaha_,
+for short excursions, was wall-sided, with a flat bottom; the other, the
+_Pahie_, for longer voyages, was bow-sided, with a sharp bottom.  There
+was the fighting Ivaha, the fishing Ivaha, and the travelling Ivaha.
+The fighting Ivaha was the largest; the head and stern were raised
+sometimes seventeen feet or more above the sides, which were only three
+feet out of the water.  Two of these vessels were always secured
+together by strong poles about three feet apart.  Towards the head a
+platform was raised, about twelve feet long, wider than the boats, and
+on this platform stood the fighting men, armed with slings and spears;
+for they did not use their bows and arrows except for amusement.  Below
+the stage the rowers sat with reserved men, who supplied the place of
+those that were wounded.  Some of their war canoes had stages or decks
+from one end to the other.  The fighting Pahie was often sixty feet
+long, and two were also joined together, with a large platform above
+them.  One measured by Captain Cook was, though sixty feet long, only
+one foot and a half at the gunwale, with flat sides; then it abruptly
+widened out to three feet, and narrowed again to the keel.  The double
+canoes were sometimes out a month together, going from island to island.
+Some carried one, some two masts, with sails of matting, of
+shoulder-of-mutton shape.  The bottom of a large Pahie was formed of
+three or more trunks of trees secured together and hollowed out, above
+this flooring were the sides of plank, two inches thick, and about
+fifteen inches broad; and then there were the upper works, hollowed out
+of trunks of trees like the bottom.  Sometimes these canoes were used
+singly, but then they were fitted with outriggers like the flying Proa
+of the Ladrone Islands.  The outrigger is a log of wood fixed at the end
+of two poles, which lie across the vessel, projecting eight or ten feet,
+according to her size.  The length and high sterns of these canoes gave
+them great advantage in putting off from the shore through the surf;
+they also sailed and paddled very fast.  The amount of time and labour
+expended in the construction of one of these canoes must have been very
+great, and speaks well for the intelligence as well as for the industry
+and perseverance of the islanders.
+
+Before quitting the island, Mr Banks planted a quantity of seeds of
+water-melons, oranges, lemons, limes, and other plants and trees which
+he had collected at Rio de Janeiro.  He had prepared the ground for them
+in the neighbourhood of the fort, in as many varieties of soil as he
+could select.  He also gave away seeds liberally to the natives, and
+planted others in the woods.  The plants from some melon-seeds which
+were sown on their first arrival were flourishing, and the natives
+eagerly begged for more.
+
+Many articles manufactured by the natives have not yet been described.
+The mode of making cloth from the bark of the paper-mulberry was
+curious.  When the trees were of a fit size, they were pulled up, and
+the tops and roots being cut off, the bark was slit longitudinally, and
+was this easily removed.  It was then placed under stones in running
+water.  When sufficiently softened, the coarser parts were scraped away
+with a shell, the fine fibres of the inner coat only remaining.  They
+were then placed on plantain-leaves, in lengths of about twelve yards,
+one by the side of the other, for about a foot in width.  Two or three
+layers were also placed one on the other, care being taken that the
+thickness should be equal throughout.  In this state it remained till
+the following morning, when all the water it contained being drained off
+or evaporated, the fibres were found to adhere so closely together that
+the whole piece could be lifted up and carried home.  There it was
+placed on a long, smooth board, to be beaten by the women.  The
+instrument they used was a four-sided piece of wood, with a long handle.
+This mallet was scored with grooves of different finenesses, those on
+one side being wide enough to receive a small pack-thread, the size of
+the grooves diminishing by degrees till those on the last side were fine
+as the finest silk.  The fabric was beaten with the coarser side first,
+the women keeping time, and it spread rapidly under their strokes.  The
+finest side was the last used, and the groove marked the cloth so as to
+give it the appearance of having been made of fine thread.  It was then
+almost as thin as English muslin, and became very white on being
+bleached in the air.  The scarlet dye used was very brilliant, and was
+extracted from the juice of a species of fig; a duller red was from the
+leaves of another tree.  A yellow pigment was extracted from the root of
+the _Morinda citrifolia_.  A brown and a black dye were also used.
+
+The natives, when visited by Cook, manufactured mats of various
+descriptions, some of them exceedingly fine and beautiful.  One sort
+served them for clothing in wet weather.  They made also coarse mats of
+rushes and grass, to sit or sleep on, plaiting them with great rapidity
+and facility.  They produced every variety of basket-work of great
+beauty; they also made ropes and string of all sorts; their
+fishing-line, made from the bark of a species of nettle, was far
+stronger than any English line of the same thickness.  Their
+fishing-nets, though coarse, answered their purpose.  They were often
+eighty fathoms in length.  Harpoons, made of cane, were used to catch
+fish, and fish-hooks of mother-of-pearl.  One used for trawling had a
+white tuft of dog's or hog's hair attached to it, to look like the tail
+of a fish.  The fishermen watched for the birds which always follow a
+shoal of bonetas, and seldom returned without a prize.  Both sexes were
+expert swimmers, and would dash out through the fiercest foam, diving
+under the breaking seas as they rolled in, and coming up on the other
+side.  One of their amusements was to tow out a small raft on which they
+would sit, and allow themselves to be carried in on the top of a high
+foaming sea, amid which no boat could live for an instant.  They were
+not without the comfort of artificial light.  Their candles were made of
+the kernels of a kind of oily nut, which were stuck one over another on
+a skewer running through the middle.  The upper one being lighted burnt
+down to the second, which took fire, the part of the skewer which went
+through the first being consumed, and so on to the last.  These candles
+burnt a considerable time, and gave a very tolerable light.
+
+From the brief description which has been given of their manufactures it
+will be seen that the islanders of Otaheite possessed a considerable
+number of the conveniences of life.  Had they but been blessed with true
+religion and a good government, they would already have had most of the
+elements of a happy existence, without further intercourse with the rest
+of the world.
+
+That a life such as was apparently led by these South Sea islanders--a
+life of comparative ease, and in a luxurious and enervating but inviting
+climate--should have presented charms to such men as chiefly composed
+the crew of the Endeavour, can excite no surprise.  Rude, ignorant, and,
+for the most part, vicious themselves, in spite of the boasted
+civilisation of their country, they saw nothing repulsive in the
+rudeness, ignorance, and vices of the dusky natives.  On the other hand,
+they were attracted by visions of indolence and savage freedom from
+care.  Some of them also had formed attachments not easy to be broken;
+and they were willing to barter their distant homes, connections, and
+prospects for the licentious pleasures so near at hand.  It was very
+difficult for them to resist these enticements; and notwithstanding the
+vigilance of the commander of the expedition, two marines managed to
+desert from the ship.  In order to recover these deserters, Captain Cook
+thought himself under the necessity of detaining several of the
+principal people of the island on board the Endeavour.  This led to
+reprisals; for on a party being sent on shore to bring off the
+deserters, they were, in turn, seized by the natives, who made it
+understood that they should not be restored till their chiefs were set
+at liberty.  A stronger party was consequently sent from the ship, with
+a message from Tootahah (one of the captives), desiring that the
+Englishmen should be released.  This, happily, had the desired effect,
+and the deserters, as well as the other men, were immediately sent back.
+Thus, in this, as in previous transactions, the prudence and mildness
+of the islanders averted a quarrel which, had it proceeded to
+extremities, would have left the civilised visitors little to boast of,
+beyond the superior power they possessed.  And it must be a source of
+deep regret to every Christian reader that in the protracted intercourse
+which had been carried on between these professed Christians on the one
+hand, and the poor heathens on the other, not one attempt, so far as is
+known, had been made to impart a knowledge of that glorious Being who is
+the "Light of the world" and "the Saviour of men;" nor of God the Holy
+Spirit, who is the Giver of the only true and eternal life.  The
+scientific objects of the voyage had, indeed, thus far been successful,
+and, to a great extent, had been rendered so by the goodwill of the
+islanders; but to the silent appeal for religious teaching and spiritual
+aid made to the philosophers of that party by the ignorance of their
+hosts there was no reply.
+
+The fort was now completely dismantled, and preparations were made for
+sailing.  At a last interview with the chiefs, all differences were
+settled, and the voyagers parted from the islanders on the most friendly
+terms.  The latter, indeed, were loud in their demonstrations of grief.
+Tupia, who still adhered to his determination of sailing in the
+Endeavour, though he shed tears, bade farewell to his countrymen in a
+dignified manner, and as far as he was able, concealed the sorrow he
+evidently felt.  The Endeavour had remained exactly three months at the
+island.  It was high time for her to leave; for the season for cocoanuts
+and bread-fruit being over, the natives could no longer spare any of
+their provisions for the strangers.  Tupia, who had gone on shore,
+returned again on board with his servant, a lad of thirteen, called
+Tayeto, and on July 13, 1769, the Endeavour sailed from Otaheite to
+continue her voyage towards the west.
+
+Tupia informed Captain Cook that four islands, called Huaheine, Ulietea,
+Otaha, and Bolabola, lay at the distance of between one and two days'
+sail of Otaheite, and that refreshments in abundance might be procured
+at them.  In consequence, however, of light winds, the Endeavour did not
+get off Huaheine till the morning of the 16th.  Tupia probably fancied
+that he could impose on the white men as he did on his own people, for
+in his character of priest he began to offer prayers, or rather to
+perform incantations, as soon as he saw the prospect of a breeze
+springing up.
+
+Upon the ship's getting close in with the land, several canoes came off,
+but kept at a distance till they discovered Tupia.  In one of them were
+Oree, king of the island, and his wife.  On receiving reiterated
+assurances that they would be treated as friends, they ventured on
+board.  Though at first struck with astonishment at what they saw, they
+soon became familiar with their visitors, and the king expressed his
+wish to change names with the captain, who was henceforth called Captain
+Oree, while the chief took the name of King Cookee.  The ship having
+anchored in a small, excellent harbour called Owharee, the captain, Mr
+Banks, Dr Solander, and Mr Monkhouse, with Tupia and King Cookee, went
+on shore.  On landing Tupia stripped himself to the waist, and desired
+Mr Monkhouse, whom he seems to have looked on as a brother priest, to
+do the same; and sitting down in a large guest-house, full of people,
+opposite the king, he began a sort of incantation, the king answering in
+what appeared to be set responses.  During this he made presents of some
+handkerchiefs, beads, two bunches of feathers, and plantains to the
+Etua, or god of the island, and received in return a hog, two bunches of
+feathers, and some young plantains, as presents to the white man's God.
+[Note 3.]
+
+These he ordered to be carried on board.  On the treaty, as the ceremony
+was supposed to be, being concluded, every one went his way, and Tupia
+repaired to worship at a morai.  The next day, as Tupia was much engaged
+with his friends in the island, the captain and Mr Banks took Tayeto as
+their companion in their rambles.  The most interesting object they met
+with was a chest or cask, the lid of which was nicely sewed on, and
+neatly thatched with palm-leaves.  It was fixed on two horizontal poles,
+and supported on arches of wood neatly carved.  The object of the poles
+seemed to be to remove it from place to place.  There was a circular
+hole at one end, stopped, when it was first seen, with cloth.  The chest
+was, on a second visit, found to be empty.  The general resemblance
+between it and the ark of the Lord among the Jews was remarkable.  The
+boy called it _Ewharre no Etua_ (the house of the god).  He, however,
+could give no account of its use.
+
+Some hogs were exchanged for axes, and some medals bestowed on the king,
+and no accident having happened to mar their friendly intercourse with
+the natives, the voyagers took their departure.  The people were
+superior in size and appearance to the general run of the natives of
+Otaheite, and the women fairer and better-looking.  Not having
+experienced the effects of the guns of the Dolphin, they were less timid
+than the people of Otaheite, and did not fall down on hearing a musket
+fired.  On one of them being detected in thieving, his companions
+prescribed a good beating, which was at once administered.
+
+The next island visited was Ulietea, where, within the coral reef, the
+ship anchored in a good harbour.  Two canoes at once came off, each
+bringing a woman and a pig--the one as a mark of confidence, the other
+as a present.  The ladies each received a spike-nail and some beads,
+greatly to their delight.  On landing, the Union-Jack was hoisted, and
+the three islands in sight taken possession of in the name of his
+Britannic Majesty.  Here was a large morai, called Tapodeboatea, which
+was visited, and found to be different from those of Otaheite.  It
+consisted only of four walls, eight feet high, built of coral stones--
+some of immense size--enclosing an area of five-and-twenty yards square,
+filled up with smaller stones.  On the top of it many carved planks were
+set on end, and at a little distance was an altar, on which lay a hog of
+about eighty pounds weight, roasted whole, supposed to have been a
+sacrifice.  Round it were four or five arks resting on poles like that
+seen at Huaheine.  In the interior of one of them Mr Banks found a
+package done up tightly in mats.  He had opened several folds, but the
+last resisted all his attempts; and as he saw that his proceeding gave
+great offence, he was compelled to desist.  Not far off was a long
+house, where, among rolls of cloth, was the model of a canoe, about
+three feet long, to which were tied eight human jaw-bones.  Other
+jaw-bones were seen near the ark, and Tupia affirmed that they were
+those of natives of the island.
+
+Bad weather detained the ship in the harbour of Oopoa for two more days,
+and when at length she got out, she was in imminent danger of striking
+on a reef, having got unexpectedly close to the edge of one, which was
+discovered from the water being shallow on one side, though deep enough
+under the keel to float her.  Some time was expended in endeavouring to
+beat up to an anchorage off Bolabola, and several smaller islands were
+visited.
+
+A leak having been discovered, and some more ballast being required,
+Captain Cook put into a harbour in Ulietea, at the opposite side of the
+island to that he had before visited.  While the ship's company were
+taking in ballast and water, Mr Banks and Dr Solander went on shore,
+and were everywhere received with the greatest respect by the natives,
+who seemed conscious that their white visitors had the power, though not
+the desire, to do them every possible harm.  Men, women, and children
+crowded round them, and followed them wherever they went; but no one was
+guilty of the least incivility.  On the contrary, the men vied with each
+other in lifting them over any dirt or water in the way.
+
+On approaching the first house, they saw the people arrange themselves
+on either side of a long mat spread on the ground, at the farther end of
+which sat some young girls and very pretty children, dressed with the
+greatest neatness and taste, who kept their position, evidently
+expecting the strangers to come up and make them presents.  At one
+house, at the end of a mat thirty feet long, sat a girl about six years
+old; her dress was red, and a large quantity of plaited hair was wound
+round her head.  She was leaning on the arm of a good-looking woman,
+supposed to be her nurse.  The gentlemen walked up to her, and as soon
+as they approached she stretched out her hands for the beads which they
+offered, and received them with a grace which no princess in Europe
+could have surpassed.  The people, in consequence of these gifts, seemed
+to be so pleased with their visitors that they employed every means in
+their power to amuse them.  The master of one of the houses where they
+stopped ordered a dance to be performed before them, different from any
+they had yet witnessed.  It was executed by one man, who put on a high
+head-dress of feathers, edged round with sharks' teeth.  As he moved
+slowly round he made it describe a circle, bringing it often close to
+the faces of the spectators so as to make them start back, always to the
+great amusement of the rest.
+
+In the course of their walk the next day they met a company of dancers--
+two women and six men, with three drums--who were making a tour of the
+island for their own amusement, for they received no pay, and were said
+by Tupia to be among the principal people of the country.  The women
+wore graceful head-dresses of long braids of hair and flowers.  The
+upper parts of their bodies were without clothing; but they were amply
+clothed from the breast downwards in black, and they wore pearls in
+their ears.  The dances were of the immoral kind general in the islands.
+Regular dramas were also represented before the strangers.
+
+It appeared that the island had lately been conquered by the subjects of
+Opoony, King of Bolabola, whose acquaintance Captain Cook wished to
+make.  Instead of seeing a fine-looking warrior as he had expected, he
+found a withered, decrepit wretch, half blind with age; yet it seemed
+that he was the terror of all the surrounding islands.
+
+A good supply of hogs, poultry, and other provisions having been
+obtained at Ulietea, and her leak being stopped, the Endeavour sailed on
+August 9.  As Bolabola was difficult of access, Captain Cook gave up his
+intention of touching there.  To gratify Tupia, however, he fired a shot
+towards the island, though it was seven leagues distant.  The object of
+Tupia appeared to be that of showing his resentment against the king of
+that island, as well as of exhibiting the power of his new allies.
+
+To the six islands which had been visited or seen, namely, Ulietea,
+Otaha, Bolabola, Huaheine, Tubai, and Maurua, Captain Cook gave the name
+of the Society Islands.  Otaheite was not included in the group, but
+continued to be known as King George's Island.  [Note 1.]
+
+The voyagers were much disappointed in finding that they could not keep
+their live-stock.  The hogs would not eat European grain of any sort,
+nor bread-dust; and the fowls were seized with a disease which made them
+hold their heads between their legs till they died.
+
+Nothing worthy of notice occurred till the 13th, when an island, called,
+by Tupia, Oheteroa, was seen.  The next morning Mr Gore was sent in the
+pinnace to attempt a landing, accompanied by Mr Banks, Dr Solander,
+and Tupia.  As the boat approached the land a number of natives, armed
+with long lances, appeared.  The main body sat down, while two walked
+abreast of the boat as she pulled along the shore.  At length they
+leaped into the water and swam towards the boat, but were left behind.
+Two others followed, but were soon distanced.  At last, one man, running
+on, got up to the boat.  Mr Banks, wishing to gain the goodwill of the
+natives by kind treatment, urged Mr Gore to take him in; but he
+declined doing so.  On the English attempting to land, soon after this,
+several natives came off in a canoe and boarded the boat, evidently with
+the intention of capturing her; indeed, it was not till muskets were
+fired over their heads that the savages leaped out and swam ashore.  As
+no harbour or good landing-place was discovered in the circuit of the
+island, and as the natives were everywhere hostile, the attempt to land
+was abandoned.  The clothing of the inhabitants was considered superior
+to that of the natives of the islands before visited.  The cloth of
+which their dresses were made was richly coloured.  One piece of red or
+yellow was crossed on the breast, and sewed round the waist as a sash.
+They had also head-dresses of white or lead-coloured cloth, shaped like
+a small turban; and some wore the feathers of the native birds round
+their heads.  They had well-finished lances in their hands, twenty feet
+long, and highly carved and polished clubs and pikes.  The canoe also,
+though small, was richly carved; and her head and stern were ornamented
+with white feathers.  Tupia stated that there were numerous islands
+between the south and north-west, at different distances from Oheteroa;
+and that there was one, three days' sail to the north-east, called
+Manua, or Bird Island.  The most distant island with which he was
+acquainted to the south was Mouton, but his father had told him of
+islands to the south of that.  But considering the uncertainty of this
+information, Captain Cook determined not to lose time in looking for
+islands, but to steer to the south in search of a continent.
+
+In leaving these islands we cannot help expressing regret that the
+voyagers were so forgetful, as they appear to have been, of their
+obligations to the religion they professed, and of the eternal welfare
+of those among whom they sojourned.  They found a people sunk in
+idolatry and superstition, and should have endeavoured to do as the
+Apostle Paul did at Athens, where, finding an altar inscribed "To the
+unknown God," he said to the assembled multitude, "Whom therefore ye
+ignorantly worship, Him declare I unto you," and then began to preach
+Jesus Christ and His great salvation.  But so far from imitating this
+example, they, in many instances, took part in their idolatrous and
+superstitious ceremonies.  It is vain to attempt an excuse of these
+Englishmen by saying either that it was the fashion of the times to pass
+by the heathen without a thought for their wretched lost condition, or
+that the party of philosophers and scientific men and discoverers were
+not Christian missionaries.  Every Christian ought to look upon himself
+as a missionary, when work for his Lord can be done by him; and it was a
+bad fashion to follow, surely, that of suffering heathens to perish
+without one effort made for their salvation.  No doubt there were great
+physical and natural impediments in the way of Cook and his associates
+making anything known to the natives of those islands; but these
+impediments were overcome in relation to other matters.
+
+The Endeavour sailed from Oheteroa on August 15, 1769.  The 25th was the
+first anniversary of the day she had quitted the shores of England.  To
+celebrate it a Cheshire cheese was cut, and a cask of porter broached,
+and both were found excellent.  Those who have been long at sea and away
+from home can best understand the importance attached to such trifles,
+and the pleasure they afford.
+
+On the morning of the 30th a comet was seen in the east, a little above
+the horizon.  Tupia, who observed it with others, instantly cried out
+that as soon as the people of Bolabola perceived it they would attack
+the inhabitants of Uhetea, who would have to fly to the mountains to
+save their lives.  Meeting with a heavy sea and strong gales from the
+westward, on September 1 Captain Cook wore and stood to the northward.
+On the weather moderating he continued his course to the westward during
+the whole of September.  Several seals were seen asleep on the surface
+of the water, and various birds were perceived, a sure indication that
+the ship was approaching land.  On October 6 land was seen from the
+mast-head, bearing west by north.  In the evening it could be seen from
+the deck.  It was not till the evening of the next day that the voyagers
+got near enough to observe the nature of the country, when it appeared
+of great extent, with four or five ranges of hills rising one over the
+other, and beyond them a lofty chain of mountains.  The general opinion
+was that they had found the _Terra Australia incognita_.  A bay was
+seen, and smoke rising from the shore, but night coming on, they were
+obliged to stand off till daylight.  The next day, on standing in again,
+some small but neat houses were seen, and a considerable number of
+people seated on the beach.  Farther on was discovered a tolerably high
+and regular paling, enclosing the whole of the top of a hill.  Some on
+board supposed it to be a park for deer, others an enclosure for oxen or
+sheep.  In the afternoon the ship came to an anchor in a bay off the
+mouth of a river.  The sides of the bay were white cliffs of great
+height; the middle was low land, with hills rising behind and
+terminating in a chain of lofty mountains.
+
+Captain Cook, with Mr Banks, Dr Solander, and a party of men in the
+yawl and pinnace, landed on the east side of the river; but some people
+being perceived on the west side, the yawl crossed over, and while the
+gentlemen landed, four boys were left in charge of her.  On the approach
+of the Englishmen the natives ran away, and the former advanced towards
+some huts two or three hundred yards from the water's edge.  When,
+however, they had got some distance from the yawl, four men with long
+lances rushed out of the woods towards her, and would have cut her off
+had not the people in the pinnace covered them, and called to the boys
+to drop down the stream.  This they did, but the natives pursued in
+spite of two musket-shots fired at them.  At length, one of the natives
+was poising his spear to dart it at the boys, when the coxswain of the
+pinnace fired a third time, and shot the native dead.  The other three
+at first attempted to drag off the dead body, but fear soon made them
+drop it and take to flight.
+
+On the captain and his companions returning to the boat they stopped to
+examine the body, which had been shot through the heart.  It was that of
+a man of middle stature, of a brown, but not very dark complexion.  One
+side of his face was tattooed in spiral lines of regular figure, and his
+hair tied in a knot on the top of his head, but no feathers in it.  He
+wore a garment of a fine cloth, of a manufacture new to the English.
+When the voyagers returned on board, they could hear the natives talking
+very loudly.  The next day the captain and the same party landed with
+Tupia, and the marines were afterwards sent for.  A large body of
+natives had collected on the opposite side of the river, apparently
+unarmed; but on the approach of the English they started up, each man
+holding a spear or dart, and made signs to the strangers to depart.  The
+marines being drawn up, the visitors again approached the natives, when
+Tupia addressed them in the language of Otaheite, which they perfectly
+understood.  He told them that their visitors wanted provisions and
+water, and would pay them with iron, the properties of which he
+explained as well as he could.  They replied that they were willing to
+trade if the English would cross over to them.  Captain Cook consented
+to do this, provided they would put aside their arms.  This they would
+not consent to do.  Tupia warned the English, during the conversation,
+that the natives were not friendly.  Captain Cook then invited the
+natives to come across to them.  At last, one of them stripped himself
+and swam over without his arms.  He was soon after followed by others,
+to the number of twenty, most of whom came armed; and though iron and
+beads were offered them, they set no value apparently on either, for a
+few feathers were offered in return, and they at once showed their
+hostile disposition by endeavouring to snatch the weapons from the hands
+of their visitors.  They were told, through Tupia, that if they
+continued to proceed in that manner they would be killed;
+notwithstanding this, one of them seized Mr Green's hanger from his
+side, and ran off with it.  Mr Banks on this fired at him with small
+shot; but though hit, he still continued to wave the hanger round his
+head.  Mr Monkhouse, seeing this, fired at him with ball, when he
+instantly dropped.  Upon this, the main body, who had retired to a rock
+in the middle of the river, began to return.  Two that were near the man
+who had been killed tried to drag off the body.  One seized his weapon
+of green talc; and the other tried to secure the hanger, which Mr
+Monkhouse had but just time to prevent.  As the whole body were now
+returning with threatening gestures, those who had their guns loaded
+with small shot fired.  The effect was to make the natives turn back,
+and to retreat up the country, several of them being wounded.  Such was
+the first unhappy attempt of the English to open up an intercourse with
+the inhabitants of New Zealand, for that was the magnificent country
+Captain Cook and his companions had now reached.  Painful as it is to
+reflect on the sacrifice of human life which often in those days
+attended the first intercourse of civilised Europeans with the savage
+inhabitants of newly-discovered countries, and the cruelties and
+injuries inflicted, we must not judge our countrymen too harshly.  Much
+less value was set on human life a century ago than is the case at
+present, and dark-skinned savages were scarcely regarded as beings of
+the same nature as white men.  Captain Cook was, however, undoubtedly a
+kind and humane man, and was sincere in his expressions of regret at the
+blood his followers so frequently shed whenever they met with opposition
+from the natives of the lands they visited.
+
+Having no longer any hope of establishing a friendly intercourse with
+the inhabitants of this place, and finding that the water in the river
+was salt, Captain Cook proceeded with the boats round the head of the
+bay, in search of fresh water, intending also, if possible, to surprise
+some of the natives, and, by kind treatment and presents, to obtain
+their friendship.  Everywhere, however, a dangerous surf beat on the
+coast, and he was unable to land.  But seeing two canoes coming in
+towards the shore, one under sail, and the other moved by paddles, he
+judged it necessary for the object he had in view to intercept them.
+Supposing that they were fishermen without arms, he hoped to do this
+without bloodshed.  Notwithstanding the way in which he had placed the
+boats, one of the canoes managed to escape; but the other, under sail,
+came directly into the middle of the English boats without perceiving
+what they were.  On discovering the strangers, the natives lowered their
+sail and took to their paddles.  Tupia called out to them that those in
+the boats wished to be friends; but the natives preferred trusting to
+their paddles, and continued their flight.  On this, a musket was fired
+over their heads, when they ceased paddling and began to strip, not to
+swim to the shore but to fight to the last.
+
+When the boat came up they attacked the English with paddles, stones,
+and other weapons, and showed a determination not to be taken alive.
+The English, in their own defence, fired, when four out of the seven
+people in the canoe were killed.  The other three were lads--the eldest
+of whom, about nineteen years old, leaped into the sea, swimming
+vigorously, and resisting every effort made to capture him.  At last he
+was seized and taken into the boat, as were the two younger lads,
+without further attempt to escape.  As soon as they were in the boat,
+the lads squatted down, evidently expecting instant death.  Every effort
+was made to win their confidence, and with so much success that by the
+time the ship was reached they appeared not only reconciled to their
+fate, but in high spirits.  On food being offered them, they ate it
+voraciously, and asked and answered questions with every appearance of
+pleasure.  At night, however, they sighed, and seemed to be mourning for
+the friends they had lost; but, encouraged by Tupia, they quickly
+regained their cheerfulness, and in the morning ate another enormous
+meal.  On being told that they would be put on shore where the English
+had landed the previous day, they expressed great alarm, and said that
+the inhabitants were their enemies and would eat them.  At last, on
+landing on the other side of the bay, after hesitating for some time,
+the lads cried out that they saw, among a large body of natives who were
+approaching, one of their relations.  Still they seemed doubtful about
+joining them, and evidently regretted leaving their new friends.  The
+body of the native who had been killed the previous day still lay on the
+shore.  The boys, seeing it, went and covered it with some of the
+clothes they had received on board the Endeavour.  Soon after, a man,
+who proved to be the uncle of one of the boys, swam over with a green
+bough in his hand, which was here, as at Otaheite, an emblem of peace.
+Tupia received the branch, and several presents were made to the native.
+Notwithstanding this, he refused to go on board the strange ship.
+Breaking off another bough, he then approached the dead body, before
+which he performed numerous ceremonies.  When this was done he returned
+to his companions, and held with them a long consultation.  The boys
+refused to go back to their countrymen, and begged again to be taken on
+board.  The natives, after this, were observed from the ship to cross
+the river, and to carry off the dead body on a kind of bier.
+
+Later in the day, the captain directed Tupia to ask the boys if they had
+any longer a fear of landing, the body having been carried off, which
+was supposed to be a ratification of peace.  They replied that they were
+perfectly ready to go, and stepped with alacrity into the boat which was
+prepared to carry them on shore.
+
+On the boat reaching the shore they landed willingly, but soon after,
+when she put off, waded back into the water, and entreated to be taken
+on board.  As the midshipman in charge of the boat had received strict
+orders not to receive them, their request was not granted.  After a time
+a man came and took them across the river, on a raft, to where a large
+number of people were assembled.  They appeared to be well received, and
+shortly after were seen standing on the beach, when they waved their
+hands three times and stepped nimbly back to their companions.
+
+Captain Cook gave the name of Poverty Bay to the place where these
+events occurred; and in his journal he strongly expresses his regret at
+the destruction of the four unfortunate fishermen, saying that, had he
+supposed they would have resisted, he would not have attempted to stop
+them; but that, as it was, he could not allow his people to be knocked
+on the head by the savages.  It may be asked, why were the savages not
+permitted to escape?  The reply of Captain Cook is, that he considered
+it his duty, in prosecution of his enterprise, to open a communication
+with the natives by force if he could not succeed by gentle means.  In
+pursuance of that object, and in accordance with this supposed duty, our
+countrymen had little scruple in shedding the blood and taking the lives
+of their fellow-men, even when violence was not necessary for their own
+safety.
+
+The next morning the Endeavour sailed from Poverty Bay, but, being
+becalmed, several canoes came off to her.  The natives in one canoe
+setting the example, the rest were easily persuaded to come on board, to
+the number of fifty men.  Only two weapons were seen among them; these
+were made of green talc, and called _patoo-patoo_, being shaped somewhat
+like a pointed battledore, with a short handle and sharp edges.  They
+were well contrived for close fighting, and would certainly split the
+thickest skull at a single blow.  The sad truth of this some of our
+countrymen were afterwards to experience, when not far from this spot
+the greater part of a ship's company were destroyed, each savage
+producing one of these weapons from under his cloak, and singling out a
+victim for instant destruction.  Presents were made by the officers of
+the Endeavour to the natives, who were all so eager for the white men's
+goods that they afterwards exchanged everything they had with them, even
+to the paddles of their canoes.  Inquiries were made for the poor boys,
+and the captain was assured that no harm had happened to them, and that
+it was in consequence of the account they had given of their reception
+on board that the present party had come off to the ship.
+
+An hour before sunset the natives paddled off, leaving three of their
+number below.  As soon as this was discovered they were hailed, but
+would not return, nor did the deserted natives seem to be alarmed.  The
+next morning, however, when they discovered that the ship was at a
+distance from the land, their consternation was excessive, and Tupia had
+great difficulty in pacifying them.  On standing in again, a canoe with
+an old chief came off, but he and his followers would not venture on
+board till Tupia had used numerous arguments to persuade them--among
+others, an assurance that the strangers did not eat men.  This remark,
+coupled with those of the boys, gave the English their first suspicions
+of the horrible propensity of the people with whom they were now
+attempting to open up an intercourse.  The old chief, after remaining a
+short time on board, returned with the three men to the shore.
+
+The point of land first made to the north of Poverty Bay proved to be
+the most eastern part of New Zealand, and was called East Cape.  The
+Endeavour was now steered to the south.  An island close to the main was
+passed, which, from its similarity to Portland in Dorsetshire, received
+the same name.  A number of natives were here seen seated on the cliffs
+watching the ship's movements.  When she suddenly got close to a reef,
+and there was some sign of confusion on board, they showed a disposition
+to attack her.  Canoes at different times came off, and in one the
+people performed certain ceremonies, sometimes offering peace, and then
+threatening war.  Five large canoes full of armed men soon after came
+off.  As the boat's crew were sounding, it was necessary to drive them
+away.  A musket fired over their heads had no effect, but a four-pounder
+charged with grape shot, though fired wide, put them to flight.
+
+Farther along the coast, the next morning, nine or ten large canoes,
+which must have contained little short of two hundred men, came off.
+When the first five were within a hundred yards of the ship, the natives
+began to sing their war-songs and to brandish their weapons.  Tupia, on
+this, was ordered to inform them of the power and effects of the English
+thunder-making arms, and a four-pounder loaded with grape was fired wide
+of them.  The result was satisfactory, and the natives went peaceably
+away.  The following day another fleet of canoes came alongside, and
+though they had only stale fish to sell, Captain Cook accepted it for
+the sake of encouraging traffic.  The natives, however, showed every
+disposition to take advantage of the strangers, and one of them having
+agreed to exchange a black cloak for a piece of red cloth, on receiving
+the cloth, packed it in a basket with the cloak, which he refused to
+give up, and made off with both cloth and cloak.  Among those who were
+leaning over the ship's side to hand up the articles purchased from the
+natives was Tupia's boy, Tayeto.  One of the natives, watching his
+opportunity, suddenly seized the boy, and dragging him over, held him
+down in the canoe, which made off.  The marines on deck were ordered to
+fire, and to aim at the end of the canoe farthest away from the boy.
+One of the natives was seen to fall, when the other let go his hold of
+Tayeto, who leaped overboard and swam to the ship.  A boat was lowered,
+and he was taken up unhurt, but dreadfully frightened.  The canoes made
+towards the shore, and it was observed that three men were lifted out of
+them, either killed or badly wounded.
+
+In this instance the natives actually deserved the punishment they
+received.  Captain Cook called the headland off which this circumstance
+occurred Cape Kidnappers.  When Tayeto recovered from his fright he took
+a fish to Tupia, that he might offer it to his Etua.  Tupia praised him,
+and ordered him to throw it into the sea.
+
+Captain Cook having now stood to the southward for a considerable
+distance without finding a harbour, tacked and stood to the northward,
+in hope of being more successful in that direction.  The ship was off a
+high bluff headland with yellowish cliffs, which was accordingly called
+Cape Turnagain.  Soon afterwards two chiefs and their three attendants
+paddled off, and willingly came on board.  One of the chiefs had a very
+pleasing and honest expression of countenance.  Though they would not
+eat, they seemed disposed to be very friendly, so much so that they
+insisted on remaining on board all night.  The next morning they were
+somewhat surprised at finding themselves so far from the shore, but went
+away without hesitation.  As the ship sailed along, several canoes came
+off to her, a few at a time.  In one were two old chiefs, who, with many
+expressions of goodwill, invited the strangers on shore.  The surf
+prevented their going, but in the evening, the wind moderating, Captain
+Cook, with Mr Banks and Dr Solander, landed, and were received in a
+most friendly manner.  The natives took care not to appear in large
+bodies, the members of two or three families only keeping together.
+These little companies sat on the ground, and by signs invited their
+visitors to draw near.  These indications of a friendly disposition
+determined the commander to fill his casks with water at this place.
+
+The next morning, while this operation was going forward, Mr Banks and
+Dr Solander walked along the shore of the bay by themselves without
+anxiety, and collected numerous plants.  They visited several huts, and
+found the inhabitants at dinner, their food consisting, at this time of
+the year, of fish and the root of a large fern.  The roots were prepared
+by scorching them over a fire, and then beating them till the charred
+bark fell off.  The remainder was a clammy, soft substance, not
+unpleasant to the taste, but mixed with three times its bulk of fibres,
+which could not be swallowed.  This part was spat out into baskets ready
+at hand for its reception.  No animals were seen, except some ugly
+little dogs.  Carefully cultivated and closely fenced plantations of
+sweet potatoes and other vegetables were seen.  The women were plain,
+and had their faces painted with red ochre and oil; the men generally
+did not follow the latter custom, but one man was observed who had a
+piece of yellow ochre in his hand, with which he renewed the coloured
+decorations on his person whenever he supposed them to be deficient.
+Mr Banks and others, having remained on shore after the boats had gone
+off with the casks, were brought on board by the natives in one of their
+canoes.  Indeed, all the intercourse with the people in this place was
+carried on in the most friendly manner.
+
+At the watering-place the natives entertained their visitors with a
+war-song, in which the women joined, with horrid distortions of
+countenance, rolling their eyes, thrusting out their tongues and heaving
+deep sighs, all keeping perfect time.  A canoe was seen here,
+sixty-eight feet and a half long, five broad, and three feet and a half
+deep; she had a sharp bottom, consisting of three trunks of trees
+hollowed; the side planks were sixty-two feet long in one piece, carved
+in bas-relief; the head being still more richly carved.  A large
+unfinished house was also visited; the side ports were carved in a
+masterly style, though with whimsical taste.  The bay was called by the
+natives Tolaga.
+
+Wood and water, and an abundance of wild celery, which proved an
+excellent anti-scorbutic, having been got on board, the Endeavour
+weighed and stood to the north.  The wood they had cut was like the
+English maple; and a cabbage-tree was met with and cut down for the sake
+of the cabbage, or the succulent soft stem, so-called by the voyagers
+from its taste when boiled.  The country abounded with plants, and the
+woods with birds in an endless variety, and exquisitely beautiful.
+After rounding each cape, numerous villages were seen, and much
+cultivated ground.  Some way on an immense canoe with sixteen paddles on
+each side, and carrying sixty armed men, gave chase to the ship.  To
+prevent an attack, a round shot was fired near them, when they paddled
+off; the headland near at hand was therefore called Cape Runaway.  After
+this, a large number of canoes came off to trade; but the natives were
+disposed to cheat.  At length some linen hanging over the bows to dry
+was carried off by a man, who, though fired at, deliberately packed it
+up and made off with it.  As the natives continued to insult the
+English, a shot was fired close to them, which went bounding over the
+water far ahead, and made them paddle away at great speed.
+
+Several villages were seen larger than any before observed, built on
+eminences near the sea, and fortified on the land side by a bank and
+ditch, with a high paling within it, carried all round; some of them had
+also outworks.  They were supposed to be the fortified villages called
+by the natives Pahs or Hippahs.  There seems to have been much doubt in
+the minds of the officers of the Endeavour as to whether the land on
+which they were now coasting was an island or part of a vast continent.
+The captain seems to have held to the former opinion, his officers to
+the latter.
+
+The ship was now near a cluster of islands to which the names of the
+Mayor and the Court of Aldermen were given.  Farther on more villages
+were in sight, with some hundreds of large canoes drawn up on the beach
+under them.  The whole country from Cape Turnagain, thus far, was said
+to be under the rule of a single chief, called Teratu.  A large inlet
+was next entered, and here the ship anchored.  Several canoes of a less
+ornamental description came alongside, and tried to steal the buoy of
+the anchor.  Three times during the night they repeated the attempt,
+hoping, it seemed, to catch the crew asleep.  Again they came at
+daylight, and sang a war-song, preparatory to an attack.  Tupia,
+however, expostulated with them, and explained so successfully that they
+would certainly be the sufferers in case of a skirmish, that instead of
+fighting, they began to trade.  Here, again, a native made off with two
+pieces of cloth, both of which he had got for one weapon, which he
+refused to deliver up.  A musket-ball was fired through his canoe; but
+he would not return.  It was curious that the people in the other canoes
+paid no attention to him, though he was bleeding, but continued to trade
+as if nothing had happened.  Soon afterwards, indeed, the same trick was
+played by others.  Two muskets were fired, the bullets going through the
+sides of the canoe between wind and water.  This only made the savages
+pull off more rapidly.  As the commander intended to remain in this
+place for some days, to observe the transit of Mercury, it was necessary
+to make the natives understand the superiority of the English; and a
+round shot was therefore fired over their heads.
+
+All the natives, however, were not alike dishonest.  One chief, in
+particular, had behaved with great propriety during the day, neither
+attempting to cheat nor showing any fear of the English.  He came off
+the next morning, and soon established friendly relations with them.  He
+said that the people were generally convinced of their power, and would,
+he hoped, behave properly in future.  His name was Toiava.
+
+An officer, with the marines and a party of men, was sent on shore to
+cut wood.  No houses were seen; but there were a number of people, who
+seemed to have slept under the bushes.  The state of warfare in which
+the people existed was shown by Toiava when on board one day.  Two
+canoes were perceived coming in from the opposite side of the bay, when,
+saying that they were enemies, he hastened off to the shore with all his
+canoes.  He soon returned, however, they not being the people he
+supposed.  A large number of mackerel were obtained here from the
+natives, the sailors salting enough to last for a month.
+
+Fortunately, a fine day enabled the commander and Mr Green to obtain a
+satisfactory observation of Mercury; and the name of Mercury Bay was,
+therefore, given to the harbour on the shore of which it was taken.
+While they were on shore another case, of cheating by a native occurred.
+The thief and his companions having pulled off in their canoe, sang
+their war-song, and shook their paddles in defiance.  This so provoked
+Mr Gore, the officer in charge, that he fired and killed the man, a
+circumstance for which Captain Cook expressed his deep regret.  Though
+at first alarmed, the natives on shore, on inquiring into the matter,
+seemed to think that the man had received his deserts, and the friendly
+intercourse begun between them and the English was not further
+interrupted.
+
+A little before sunset, the natives retired to eat their supper,
+consisting of birds, fish, and lobsters.  Some were roasted, stuck on
+sticks inclined towards the fire; others were baked in ovens on the
+ground, in the way practised by the people of Otaheite.  Among the
+natives was a woman mourning for the death of a relative.  She sat on
+the ground by herself, and cut herself all over with pieces of shell
+till she was covered with blood, singing in a mournful voice, at the
+same time, a song the meaning of which Tupia could not understand.
+
+The shore abounded with clams, cockles, and, in some places,
+rock-oysters.  Numerous wild-fowl also were seen, and several were shot.
+The boats rowed up a river at the head of the bay for four or five
+miles, and near it a deserted fort of considerable strength was visited.
+Several beds of oysters were also discovered, dry at half-ebb, and a
+boat being sent to fetch some, returned completely laden, so that the
+ship's company had a regular feast of them.  Fish, also in abundance,
+were brought off by the natives.  On the north side of the bay, a pah,
+small, but very strong and beautifully situated, was visited.  It stood
+on the top of a rock detached from the mainland, surrounded at
+high-water.  The centre part was perforated by an arch sixty feet in
+height, and of considerable width.  The only way of reaching the top was
+by a very narrow winding path.  Here there was room only for four or
+five huts.  Farther on was a much larger fortified village, the
+inhabitants of which, to the number of a hundred, came out and invited
+the strangers to visit them, and seemed highly pleased when their
+invitation was accepted.
+
+This pah, or fort, was examined with much interest, and afterwards
+minutely described by the English visitors.  It seemed, indeed, a place
+which, if resolutely defended, was capable of holding out against any
+number of assailants famished only with such arms as were seen in the
+hands of the natives.  It was curious that men capable of constructing
+so elaborate a fortification should have invented simply such weapons as
+lances, small and large battle-axes, and clubs; for not a sling nor a
+bow was seen among them, nor any other weapon but those mentioned.  When
+stones were used they were thrown by the hand.
+
+The Endeavour, having taken an ample supply of celery on board, sailed
+from Mercury Bay.  The most successful generals of ancient and modern
+times were able to take advantage of their greatest victories by having
+paid careful attention to their commissariat; and Cook, for the same
+reason, could prolong his researches for a greater length of time than
+any previous navigator, and keep his crew in tolerable health, more
+especially preserve them from that fearful scourge of seamen, the
+scurvy.  Of course he was greatly indebted to the experienced botanists
+on board, who were able to discover any anti-scorbutic plants grown on
+the shores they visited.  Probably the lives of thousands of seamen
+might have been saved had the commanders been acquainted with the wild
+plants that the loving God has everywhere provided for the use of His
+creatures, capable of preventing that dire complaint.
+
+About fifty miles to the north of Mercury Bay, the natives came off and
+threw stones at the ship, nor would they listen to the expostulations
+and advice of Tupia, till a musket-ball was sent through the bottom of
+one of their canoes, when they were convinced of the truth of his
+account respecting the power of the strangers.
+
+On the 19th a large inlet was entered, in which the ship brought up.
+Immediately natives came off, who said that they had heard of the
+strangers from Toiava.  One young man introduced himself as his
+grandson, and received several presents.  They also addressed Tupia by
+name, showing that they had heard of the English from their friends.
+The commander and his usual companions proceeded in the boats nine miles
+up the inlet, which they discovered terminated in a river.  This they
+entered with the flood, and found fresh water three miles from the
+mouth.  Here they saw a large village on a sand-bank entirely surrounded
+by mud, probably considered a sufficient protection from their enemies.
+They were particularly struck by the great size of the pine trees which
+grew on the banks.  One measured nineteen feet eight inches in girth at
+the height of six feet from the ground.  From the root to the first
+branch it was eighty-nine feet, and as straight as an arrow, tapering
+very little in proportion to its height.  It probably contained, by the
+captain's computation, three hundred and sixty-six cubic feet of solid
+timber.  Others still larger were seen.  A small one was cut down, and
+found to be similar to the pitch pine, too heavy for masts, but the
+carpenter was of opinion that, by tapping, the wood would be lightened,
+and that then the trees would make the finest masts in the world.  These
+trees were the celebrated Kauri pine, from which a valuable gum is
+extracted.  It also makes very fine planking.  This tree, the flax
+plant, and the gigantic fern are among the characteristic productions of
+New Zealand.
+
+The name of the Thames was given to the river explored.  The natives in
+the neighbourhood behaved in the most friendly manner; but while the
+commander and Dr Solander were on shore, and Mr Banks with Tupia and
+some of the natives were below, a lad took possession of a half-minute
+glass from the binnacle.  Mr Hicks, who was commanding officer, ordered
+the lad to be triced up and a dozen lashes given to him.  His countrymen
+interfered, and called for their arms from the canoes alongside.  In
+vain Mr Banks, hearing the noise, and coming on deck, expostulated with
+the lieutenant.  Tupia at length pacified the natives by explaining what
+was to happen, and allowed the punishment to proceed.  As soon as it was
+over, an old man, supposed to be the father of the boy, gave him a
+beating and sent him into the canoe; but the confidence of the natives
+was gone, and though they promised to come back, no more was seen of
+them.
+
+The natives on most occasions were ready to steal and cheat, whenever
+they thought they could do so with impunity.  This occurred nearly every
+day as the Endeavour proceeded along the coast.  In one day, at
+different times, nearly five hundred natives were on board or alongside,
+showing that the country was very populous.  One of these was making off
+with an article of which he had possessed himself without giving
+anything in return, when the midshipman to whom it belonged hove a lead
+with a hook secured to it at the end of a line, with such aim that the
+hook caught the thief, but broke off.  While at anchor in another part
+of this bay, which is known as the Bay of Islands, the commander gave a
+piece of cloth to an old chief, one of several hundred natives crowding
+round the ship.  Notwithstanding this, some of them tried to steal the
+buoy, and not till one of them was hit by a musket-ball would they give
+it up.  After this, the commander, with Mr Banks, Dr Solander, and two
+boats' crews, landed in a little cove.  They had not been there long,
+before they saw nearly three hundred people rushing towards them from
+behind the heads of the cove, and over the top of the hill.  Some of the
+savages rushed to the boats to seize them, and others, led by a chief,
+advanced towards the English.  The commander, Mr Banks, and two of the
+man fired with small shot.  The natives, though at first they fell back,
+soon again rallied and advanced.  On this Dr Solander fired again, and
+hit the chief, who, with the rest, ran off.  The natives still continued
+in a body, and, as seen from the ship, appeared very numerous.  A few
+round shot fired over their heads dispersed them.  Happily not a single
+life was lost, and only two men were slightly wounded.  As it happened,
+the old chief to whom the cloth had been given in the morning had, with
+some of his family, concealed himself in a cave.  While the party were
+collecting celery he was discovered, and was soon put at his ease.  He
+said that one of the men who had been hit with small shot was his
+brother, and inquired anxiously whether he would die.  He was assured
+that he would not; and a bullet and small shot being shown to him, he
+was told that those who were hit with the first would die, but that the
+wounds made by the last were seldom mortal.  He and his companions now
+came and sat down by the English, who gave them a few trifles.
+
+Several days were passed in the Bay of Islands, and a friendly
+intercourse was maintained during the remainder of the time with the
+natives.  On going out of it the ship grazed a rock to windward of her
+with great violence, but received no injury.  This part of the country
+was evidently very densely inhabited; and the people seemed to live on
+friendly terms with each other, though no head or leading chief was
+heard of.  Fishing seemed to be one of their principal occupations, and
+nets of great length were seen--one of not less than from three to four
+hundred fathoms.  Their towns were all fortified.  Farther on, while
+becalmed, some people who came off told the voyagers that at the
+distance of three days' rowing the land would take a sharp turn to the
+south, and extend no more to the west.  It was conjectured, therefore,
+that this headland was one seen by Tasman, and called by him Cape Maria
+Van Diemen; and an eager lookout was kept for the important headland.
+
+At six in the morning on December 16 land was seen from the mast-head,
+which proved to be North Cape.  It lies in latitude 34 degrees 22
+minutes South, and longitude 186 degrees 55 minutes West.  The isthmus
+which joins this head to the mainland is low, which gives it the
+appearance of an island.  On the cape a hippah, or village, was seen,
+with several inhabitants.  Soon after this, when off Cape Maria Van
+Diemen, the Endeavour met with a gale which, though it was in the middle
+of the summer of that hemisphere, Captain Cook says, for its strength,
+and the length of time it lasted, was such as he had scarcely ever been
+in before.  The ship was three weeks getting ten leagues to the
+westward, and five weeks in getting fifty leagues.  During the gale the
+ship was a considerable distance from the land, or it is highly
+probable, he says, they would not have returned to relate their
+adventures.
+
+It is not necessary to mention the various courses run for several days,
+as no communication was held with the shore.  At length a lofty peak was
+seen towering above the clouds, and covered with snow, to which the name
+of Mount Egmont was given.  It was surrounded by a flat country of a
+pleasant appearance, being clothed with verdure and wood.  Near it a bay
+was entered, in a safe and convenient cove of which the ship anchored.
+Some canoes at once paddled off, and much against the wishes of his
+people, an old chief from one of them came on board.  He was received
+with all possible friendship, and after some time was dismissed, with
+many expressions of kindness, to his companions.  This treatment had a
+beneficial effect, though some of the natives showed an inclination to
+try how far they might go with the strangers.  On one occasion they
+pursued the long-boat as it was going on shore with casks; but some
+small shot quickly made them desist.
+
+The bay where they were at anchor was found to be about fifteen miles
+south of one visited by Tasman, though none of the people among whom
+Tupia made inquiries had any tradition of his having been on the coast.
+The commander, with Mr Banks, Dr Solander, and others, on their way
+one day to visit a cove two miles off, saw the body of a woman floating,
+having apparently been dead for some days.  Immediately on landing they
+found a family who seemed greatly alarmed at their approach, and ran
+away.  In a short time, however, they were induced to return, and
+confidence being established, became very communicative.  The body of
+the woman was that of a relation whom they had buried at sea fastened to
+a stone, from which they supposed it had broken.  The family were
+dressing some provisions, and as the gentlemen cast their eyes into one
+of the baskets which stood near, two bones were perceived, which, upon
+nearer examination, were found to be those of a human body.  The
+natives, on being questioned by Tupia, acknowledged, without the
+slightest hesitation, that they were the bones of a man whom they had
+eaten; that a canoe belonging to their enemies had come into the bay
+five days before; that seven persons in her had been killed, and that
+this man was one of them.  On Tupia asking why they did not eat the body
+of the woman, they replied that she was a relation, and that they only
+eat the bodies of their enemies killed in battle.  One of the natives
+took hold of his own forearm, and intimated that the bone Mr Banks held
+in his hand had belonged to that part of the human body; he also bit and
+gnawed the bone which Mr Banks had taken, drawing it through his mouth,
+and showing by signs that it had afforded a delicious repast.  A woman
+of this family of cannibals had her arms, legs, and thighs frightfully
+cut, in token of her grief for the loss of her husband, who had lately
+been killed and eaten by their enemies.
+
+Mr Banks and Dr Solander were several times on shore, but their walks
+were much circumscribed by climbing plants of luxuriant growth, which
+completely filled up the spaces between the trees, so as to render the
+woods impassable.  Preparations had been made for erecting a durable
+memorial of the Endeavour's visit, and their old friend promised that it
+should never be removed.  Presents of coins and spike-nails, with the
+king's broad arrow on them, were given to the natives, and two posts, of
+which the memorial was to be constructed, were taken to the highest part
+of the island near which the ship lay.  The Union-Jack was then hoisted,
+and formal possession was taken of the country in the name of His
+Majesty King George the Third; the name of Queen Charlotte's Sound being
+given to the inlet.  A bottle of wine was then drunk to Her Majesty's
+health, and the empty bottle given to the old man, who seemed highly
+delighted with it.
+
+The Endeavour left the sound on February 6, and soon after, during a
+calm, was very nearly driven on shore by the strong current setting
+through the straits between the northern and middle island, now known as
+Cook's Straits.  Over the land was seen a mountain of stupendous height,
+covered with snow.  Passing through the straits, the Endeavour steered
+north again, and continued on till, the weather clearing, Cape Turnagain
+was distinctly seen.  Captain Cook on this asked his officers whether
+they were satisfied that Eaheinomauwe was an island.  They replying in
+the affirmative, the Endeavour hauled her wind and stood to the
+eastward.  Eaheinoniauwe was the name given by the natives to the
+northern island, Poenammoo to the southern, or rather, as it is now
+called, the middle island.
+
+The Endeavour was now steered down the eastern coast of the last-named
+portion of New Zealand.  Some lofty mountains were seen, partially
+covered with snow, and inferior in height to Mount Egmont.  During a
+calm, when close in shore, Mr Banks went out in a small boat for the
+purpose of shooting.  While he was away four double canoes were seen to
+put off from the shore, and to pull towards him.  Captain Cook trembled
+for his friend's safety, for Mr Banks could not see the signals made to
+hasten his return.  At length he noticed the natives, and his boat's
+head was turned towards the ship.  The natives also approached.  He,
+however, got on board before them, thankful for his escape.  Probably,
+indeed, their attention had been so engrossed with the ship that they
+had not seen him.  When they came about a stone's throw off, they
+stopped and gazed at the ship with vacant astonishment; but even Tupia's
+eloquence could not induce them to come on board.  After surveying the
+ship, they made towards the shore, but it was dark before they could
+have reached it.  This was the only sight Captain Cook had of the
+inhabitants of the middle island, or _Tovy Poenammoo_.
+
+An island about twenty-four leagues in circumference, and five leagues
+from the main, was discovered, to which the name of Banks's Island was
+given.  Some persons on board asserting that they saw land to the
+south-east, the commander, though believing that they were mistaken,
+steered in that direction; but no land being discovered, the ship wore,
+and was steered east-south-east.  Tovy Poenammoo was found to be very
+much larger than Captain Cook expected to find it, from the description
+of the natives in Queen Charlotte's Sound.  Heavy gales and rough seas
+were encountered, and on one occasion, at dawn, rocks were seen close
+under the ship's bows, she having in the night passed close to another
+dangerous reef, some leagues from the main.  The land discovered
+appeared green and well wooded, but destitute of inhabitants.  Several
+whales and seals were observed, whereas none had been seen off the north
+island.  At length, on March 5, the South Cape was rounded.  At the time
+Captain Cook was doubtful whether it was part of the large island or a
+separate island, though he marked it in his chart as the former.
+Nothing of importance occurred during the passage back to the entrance
+of Cook's Straits, on the northern shore of which, in a bay called
+Admiralty, the Endeavour again anchored, that she might fill up with
+wood and water.  This was accomplished by March 31, 1770, when a course
+was shaped by which it was hoped the eastern coast of New Holland would
+be reached.  It was intended, after visiting that coast, to return home
+by the East Indies and the Cape of Good Hope.  Captain Cook himself had
+wished to return by Cape Horn, with the view of settling the question of
+a great southern continent; but the ship was deemed unfit to brave the
+tempests to be expected in a high southern latitude in the most
+inclement season of the year.  The name of Cape Farewell was given to
+the last point of land seen as the Endeavour quitted the coast of New
+Zealand.  The manners and customs of the inhabitants, as well as the
+features of New Zealand, are now almost as well-known as those of any
+country in Europe, and we are able to judge of the extraordinary
+accuracy of all Captain Cook's descriptions whenever he had an
+opportunity of observing them.
+
+Cape Farewell was left on March 31, and the Endeavour sailed westward.
+Nine days afterwards a tropical bird was seen, and on the 15th the
+voyagers caught sight of an egg-bird and a gannet; and as these birds
+never fly far from land, the lead was constantly heaved through the
+night.  No bottom, however, was found; and it was not till six o'clock
+on the morning of April 19 that land was seen by Mr Hicks, the first
+lieutenant.  This land proved to be part of the vast country of New
+Holland, since better known as Australia.  The coast first seen was that
+of New South Wales.
+
+The Endeavour now coasted along about three leagues from the shore, and
+as the weather was clear, a pleasant landscape presented itself before
+the eyes of the explorers.  The land was of moderate elevation,
+diversified by hills and valleys, ridges and plains.  Here and there
+were open spaces clothed with verdure, but in general the country was
+covered with timber.  Smoke was in several places seen, showing that the
+country was inhabited.
+
+Several days were spent--the Endeavour coasting along the shore to the
+northward; but on account of a northerly wind the voyagers were seldom
+near enough to remark the features of the country.  At last a bay was
+discovered which seemed to be well sheltered from all winds, and Captain
+Cook determined to anchor in it.  Just before this several natives had
+been seen on the shore, four of them carrying a canoe, but they did not
+come off, and when the yawl, in which the commander attempted to land,
+approached, they all ran away.  So heavy a surf broke on the beach that
+it was found impossible to go ashore.
+
+The pinnace was now sent ahead with the master to sound, while, the wind
+being out, the ship beat into the bay.  A smoke being seen on shore, the
+glasses were directed towards it, when ten men were observed sitting
+round a fire, which they presently left, and then ascended a slight
+eminence, whence they could observe the proceedings of the English
+visitors.  As the pinnace pulled along the shore most of the natives
+kept abreast of her.  Some of them used threatening gestures,
+brandishing their weapons: there were two especially, whose faces seemed
+to have been dusted with a white powder, and their bodies painted with
+broad streaks, also white, which, passing obliquely over their breasts
+and backs, looked not unlike the cross-belts worn by soldiers.  The same
+kind of streaks were also drawn round their legs and thighs, like broad
+garters.  They were armed with long spears, and each of these men held
+in his hand a weapon curved like a scimitar, and which appeared to be
+about two feet and a half long.  The Endeavour anchored two miles within
+the bay, in six-fathom water, abreast of a small village consisting of
+six or eight huts.  On the two points on either side of the entrance a
+few huts, and men, women, and children, were seen, as were four small
+canoes, with a man in each engaged in fishing, so intent on their
+occupation that they took no notice of the ship.  An old woman also,
+followed by three children, came out of a thicket, laden with fire-wood,
+each of the children having its burden.  When she reached the huts three
+more children came out to meet her.  She looked often at the ship, but
+manifested no surprise, and went on with her occupation and kindled a
+fire.  Presently the men landed, hauled up their canoes, and began to
+dress the fish, apparently unconcerned at the stranger ship within half
+a mile of them.  None of the savages had on a particle of clothing.  It
+was a curious scene, like that of a drama in which the actors take no
+notice of the spectators.
+
+In this instance, however, the actors were not so indifferent as they at
+first appeared; for when Captain Cook and several companions approached
+the shore in one of the boats, although the greater number of the people
+ran away, two men armed with lances came down on the rocks to dispute
+the landing of the strangers.  [Note 2.]  It was not an inapt
+representation on a small scale of the contest which, ere many years had
+rolled by, was to begin on these shores between savagedom and
+civilisation, when the latter would, with giant strides, sweep over and
+subdue the land.  The two brave savages kept flourishing their lances
+and shouting in discordant tones, and Captain Cook, unwilling to injure
+them, ordered his crew to lie on their oars while he tried to parley
+with them.  To show also his goodwill, he threw them nails, beads, and
+other trifles, which they took up and seemed pleased to obtain.  They
+then waved their hands and seemed to invite their visitors on shore, but
+as soon as the boat approached they hurried again to oppose a landing.
+Captain Cook, as a last resource, fired a musket between them.  On
+hearing the report the youngest dropped a bundle of lances, but quickly
+picked them up; while the eldest, as if in defiance, threw a stone at
+the intruders.  Upon this a musket with small shot was fired at his
+legs, on which he scampered off to the huts.  It was hoped that the
+contest was now over, and accordingly the English stepped on the shore
+of that vast territory which was to become the heritage of millions of
+the Anglo-Saxon race.  Still the savage was not subdued, and appeared
+once more with a shield on his arm, and advancing, made one more
+significant protest against the intrusion of the white man, by hurling a
+spear into the very midst of the strangers.  Happily, no one was hurt,
+and a third musket loaded with small shot being fired at them, after
+another spear had been thrown by one of the brave natives, they both
+took to flight, and the English claimed to be, by right of conquest, the
+lords of the soil.  They might have pursued and overtaken the savages,
+but Mr Banks suggested that the spears were possibly poisoned, and that
+it would be imprudent to venture into the woods.
+
+On entering one of the huts some little children were seen partially
+concealed, but they were not disturbed, and when the English went away,
+some beads, ribbons, and pieces of cloth were left in the huts as
+presents, which it was hoped would gain the goodwill of the natives.
+Fifty spears, from six to fifteen feet long, found lying about, were
+carried off.  It was at first supposed that they were poisoned, but on
+further examination it was found that they were used for spearing fish,
+and that the green substance found sticking to them was seaweed.
+
+The next morning a stream was found at which the casks could be filled.
+While this operation was going on, the natives came down and watched the
+proceedings with wonder, but did not venture to approach the strangers,
+though Mr Hicks advanced towards them with presents in his hands,
+making every sign of friendship he could think of.  That the bay was
+full of fish, and capable of giving food to a large population, Captain
+Cook had ample proof; for going with Mr Banks and Dr Solander to a
+cove on the north side of the bay, in three or four hauls with the seine
+they took above three hundredweight of fish.
+
+An expedition into the country was planned the same day by the
+commander, Mr Banks, Dr Solander, and seven others, and from it a very
+fair idea of the general face of the country was obtained.  On visiting
+the huts they found that the natives had not taken away the presents
+that had been left for them; and others, therefore, of greater value,
+were added.  Presents were left also at all the huts which were passed,
+in the hope of thus gaining the goodwill of the natives.  The trees were
+tall, straight, and without underwood, and at such a distance from each
+other that the land might be cultivated without cutting down a tree.
+The ground was covered with an abundance of grass, growing in tufts
+close together, about as large as could well be grasped in the hand.
+Although numerous huts were seen, the natives kept themselves carefully
+concealed, though probably watching the strangers at a distance; a
+glimpse only was caught of one man, who instantly ran away.  A transient
+view was got of an animal as big as a rabbit, and of the tracks of
+another of the size of a wolf, clawed like a dog; traces of a third,
+which fed on grass, and judged to be not less than a deer in size, were
+also seen.  The trees overhead abounded with birds of various kinds,
+among which were many of exquisite beauty, particularly loriquets and
+cockatoos, which flew in scores together.  The trees, however, were not
+of many species; among others was one which yielded a gum not unlike the
+_sanguis draconis_.
+
+Many other excursions were made on shore, especially by Mr Banks and
+Dr Solander, in search of plants, of which they found vast quantities;
+and from this circumstance Captain Cook gave the place the name of
+Botany Bay, a name the whole country commonly bore for more than half a
+century afterwards.
+
+Every effort to establish a friendly intercourse with the natives
+failed.  They had undoubtedly watched, though unperceived, the effect of
+the white men's weapons, and from awe and terror kept at a distance;
+still, when they had an opportunity, they showed their hostility to the
+strangers, and Mr Monkhouse narrowly escaped a spear thrown at him
+while he was wandering in the woods.
+
+During the ship's stay in Botany Bay, Captain Cook had the English
+colours hoisted every day on a flag-staff on shore, and caused the
+ship's name, and the date of her visit, to be engraved on a tree near
+the watering-place.
+
+At daybreak, on Tuesday, May 6, 1770, the Endeavour sailed from Botany
+Bay, and at noon the same day, in latitude 33 degrees 50 minutes South,
+she was abreast of a fine-looking harbour, to which Captain Cook gave
+the name of Port Jackson.  Northerly winds prevented the ship from
+making much progress till, in latitude 32 degrees 40 minutes, another
+harbour was seen, and called Port Stephens.  The ship continued her
+course to the north; smoke was frequently seen, and occasionally the
+natives were observed.  The land increased considerably in height as she
+advanced, and in many places exhibited a pleasing variety of ridges,
+hills, valleys, and plains, all clothed with wood.  A wide, open bay was
+passed in latitude 27 degrees 6 minutes, and called Moreton Bay.
+
+It had now become necessary to lay the ship ashore, and Captain Cook's
+object was to find a place where this might be accomplished with safety.
+Had he entered Port Jackson, he would have found one of the finest
+harbours in the world for his purpose.  He several times anchored while
+proceeding along the coast, and landed to explore the country--the
+natives, as before, running off and hiding themselves.  Rockingham Bay
+was passed and named, in latitude 17 degrees 59 minutes.  Hitherto the
+Endeavour had met with no misfortune; but as she was now to make
+acquaintance with it, the point seen farthest to the north was called
+Cape Tribulation.  It lies in latitude 16 degrees 4 minutes South, and
+longitude 145 degrees 26 minutes East.
+
+One beautiful moonlight night, as the ship was speeding on her course
+with a fair wind, among the shoals of that coral sea, and while most of
+the officers and crew were tranquilly asleep, she suddenly struck upon a
+reef, and instantly roused every one on board to the horrors of
+shipwreck on an inhospitable coast, where they might linger for years
+without succour.  However, the captain and his officers and crew were
+equal to the emergency, and by throwing everything weighty overboard
+that could be spared, the ship floated, but was making water rapidly.
+Had the weather been at all stormy, no human power could have saved
+their vessel.  As it was, the fine weather continued long enough to
+enable them to draw a sail over the leak.  This served the purpose of
+keeping her in sailing trim, until she was safely moored at the mouth of
+a creek, which was named Endeavour River.  This was on June 17, and they
+remained there repairing the damage to the ship, as well as
+circumstances permitted, until August 4.
+
+Although the Endeavour was now out of danger, her captain had still
+abundant cause for anxiety on another account: in spite of all his care,
+the fearful malady of scurvy had gained, and was still gaining ground
+among the ship's company.  Poor Tupia, who all his life had been
+accustomed to fresh fruit and vegetables, was among the chief sufferers,
+and symptoms were showing themselves which proved that the malignant
+disease had already made rapid progress.  Mr Green, the astronomer, was
+also, among many others, stricken and disabled.  As soon as possible,
+therefore, a tent was put up on shore for the reception of the sick, and
+recourse was had to nets, for providing fresh fish for the invalids.
+
+The ground in the immediate neighbourhood of the river was either
+swampy, sandy, or stony.  Mr Banks, who went on shore with his gun, saw
+great quantities of pigeons and crows: of the former, which were very
+beautiful, he shot several.  He also saw some deserted human
+habitations, but no natives.
+
+Four guns having been got up from the hold, were mounted on the
+quarter-deck of the ship, and the heavy stores and powder were landed,
+that her damages might be examined.  It was, indeed, both wonderful and
+providential that she had escaped destruction; for not only had the
+sharp rock torn off the planking and worked its way into the timbers,
+but one point had cut a hole right through the bottom, and, breaking
+off, had happily remained fixed.  Had it fallen out, no human power
+could have prevented the ship from foundering.  Besides the leak, which
+was on the starboard side, the ship had sustained very extensive injury
+on the larboard.  The sheathing from the bow on that side was torn off,
+and a great part of the false keel was gone.  The carpenters at once
+commenced their work; and the forge was set up, that the smiths might
+make bolts and nails.
+
+While this was going on, some of the people were sent on shore to shoot
+pigeons for the sick, and on their return they reported that they had
+found a stream of fresh water, and had seen several native huts, and an
+animal as large as a greyhound, of slender form, mouse-coloured, and
+very swift.  The next day Captain Cook himself saw the same animal; it
+had a long tail, and leaped liked a hare or deer, and the prints of its
+feet were like those of a goat.  For some time afterwards nothing more
+was seen of the animal, which Mr Banks, the naturalist, considered must
+be of some hitherto unknown species; so, indeed, it was, for it had no
+congeners in any quarter of the globe previously visited; though now the
+kangaroo is familiar enough to all readers of natural history, and it
+forms part of the arms of the colony of New South Wales.
+
+Mr Banks likewise captured an Australian opossum, a female, with two
+young ones.  This class of animal was formerly supposed to be peculiar
+to America, from whence its name is derived.  Being nocturnal in their
+habits, nothing is to be seen of them in the daytime, unless you can
+catch a glimpse of one at noontide, sleeping soundly in the hollow of a
+tree.  When night comes, they leap from bough to bough with the greatest
+animation, especially if it be moonlight.  Some species, with thin
+membranes between the fore and hind paws, can take a flying leap of,
+sometimes, thirty yards from tree to tree; and hence they are called
+flying squirrels, though perfectly distinct in their nature, and in some
+of their habits, from that animal.
+
+The carpenters continued to work hard on the ship whenever the tide
+permitted them.  The position in which she was now placed, with her bow
+on the bank, naturally threw all the water aft, and from this
+circumstance the world was very nearly losing the results of Mr Banks's
+labours.  For greater security he had placed his collection of plants in
+the bread-room, into which the water ran, and covered them completely.
+By great care most of them were dried, but many were entirely spoilt.
+
+In consequence of the carpenters being able to work only at low tide,
+the repairs of the ship proceeded very slowly.  In the meantime,
+however, the people benefited from being on shore, and every effort was
+made to obtain fresh provisions, calculated to improve their health.
+The commander himself went to superintend the hauling of the seine; but
+this was attended with little success, for during one evening only
+between twenty and thirty fish were caught.  A root with leaves like
+spinach, many cabbage-trees, and a wild plantain, were found, with a
+fruit of a deep purple colour, of the size of a pippin, which improved
+on keeping; Mr Banks also discovered a plant, called, in the West
+Indies, Indian kale, which served for greens.  These greens, with a
+large supply of fish afterwards caught, afforded great relief to the
+voyagers, who had so long been compelled to live on salt meat.  Their
+fresh provisions were further varied by some large cockles, one of which
+was of such size that it furnished an ample meal for two men.  What was
+of still greater value was the discovery of some fine turtle by the
+master, three of which he caught when out surveying; though afterwards,
+when sent out expressly to find more, he seems to have purposely
+thwarted the wishes of his commander, who, indeed, had too much cause to
+complain of the narrow-mindedness and ignorance of several of his
+officers.  Many other turtles were, however, afterwards caught, of a
+species called the green turtle.
+
+Some time elapsed before one of the animals which had been so much the
+subject of speculation was shot by Mr Gore.  This was a young one, but
+others were seen equal in size to sheep; the larger sort are, indeed,
+much larger than sheep.  The fore legs of this specimen were only eight
+inches long, and the hind legs two-and-twenty; its mode of progress
+being by a succession of hops and leaps, helped by its long tail, with
+which also it balances itself in its progress.  It is easy to imagine
+the interest with which this curious animal, now seen for the first time
+by civilised men, was examined by Mr Banks and his brother naturalists.
+The next day their kangaroo (for so the animal was called by the
+natives) was dressed for dinner, and proved most excellent.  The
+explorers might now have been said to fare sumptuously every day; for
+they had an abundance of green turtle, fish, and vegetables of different
+sorts, with an occasional kangaroo.  It was indeed fortunate for the
+crew of the Endeavour that the accident happened to her in this
+latitude, instead of farther south, where, although the soil amply
+rewards the labours of men, yet its spontaneous productions are very
+inferior to those of the north.  Kangaroos certainly would have been
+found in abundance, and perhaps fish, but scarcely any vegetables fit
+for the food of man.
+
+Favourably, however, as the navigators were situated for diet, their
+position in other respects was unsatisfactory.  This was ascertained by
+the captain, who, with Mr Banks, one day started on a long walk
+northward, partly to obtain a view of the country, but chiefly to take
+note of appearances seaward.  After traversing the country about eight
+miles, they ascended a high hill, and were soon convinced that the
+danger of their situation was at least equal to their apprehensions; for
+in whatever direction they turned their eyes, they saw rocks and shoals
+without number, and no passage out to sea but through the winding
+channels between them, which could not be navigated without the last
+degree of difficulty and peril.  The reports of the master were equally
+unsatisfactory with regard to the shoals and dangers off the mouth of
+the harbour, and it seems surprising that the ship should have escaped
+them on her passage up the coasts.  Still, as she had got in, there was
+no doubt that she might get out, could the right passage be found.  They
+had other causes for hope and thankfulness: the natives were not likely
+to prove troublesome, the climate was healthy, and food abundant.
+
+Besides kangaroos, wild dogs were seen, which were supposed to be foxes
+or wolves, as they partly resembled both these animals.  With the
+natives for some time no intercourse was opened.  At last some appeared
+on the opposite side of the river, very black, totally naked, and with
+lances in their hands.  The commander judiciously ordered his people to
+take no notice of them, as the best means of drawing them near.  This
+plan succeeded so well that two of them came off in a canoe to within a
+musket-shot, and talked very loudly.  They were answered in the same
+tone, and by degrees they drew nearer, when some cloth, nails, beads,
+paper, and other trifles were thrown to them.  Of these things, however,
+they seemed to take no notice, but were highly pleased when a fish was
+offered them.  Some of them afterwards landed where Tupia and the rest
+of the crew were sitting, and he prevailed on them to lay down their
+arms, and to come forward without them.  He then made signs that they
+should sit down by him.  With this they complied, and seemed to be under
+no apprehension or constraint, although on more people going on shore
+they expressed by their gestures some fear lest the newcomers should get
+between them and their arms.  More presents were made to them, to show
+the goodwill of the strangers, and their desire to continue on friendly
+terms.  To prove this the Englishmen made signs that they were going to
+dinner, and invited the blacks to eat with them; the latter, however,
+declined the honour, and went away in their canoes.  These men were of
+the common stature, but their limbs were remarkably small; their hair
+was black, but not woolly, some of them wearing it short cropped, others
+lank and long, and others had it curled.  Their colour was dark
+chocolate, but the tint was owing somewhat to the dirt which covered
+their skins.  They had lively eyes, and their teeth were even and white.
+The tones of their voices were soft and musical, and there was a
+flexibility in their organs of speech which enabled them to repeat, with
+great facility, many English words.
+
+The next day three of the same party of natives paid the strangers a
+visit with a fourth, whom they introduced as Yaparico.  This personage
+was distinguished by having the bone of a bird, six inches long, thrust
+through the cartilage of his nose.  He seemed to prize this strange
+ornament as much as a young dandy does his newly raised silken
+moustache.  On examination, all his companions were found to have holes
+in their ears, as he also had, while on the upper part of their arms
+they wore bracelets of plaited hair; thus evincing a taste for ornament,
+although they had not a rag of any sort of clothing.  The previous day
+the only gift they seemed to prize was a fish which was offered them.
+To-day they brought one in return.  They were, however, excessively
+jealous and suspicious, and in consequence of one of the gentlemen
+examining their canoe, they at once jumped into her and paddled away.
+
+The following day three natives ventured down to Tupia's tent, and were
+so well pleased with the way he received them that they went away and
+brought two others, whom they introduced to him formally by name; a
+ceremony they never omitted.  Some fish were given to them, but after
+eating a small portion, they threw the rest to Mr Banks's dog.  They
+could not be persuaded to go far from their canoe, which was about ten
+feet long, fitted with an outrigger, and though very inferior, like
+those of the Society Islands.  They used paddles, and in shallow water
+poled it along.
+
+One day, on the commander's return from an excursion on shore, he found
+several natives on board.  Of all the articles exhibited to them,
+nothing seemed to have attracted their attention so much as the turtles,
+of which there were no less than twelve on deck.  Two days afterwards
+they came again, bringing with them a greater number of lances than
+before.  These they placed in a tree, with a man and a boy to watch
+them.  It was evident that their object was to get one of the turtles.
+They asked for one by signs, and being refused, appealed to everybody
+who appeared to them to have any authority.  Then seizing one, they
+attempted to drag it overboard.  On its being taken from them, they
+jumped into their canoe in a rage, and went on shore.  Here Mr Banks
+and others followed them.  Before they could be stopped they seized
+their arms, and, snatching a brand from under a pitch-kettle, they
+whirled it round with great dexterity and rapidity, and set fire to the
+grass, which was six feet or more high, and dry as stubble.  The fire
+burnt with fearful rapidity.  The woodwork of the smith's forge was
+destroyed; it caught a sow and some young pigs, one of which was
+scorched to death, and Mr Banks had great difficulty in saving his
+tent, which had been set up for Tupia on shore.  Happily most of the
+stores, with the powder, had been taken back to the ship, or the
+consequences might have been more serious.
+
+In another place the seamen were washing, and a quantity of linen and
+the nets were spread out to dry.  Here the natives, disregarding all
+threats and entreaties, again set fire to the grass.  By great exertions
+the fire was extinguished before it had done much damage, but where it
+had first been kindled it burnt with great fury, and spread into the
+woods to a long distance.  A gun loaded with small shot was now fired at
+the natives, which put them to flight, one of them being wounded; and to
+give them a lesson, a bullet was fired to pass near them, and this of
+course hastened their retreat.  It was thought that now they would give
+no more trouble; but in a short time they came back, and Mr Banks and
+others went out to meet them.
+
+An old man among the natives then advanced, having a lance in his hand
+without a point.  He came forward slowly, stopping several times, and
+the English made signs to him that they wished to be friends.  On this
+he turned round and addressed his companions, and they, having set up
+their arms against a tree, also came forward in a friendly manner.  The
+lances which had been taken from them were then returned; this evidently
+afforded them great satisfaction, and the reconciliation was considered
+complete.
+
+Several strangers who were among the party were now introduced by name;
+and on receiving some presents they went away highly contented.
+
+The next day no natives appeared, but the hills all round, for many
+miles, were on fire, the effects of which by night were very striking.
+Had the voyagers been compelled by circumstances to remain on that
+coast, the result of these fires would have been serious, as the
+conflagration would have driven the kangaroos and the feathered tribes
+to a distance, and thus deprived the crew of the Endeavour of some of
+their principal means of support.  But the ship was now ready for sea,
+though the master had been unable to find any channel to the northward
+by which an escape could be made from among the coral reefs which hemmed
+her in.
+
+It was necessary, however, to make the attempt without delay, as
+provisions and stores were running short, and the proper time for
+navigating the Indian seas was passing by.  They were doomed to have
+their patience yet further tried, for when all was ready heavy gales
+prevented the ship from putting to sea.
+
+On July 29 the weather moderated, the wind came off the land, and
+everything appeared favourable for sailing, when it was found that there
+was not sufficient water on the bar for the ship to pass over it.  For
+several days more the ship was detained by the unfavourable state of the
+weather: the detention would have been of still greater consequence had
+not the boats sent out to catch fish and turtle been tolerably
+successful.  At length, on August 4, Captain Cook had the satisfaction
+of sailing out of Endeavour Harbour.  The ship was surrounded by shoals,
+and he was yet in doubt whether he should beat back to the southward, or
+seek a passage to the north or east.  He had now a most anxious time,
+for it was clear that there was no way to sea except through the
+labyrinth of shoals amid which the ship lay.  The navigation of a ship
+among coral rocks is at all times dangerous, for the lead gives no
+notice of their vicinity, their sides rising up like walls from almost
+unfathomable depths.
+
+Night now approaching, the Endeavour anchored, when soon afterwards it
+came on to blow very hard, and at eleven she began to drive.  More cable
+was veered away, and this brought her up; but in the morning, it coming
+on to blow harder, she drove again.  All the appliances of seamanship
+were put into operation, but still she drove, when topgallant masts were
+got down, and yards and topmasts struck; and now, at length, she rode
+securely.
+
+In this position she continued till the 10th, when, Captain Cook having
+resolved to search for a passage close in shore to the northward, she
+got under way, and stood in that direction with the boats exploring
+ahead.  Nothing but the greatest caution, perseverance, and first-rate
+seamanship could have taken the Endeavour free of the dangers which
+surrounded her.  Hour after hour the sagacious commander was at the
+mast-head, or away in a boat searching for a passage, while the rest of
+the boats were employed in a similar service.  At length a passage was
+discovered, and with the boats piloting ahead, the Endeavour stood
+through it.
+
+A long rolling swell convinced the voyagers that they had no rocks or
+shoals to fear, but at the same time proved to them that they must not
+place the same confidence in their ship as before she had struck; for
+the seas she now encountered so widened the leaks that they admitted no
+less than nine inches of water an hour, which, considering the state of
+the pumps and the navigation before them, was a matter of serious
+consideration.
+
+The great object Captain Cook had now in view was to ascertain whether
+the coast of New Holland, along which he was sailing, was or was not
+united to that of New Guinea.  He was afraid that, if he stood on long
+to the north, he might overshoot the passage, should one exist.  At six
+in the evening, therefore, he brought the ship to with her head to the
+north-east, no land being in sight.  The next morning sail was made, and
+land seen; and as the day advanced a reef appeared over which the sea
+broke heavily, extending from north to south as far as the eye could
+reach, with an occasional break between the ship and the land.  The wind
+was then east-south-east; but scarcely had the sails been trimmed to
+haul off it than the wind shifted to east-by-north, which made it very
+doubtful whether the ship could clear the reef.  The lead was kept going
+all night while the ship stood to the northward, but no bottom was
+found, yet at four o'clock the roaring of the surf was distinctly heard,
+and at break of day it was seen foaming to a vast height at not more
+than a mile off.  The seas, too, which rolled in on the reef rapidly
+carried the ship towards it.  The wind fell to a dead calm, and the
+depth made it impossible to anchor.  The only prospect of saving the
+ship was by rowing; but the pinnace was under repair and useless: the
+long-boat and yawl were, however, sent ahead to tow, and sweeps were got
+out.
+
+Still these efforts could only delay the destruction which seemed
+inevitable.  The ship continued to drive on towards the fatal reef; she
+was within a hundred yards of it, and the same billow which washed her
+side broke on the reef to a tremendous height the very next time it
+rose.  The carpenters had been working at the pinnace, and she was now
+lowered, but even with her assistance the Endeavour drove nearer and
+still nearer to the reef.  At the very moment that her doom seemed fixed
+a light air sprang up, and, with the help of the boats, gave her once
+more head-way.  Scarcely, however, had ten minutes passed before the
+wind again dropped, and the ship was driven back towards the roaring
+breakers.  Again the gentle breeze returned, and lasted another ten
+minutes.  During this time an opening had been discovered, and the ship
+was towed towards it, but so strong a current set through it that she
+was driven fully a quarter of a mile away from the reef.  Aided by the
+boats, the ebb tide carried her nearly two miles away by noon.  When the
+flood made, however, she was once more carried back towards the reef;
+but in the meantime the first lieutenant had discovered a passage, and a
+light breeze springing up, it was resolved to attempt it.  The boats
+continued towing ahead; the raging, roaring sea leaped up on either
+side; the breeze filled the sails; the tide swept rapidly onward; and in
+a short time the Endeavour was within the reef, safe from present
+danger, and anchored in nineteen-fathom water.
+
+Captain Cook now resolved to keep the land close on board, in spite of
+all dangers, for fear of missing the channel.  Numerous islands and
+headlands were passed and named, and rocks and reefs were escaped, and
+at length perseverance and sagacity were rewarded by the discovery of
+York Cape, the northern promontory of the country, and the southern side
+of Torres Straits, through which the Endeavour triumphantly passed.
+
+As Captain Cook was now about to leave the eastern coast of New Holland,
+which he had followed up from latitude 38 degrees, and which he was
+confident no European had ever before seen, he landed on an island,
+which he named Possession Island, and once more took formal possession
+of the whole eastern coast of the mainland, in right of His Majesty King
+George the Third.  He gave to the country, with all its bays, rivers,
+and islands, the name of New South Wales.  Three volleys of small arms
+were then fired, and these were answered by the same number from the
+ship.  Ten natives were seen on the island when this ceremony was
+performed, and seemed astounded, as they very well might be.
+
+They were seen to be armed with spears; one of them had also a bow and a
+bundle of arrows, which weapons had not before been seen.  Two of them
+had large ornaments of mother-of-pearl hanging round their necks.  It
+was expected that when the boats approached they would have made a show
+of opposing a landing, but instead of that, they walked leisurely away.
+They and their descendants have never been disturbed in their possession
+of the island, and at the present day it is exactly in the state it was
+when Cook visited it.
+
+Some time was occupied in the intricate navigation of the straits, and
+the Endeavour then steered north, along the south-western coast of New
+Guinea, but the water being shallow, at such a distance from the shore
+that it could scarcely be seen from the ship.  Still, as the commander
+wished to ascertain the character of the country and the appearance of
+the inhabitants, he steered in for the land till about three or four
+miles from it, and in three-fathom water, when the ship came to an
+anchor on September 3.
+
+The pinnace being hoisted out, Captain Cook, with Mr Banks and his
+servants, Dr Solander and the boat's crew, in all twelve persons, well
+armed, embarked in her and pulled directly for the shore.  But the water
+was so shallow that they could not reach it by about two hundred yards;
+they therefore waded the rest of the way, and left two seamen to take
+care of the boat.  As yet no inhabitants had been seen, but when the
+party landed they discovered the print of feet on the sand below
+high-water mark, showing that people had lately been there.  A thick
+wood came down to within a hundred yards of the water.  To avoid the
+risk of being cut off by an ambush, the explorers proceeded cautiously,
+skirting the wood till they came to a grove of cocoanut trees of small
+growth which stood on the bank of a little stream.  The trees were well
+hung with fruit, and near them was a small hut, round which lay a number
+of the freshly picked shells.  Tempting as was the fruit, it was not
+considered safe to climb the trees to obtain it; they were obliged,
+therefore, to leave the grove without tasting a nut.  Farther on they
+met with a bread-fruit tree and some plantains, and had got about a
+quarter of a mile from the boat when three blacks rushed out of the wood
+with a hideous shout, and ran towards them.  The foremost threw
+something from his hand which burnt like gunpowder, and the other two
+darted their lances at the strangers.  As it was necessary to keep these
+savages at a distance, they were fired at with small shot, but as this
+did not make them retreat, and they threw another dart, some bullets
+were discharged at them.  The effect was to make them run; but it was
+hoped that none of them were wounded.  As Captain Cook says, he had no
+desire to invade the country, either to gratify appetite or curiosity;
+he judged it right and merciful to retreat at once, so as not to have to
+destroy more of the ignorant savages.  There was no time to lose, as the
+men in the boat made signs that more natives were collecting.  They had
+succeeded in getting safely on board, when they saw nearly a hundred
+savages, who shouted and threw fire-darts, several at a time, towards
+them.  On board ship it was supposed, from the effect produced, that the
+natives had fire-arms, and even from the boat, had they not been so
+near, the English would have fancied, from the flash and smoke, that the
+blacks were firing musketry; the sound only was wanting.  Some muskets
+being fired over their heads, they walked leisurely away.
+
+In appearance these natives were very similar to those of New Holland,
+though their skin was not quite so dark.  They were all stark naked.
+The land was low, and covered with a luxuriance of wood and herbage that
+can scarcely be conceived.  Some of the officers wished to send on shore
+to cut down the cocoanut trees for the sake of the fruit, but the
+commander refused to comply with their proposal, feeling that it would
+be cruel and criminal to risk the lives of the natives, who would
+certainly try to defend their property, merely for the sake of a
+transient gratification.  The boat was therefore hoisted in, and sail
+made to the westward.
+
+The more interesting portion of Captain Cook's first voyage round the
+world was now accomplished.  He had successfully made the important
+observation for which he was sent out; he had become intimately
+acquainted with the inhabitants of Otaheite and several of the adjacent
+islands, though, from the cunning of the people, he had failed to
+discover that it was among the darkest of "the dark places of the
+earth."  He had shown that if there was a great southern continent it
+must be in a very high latitude; he had proved that New Zealand
+consisted of two great islands, and had cause to suspect the existence
+of a third smaller one.  He had sailed along the coast of New Holland,
+and had made the acquaintance of its inhabitants and many of its animal
+and vegetable productions.  Though he had seen the coast of Tasmania,
+and admired its beauty, he had not discovered that it was separated from
+New Holland; but he had settled the point before in dispute--whether
+that little-known land was or was not joined to New Guinea--by sailing
+between them; and he had shown that the eastern coast of the
+island-continent of Australia was fit to become the habitation of
+civilised men.  This great fact was, after all, the most important
+result of the voyage.
+
+The condition of the Endeavour had, by this time, become very critical.
+So battered were her lower timbers and planks, and so out of order were
+her pumps, that a heavy sea might at any moment have sent her to the
+bottom.  It was absolutely necessary to find a harbour where she might
+be hove down to undergo a complete refit.  Under these circumstances the
+commander of the expedition determined to go to Batavia, the capital of
+the Dutch settlements in the island of Java, and at that time the centre
+of commerce in those seas.  He had, indeed, no option, for there was not
+another port which he could hope to reach, where the ship would receive
+the necessary repairs.  He was not, indeed, ignorant of the
+unhealthiness of the climate; but he hoped not to be detained there
+long, and that his hardy crew would be able for a short time to
+withstand its ill effects.
+
+The first island of any size which the Endeavour sighted after leaving
+New Guinea was Timor, along the shore of which she coasted.
+Notwithstanding the wishes of some of his officers, Captain Cook
+declined to put in there, as he was anxious to reach Batavia without
+delay.  Between that island and Java, however, he fell in with a small
+island, which at first he thought was a new discovery; but on steering
+for it, and getting close in with the north side, houses, plantations,
+and numerous flocks of sheep were seen.  The temptation of obtaining
+fresh meat and vegetables was not to be resisted, as there were many
+sick on board; and accordingly Mr Gore was sent on shore to open a
+communication with the natives.  Two persons were seen riding on the
+hills as if for their amusement, and often stopping to look at the ship.
+This made the voyagers suspect that there must be a settlement of
+Europeans on the island.  Such was in fact the case.  The Dutch East
+India Company had a short time before taken possession of it, and sent a
+resident to superintend their affairs, though the native rajah or chief
+was still retained as the nominal ruler of the island.  This island
+proved to be Savu, at that time so little known that it was not to be
+found on any of the charts on board.  It is about thirty miles long, and
+was then very thickly populated.
+
+In the evening the ship entered a bay before a large native town, over
+which the Dutch colours were flying, and three guns were fired.  The
+native chief treated the strangers very courteously, and was evidently
+ready to supply them with all they desired.  They were informed that the
+island abounded in buffaloes, sheep, horses, asses, goats, hogs, dogs,
+cats, fowls, and pigeons, with most of the fruits of the tropics.  The
+resident, Mr Lange, however, though polite in his manners, very soon
+showed that he was determined to make a gain of the visitors, and asked
+the most exorbitant prices for all the provisions they required, besides
+insisting that they should be paid for in gold.  Fortunately, by a
+well-timed present to an old man, the rajah's prime minister, his
+services were engaged, and ultimately, through his means, all the
+provisions which were required were procured at fair prices.  The island
+was divided into five provinces, with a rajah over each, who could
+altogether muster upwards of seven thousand fighting men.  All the
+rajahs were said to live on friendly terms with each other, and the
+inhabitants were described by Mr Lange as being particularly well
+conducted and moral.  Their religion was a kind of paganism, but of a
+most liberal description, according to the account given by Mr Lange,
+each man having the liberty to set up a god in his own house, and to
+worship it after his own fashion.  Although, in many instances, the
+Dutch have been sadly unmindful of the spiritual as well as temporal
+interests of the inhabitants of their colonial possessions, they had
+sent to this island a Dutch officer, and a native woman who had been
+brought up a Christian, charged with the education of the people, and
+their instruction in the principles of Christianity.  The Dutch had also
+printed versions of the New Testament, a catechism, and several tracts
+in the language of this and the neighbouring islands.  The number of
+Christians in the township of Seba alone was estimated at six hundred.
+If the character given by Mr Lange of these islanders was correct, a
+true Christian missionary would have found a prolific field open to him
+among them.
+
+The Endeavour left the interesting island of Savu on September 21, 1770,
+and made Java Head, at the west end of Java, on October 1.  Poor Tupia
+was very ill, and on the morning of the next day a boat was sent on
+shore to procure some fresh fruit for him, and some grass for the
+buffaloes, which, with sheep, pigs, and fowls, had recently been got on
+board.  On passing through the Straits of Sunda, the Endeavour was
+boarded by the Dutch authorities, and various official inquiries were
+made as to whence she had come, and the object of her voyage.  These
+being answered, she proceeded to Batavia.
+
+Captain Cook and his companions were received into port by the Dutch
+governor with all the courtesy and kindness which could be expected.
+Permission was given them to take up their abode in private residences,
+although strangers were, as a rule, compelled to live at an hotel, under
+the direct supervision of the authorities.  Leave was also obtained to
+heave down the ship in order to repair her damages, which were found on
+inspection to be of a very serious nature.  Indeed, in one place the
+planking was so worn by the grinding on the rocks, that it did not
+exceed the thickness of the sole of a man's shoe.  Her frame in many
+places was much shattered, and her pumps had become rotten and utterly
+useless.
+
+Batavia had long had the reputation of being very unhealthy.  The crew,
+however, thought themselves thoroughly seasoned to all climates, and
+their rosy countenances contrasted favourably with the pale faces of
+those who had been even a few weeks at the place.  All, indeed, with the
+exception of Tupia, were in good health when they entered the port.
+Even he revived at the strange sights which met his gaze as he entered,
+for the first time, a civilised town.  The houses, carriages, streets,
+people, and a number of other novel objects had the effect on him of
+fascination.  Tayeto expressed his wonder and delight with still less
+restraint, and danced along the street in a kind of ecstasy, examining
+every object with a restless and eager curiosity.  Tupia, remarking the
+various dresses of the people of different countries, desired likewise
+to put on his native costume.  South Sea cloth was therefore sent for
+from the ship, in which he immediately equipped himself.
+
+In the course of a few days, however, the effects of the climate began
+to be felt.  Poor Tupia, after the excitement caused by the novelties he
+witnessed had subsided, experienced a reaction, and every day grew worse
+and worse.  Young Tayeto also was seized with an inflammation of the
+lungs, and both Dr Solander and Mr Banks and his two servants were
+taken seriously ill; indeed, almost all the people belonging to the
+ship, on board or ashore, were sick, affected by the low swampy
+situation of the place, and the numberless dirty canals which
+intersected the town in all directions.
+
+Tents were then set up on shore, on Cooper's Island, for the ship's
+company, and one was also pitched, by Mr Banks's desire, for Tupia, who
+was anxious to escape from the close air of the town.  Mr Banks
+accompanied him, and remained with him for two days, till compelled by
+his own illness (a regular tertian ague) to return to his lodgings.  Mr
+Monkhouse, the surgeon of the ship, was the first victim, and Dr
+Solander could with difficulty crawl out of lied to attend his funeral,
+which Mr Banks, from illness, was unable to do.  On the 9th the poor
+young boy Tayeto died, and Tupia, who loved him as a son, was so much
+affected that he rapidly sank, and in two days followed him to the
+grave.  The lives of Mr Banks and Dr Solander were saved by their
+removal to a healthy spot, some miles from the city.  Altogether, seven
+persons who had come in the ship were buried at Batavia; but many others
+imbibed the seeds of disease, which, in a short time, proved fatal.
+
+Every possible assistance which Captain Cook required was given by the
+Dutch governor, and on December 26th, 1770, having taken leave of him
+and the principal people in the place, the voyagers set sail from
+Batavia with a light breeze from south-west.  At that time the number of
+sick on board amounted to forty, and the rest of the ship's company were
+in a very feeble condition.  Every man had been ill except one, the
+sail-maker, who was upwards of seventy years of age; he, however, was
+among those who died on the passage to the Cape of Good Hope.
+
+After leaving Java, the Endeavour touched at Prince's Island, where she
+took in water and fresh provisions.  Shortly afterwards, dysenteries and
+slow fevers appeared, and so violent were the symptoms that the ship was
+a complete hospital, those who were able to move about being
+insufficient to attend to the sick in their hammocks.  Mr Banks was so
+ill that his life was despaired of.  Mr Green, Mr Sporing, Mr
+Parkinson, the natural history painter, with Mr Monkhouse, and many
+others, three-and-twenty persons in all, in addition to the seven buried
+at Batavia, died before the ship reached the Cape of Good Hope.  On
+March 15 the Endeavour anchored in Table Bay, near the Cape of Good
+Hope, where Captain Cook's first care was to provide a place for the
+sick on shore.  Here the greater number recovered, though some were
+still ill when again taken on board.  The country appeared to the
+voyagers to be of a most sterile and forlorn character, and from the
+accounts they received of the great distances from each other at which
+the settlers were situated, they conjectured that such must be the
+general nature of the country in the interior.  Possibly the Dutch
+settlers may not have been anxious to praise it to the English, as it
+must have been obvious that it would prove a very important possession,
+on account of our extensive commerce with the East Indies.
+
+Cape Town, at that time, consisted of about a thousand houses, neatly
+built of brick, and white-washed on the outside, with thatched roofs.
+The streets were broad and commodious, and through the principal street
+ran a canal, with rows of oaks planted on either side, but, on account
+of the slope of the ground, having numerous locks.  The healthiness of
+the climate of Cape Town contrasted favourably with that of Batavia, and
+most of the sick rapidly recovered.  The Dutch, at this time, appear to
+have been living on friendly terms with all the neighbouring tribes of
+natives, nor did Captain Cook seem to be aware that any of the
+Hottentots were reduced to a state of slavery.  He speaks only of their
+being servants to the Dutch farmers, and taking care of their cattle.
+Their only enemies were the bushmen, who never engaged in open warfare,
+but stole the cattle of their neighbours at night, being armed with
+lances and poisoned arrows.
+
+The Endeavour left Table Bay on April 14, and after calling at Robin
+Island, a Dutch convict station, she proceeded with her voyage on the
+25th.  On that day she lost her master, whose health had been destroyed
+by intemperate habits, and just before she reached England her first
+lieutenant, Mr Hicks, died of consumption, from which he had been
+suffering the greater part of the voyage; thus making up a long
+catalogue of deaths since the ship left England.  Mr Hicks was
+succeeded by Mr Charles Clerke, who accompanied Captain Cook in his
+subsequent voyages, and was highly esteemed by his commander, as well as
+by all who sailed under him.
+
+On May 1 the Endeavour called off Saint Helena, then known only as the
+summit of a submarine mountain, the water round it being of unfathomable
+depth; although the island was of especial importance to Indiamen, as it
+was the only British possession at which they could call on their
+voyage.  Here the Endeavour found the Portland man-of-war, commanded by
+Captain Elliot, and twelve sail of Indiamen.  In company with this
+fleet, she stood out of the roads on May 4.  But finding that his ship
+sailed more heavily than the rest of the fleet, Captain Cook deposited
+his logs, or ship's papers, and some of the journals of his officers,
+with Captain Elliot; and on the 23rd not one of the ships was in sight.
+
+By this time the rigging and sails of the Endeavour had become so bad
+that every day something was giving way.  But, notwithstanding this, she
+continued her course in safety, and on June 10 land, which proved to be
+the Lizard Point, was seen by Nicholas Young, the same boy who first
+sighted New Zealand.  On the 12th the ship came to an anchor in the
+Downs, and Captain Cook went on shore at Deal.
+
+The importance of the voyage just described can be better appreciated by
+the present generation than it could have been by those who were alive
+at the time of its conclusion.  Captain Cook's own modest summary of it
+is interesting.  He says:--
+
+"I sailed from Deptford July 30, 1768; from Plymouth August 26; touched
+at Madeira, Rio de Janeiro, and Straits of Le Maire; and entered the
+South Pacific Ocean, by Cape Horn, in January, the following year.
+
+"I endeavoured to make a direct course to Otaheite, and, in part,
+succeeded; but I made no discovery till I got within the tropic, when I
+fell in with Lagoon Island, Two Groups, Bird Island, Chain Island, and
+on April 13 arrived at Otaheite, where I remained three months, during
+which time the observations on the transit of Venus were made.
+
+"I then left it; discovered and visited the Society Isles, and Oheteroa;
+thence proceeded to the south till I arrived in the latitude of 40
+degrees 22 minutes, longitude 147 degrees 29 minutes West; and on
+October 6 fell in with the east side of New Zealand.  I continued
+exploring the coast of this country till March 1, 1770, when I quitted
+it and proceeded to New Holland, and having surveyed the eastern coast
+of that vast country, which part had not before been visited, I passed
+between its northern extremity and New Guinea; landed on the latter,
+touched at the island of Savu, thence to Batavia, the Cape of Good Hope,
+Saint Helena, and arrived in England on July 12, 1771."
+
+On their arrival in London, Cook and his companions were received by the
+scientific, as well as by the great and fashionable world, with the
+attention and respect they so well-deserved; for no previous expedition
+undertaken by England had been more generally successful.  Cook was
+promoted to the rank of Commander, his commission being dated August 29,
+1771.  He was also introduced to the King at Saint James's Palace, and
+had the honour of presenting the journal of his voyage, illustrated by
+maps and charts; while their Majesties the King and Queen, and numerous
+people of high rank and attainments, took delight in listening to the
+accounts given by the explorers of their adventures, and in examining
+the specimens of manufactures and of natural history which they had
+brought home.
+
+It was not, however, present _eclat_, nor the apparent magnitude of the
+discoveries made, but their consequences, which rendered this voyage of
+real importance.  The ultimate result was the founding of two nations of
+the Anglo-Saxon race; and whatever cause there may be to question, if
+not to condemn, the manner in which possession has been obtained of
+distant countries, and in which, also, their colonisation has been
+effected, in almost every instance, and by almost all nations having the
+power which civilisation gives, it must still be borne in mind that God
+has overruled, and is overruling, these transactions for His own glory
+and for the spiritual benefit of the world.  He makes not only "the
+wrath," but the ambition, and pride, and cupidity of man "to praise
+Him;" and then the remainder "He restrains."  And all circumstances are
+made, in His infinite wisdom and power, to advance the spread of "the
+glorious Gospel of the blessed God," and to usher in the kingdom of Him
+whose right it is to reign, even of Christ Jesus, the Prince of peace,
+the Lord of lords, and the King of kings.
+
+With regard to the discoveries made in the voyage just recorded, it is
+almost superfluous to say that the countries then visited for the first
+time by our countrymen have, after the lapse of a century, become
+familiar as household words to the whole world.  Australia, Tasmania,
+and New Zealand have become component parts of the British empire, and
+have already been made the home of hundreds of thousands of the crowded
+population of the British Isles, as well as of emigrants from other
+European countries; and these lands will, probably, before another
+century has passed away, become centres, not only of civilisation, but
+of evangelical truth and saving faith.  And herein the Christian reader
+will and must rejoice.
+
+------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+Note 1.  The names of several places visited by Captain Cook have, in
+course of time, been varied or altered.  In this work, however, it has
+been thought proper generally to adhere to the original nomenclature.
+
+Note 2.  A tablet has been placed to mark the spot where Captain Cook
+and his party landed, and may be seen in the engraving.
+
+Note 3.  If this was so understood at the time, we must lament that our
+countrymen should have consented to take part in what must be considered
+as a profane farce.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER THREE.
+
+SECOND VOYAGE OF DISCOVERY.  JUNE 1772 TO JULY 1775.
+
+It had long been the opinion of geographers that a great southern
+continent existed; and in 1738 a French expedition, under Monsieur
+Lozier Bouvet, had been sent out in search of it.  On January 1, 1739,
+he got sight of land, in latitude 45 degrees 20 minutes, and longitude
+25 degrees 47 minutes East from Teneriffe.  It was, according to his
+description, a lofty and steep cape, backed by mountains mostly covered
+with snow, while the coast had so broad a fringe of ice that it was
+impossible to approach it near enough to make any thorough examination.
+In remembrance of the day of discovery, the cape, which was supposed to
+be part of the southern continent, was called _Cape de la Circoncision_.
+
+It had been supposed, before the return of Cook from his first voyage,
+that New Zealand, New Holland, and New Guinea formed part of the great
+southern land, which was generally denominated Terra Australis
+Incognita.
+
+Cook, indeed, dispelled this idea by proving that these three
+territories were islands; but the question as to the existence of the
+great southern land still remained to be proved.
+
+The subject was under discussion by men of science when the Endeavour
+returned from her first voyage; and the Royal Society soon afterwards
+resolved to recommend the despatch of another expedition, for the
+purpose of attempting to settle the question.  An offer of the command
+of this exploratory voyage was at once made to Captain Cook, who gladly
+accepted it--the selection of ships suitable for the purpose being
+wisely left to his judgment.  The qualities he considered essential were
+great capacity, or stowage room, a rig easily worked, a size not too
+large to enter small harbours, and a build which would enable the vessel
+to take the ground and be easily got off again.
+
+The Endeavour, having been sent out to the Falkland Islands as a store
+ship, was not available; two more vessels, therefore, made by the same
+ship-builder as the Endeavour, were purchased at Hull.  The largest,
+named the Resolution, was of four hundred and sixty-two tons burden; and
+the other, called the Adventure, was three hundred and thirty-six tons.
+Captain Cook took possession of the former, as commander of the
+expedition; and Tobias Furneaux, who had been second lieutenant with
+Captain Wallis, was promoted and appointed to serve under Cook in
+command of the Adventure.
+
+Captain Cook's first lieutenant was Robert Cooper; his second, Charles
+Clerke, who had accompanied him on his previous voyage, as had also his
+third lieutenant, Richard Pickersgill, and the lieutenant of marines,
+John Edgecombe, with two of the warrant and several of the petty
+officers.
+
+Mr Banks and Dr Solander had intended going, but not finding the
+accommodation on board which they considered necessary for the comfort
+and convenience of themselves and their attendants, they gave up the
+project.  So great, however, was the public enthusiasm on the subject of
+the expedition, that, according to Boswell, even Dr Johnson thought of
+applying for leave to accompany it, though, if he ever seriously
+entertained the wish, it was speedily abandoned.
+
+Two astronomers, Mr William Wales and Mr William Bayley, were engaged
+by the Board of Longitude--the former sailing in the Resolution, the
+latter in the Adventure.  The Admiralty appointed, as landscape-painter,
+Mr William Hodges; and Mr John Reinhold Forster, and his son, were
+engaged to attend to the department of natural history.  The Board of
+Longitude also amply furnished the expedition with the best astronomical
+and other instruments which might be required, and with four
+watch-machines, as chronometers were then called.  Lord Sandwich, who
+was at the head of the Admiralty Board, anxiously watched the equipment
+of the ships, visiting them from time to time to satisfy himself that
+everything was done in the best way to secure the success of the
+undertaking and the comfort and health of those on board.
+
+Captain Cook had, in his former voyage, paid great attention to the
+means best adapted for preserving the health of his crew, and he had
+seen the importance of having an ample supply of provisions of an
+anti-scorbutic character.  He also endeavoured to have the ship well
+dried and ventilated, and determined, as far as possible, that the men's
+clothes should be kept dry, and their persons clean.  Each ship had two
+years and a half provisions on board, and among other articles were
+wheat and sugar (in lieu of oatmeal), oil, malt, salted cabbage,
+portable broth, mustard, marmalade of carrots, and inspissated juice of
+wort, from which beer could be at once made.  The frame of a vessel of
+twenty tons was put on board each ship, to be set up, if found
+necessary, to serve as tenders, or to enable the crews to escape should
+the ships be wrecked.  The Resolution had a complement of one hundred
+and twelve officers and men, and the Adventure of eighty-one.
+Fishing-nets and hooks of all sorts, articles to barter with the natives
+or to bestow as presents, and additional clothing for the crews were put
+on board.  Medals also were struck, with the likeness of his Majesty on
+one side, and of the two ships on the other, to be given to the
+inhabitants of newly-discovered countries, as memorials of the
+explorers' visit.  Indeed, no expedition with a similar object in view
+had ever left the shores of England so well equipped in every respect as
+was the one now about to sail.
+
+The Resolution, being ready for sea, sailed from Deptford on April 9,
+1772; but after being joined by the Adventure, she was detained by
+contrary winds till May 10, when, both again sailing, the Resolution was
+found to be so crank [Note 1] that it was necessary to lower her upper
+works, and for this purpose she put into Sheerness.  Lord Sandwich and
+Sir Hugh Palliser went down to see the alterations made in an effectual
+manner.  On June 22, the ship, being again ready for sea, sailed from
+Sheerness and joined the Adventure in Plymouth Sound on July 3.  Thus it
+will be seen that there was a delay of nearly three months after the
+expedition was supposed to be ready, before it was fully prepared for
+sea.  Lord Sandwich and Sir Hugh Palliser again visited the ships in
+Plymouth Sound, and the chronometers being set going in the presence of
+the astronomers and the chief officers, the ships at length, on July 13,
+set sail and shaped a course for Madeira.
+
+Anchoring in Funchal Roads on the 29th, and having taken on board fresh
+beef and vegetables, including onions, for sea stores, the ships sailed
+again on August 1.  Finding their water run short, they put into Porto
+Praya, in the island of Saint Jago, one of the Cape de Verde Islands,
+for a supply.  On October 29 the land of the Cape of Good Hope was made,
+but as the ships were unable to get in before dark, they stood off and
+on during the night.  In the evening the phosphorescence of the sea
+became unusually brilliant; and to convince Mr Forster, who differed
+from Mr Banks and Dr Solander that it was caused by insects, some
+buckets of water were drawn up from alongside.  On examination he found
+that the water was full of globular insects of the size of a pin's head,
+and quite transparent.
+
+The next day the ships anchored off Cape Town, where Captain Cook and
+his officers were received by the Governor and other authorities with
+attention and respect.  The Governor informed Captain Cook that a French
+ship had discovered land in the meridian of the Mauritius, in latitude
+48 degrees South; and also that in the previous March two French ships,
+under Monsieur Marion, had touched at the Cape on their way to explore
+the South Pacific.
+
+The expedition quitted the Cape of Good Hope on November 22, and steered
+a course towards Cape Circumcision, which was the first object for which
+they were directed to search.  They soon found the weather very cold,
+when warm clothing was issued; and having encountered a heavy gale, with
+hail and rain, which drove them far to the eastward of their course, all
+hope of reaching the looked-for cape was given up.  Owing, also, to the
+severity of the weather, and the sudden transition from dry heat to
+extreme cold and wet, the ships' companies suffered a severe misfortune
+in the loss of nearly all the live-stock (consisting of sheep, hogs, and
+geese) which they had brought with them from Cape Town.  This weather
+continued for the greater part of the time the ships remained in that
+high latitude.  On December 10 an island of ice was seen in latitude 50
+degrees 40 minutes South and 2 degrees 0 minutes East of the Cape of
+Good Hope.  After this thick, hazy weather again came on, with sleet and
+snow.  The ships continued their course, the Resolution leading, when an
+iceberg, directly for which they were steering, was discovered through
+the mist not a mile off.  It was about fifty feet high, flat at top,
+about half a mile in circumference, and its sides, against which the sea
+broke furiously, rose perpendicularly from the ocean.  Captain Furneaux,
+who was astern, took this ice for land, and hauled off from it; and
+there is no doubt that many navigators who have reported land in these
+latitudes have been deceived in the same way.
+
+Nothing could be more trying to the explorers than the navigation in
+which they were now engaged, day after day tacking off and on among
+large fields of ice, through which they in vain endeavoured to find a
+passage to the southward, with the constant risk, in thick weather, of
+running foul of icebergs, or of getting fast in the packed ice which
+might any moment enclose them, while all the time they were exposed to
+storms of snow and sleet, with a constant frost, although it was the
+middle of summer.  Dangerous as it was sailing among icebergs, or, as
+Captain Cook calls them, ice-rocks, especially in thick weather, the
+ships were in still greater peril when surrounded by packed ice, which
+consisted of huge slabs, of great thickness, varying from thirty or
+forty feet down to three or four feet square, packed close together, and
+often piled one on another.  Stout as were the ships, it was not
+expected that they could resist the enormous pressure to which they
+would be subjected should they get caught in such frozen bonds.  It was
+the opinion of those on board that this sort of ice was formed only in
+bays and rivers, and that therefore they must be near land, which was
+eagerly though vainly looked-for.  So severe was the cold that an
+iceberg examined by the master had no water running down it, as is
+generally the case in summer.
+
+Captain Cook now steered to the west, in the hope of getting round the
+ice; but though he held on this course for some time, both to the south
+and west of the supposed position of Cape Circumcision, he neither fell
+in with it, nor did he observe any of the usual indications of land.
+Various birds, however, were seen, and several of them were shot; but as
+they would find roosting-places on the ice islands, they might have come
+a very great distance from the land.  Thus, the penguins, which were
+seen in great numbers on some icebergs, and are supposed never to go far
+from land, might have come a very great distance over the ice from their
+native haunts.  Be that as it may, no land was seen by either vessel,
+notwithstanding the diligent search made for it.
+
+On December 31, while the ships were still surrounded by ice, a strong
+gale sprang up, with a heavy sea, which made it very dangerous for them
+to remain in the position in which they then were.  The peril was yet
+further increased by an immense field of ice which appeared to the
+north, extending from north-east by east to south-west by west, and
+between two and three miles off.  The ships received several severe
+blows from masses of ice of the largest size.  Providentially, they got
+clear by the afternoon, for at that time the wind increased so much that
+it was necessary to haul the top-sails and to strike topgallant masts.
+The next day the wind abated, but the weather continued thick and hazy,
+with sleet and snow which froze on the rigging as it fell, and
+ornamented the whole of it with icicles.  At length the longitude in
+which the looked-for cape was supposed to lie was reached, and as the
+ships were far to the southward of the latitude in which Captain Bouvet
+stated he had seen it, no doubt remained that he had mistaken lofty
+icebergs, surrounded by loose or field ice, for land, as Captain Cook
+and his officers had already been deceived on the first day they fell in
+with field ice.
+
+When the weather became finer the ships were able to fill up their
+water-casks with pure fresh water, by collecting masses of ice, and then
+hanging them up to allow any salt which might have adhered to them to
+run off.  Whenever the weather permitted, the astronomers were employed
+in making observations, and the naturalists in collecting birds, the
+only objects they had the means of obtaining.
+
+The antarctic circle was crossed on January 17, in longitude 39 degrees
+35 minutes East; and on the evening of that day the whole sea to the
+south and west appeared covered with ice, though shortly before none was
+in sight.  In this space thirty-eight ice islands, great and small, were
+counted, besides loose ice in abundance, so that the ships were obliged
+to luff to avoid one piece, and to bear up to escape another, as they
+proceeded to the south.  At length a compact mass, from sixteen to
+eighteen feet high, appearing to the south, without any opening, Captain
+Cook altered his course to the north.  A number of whales were now seen
+sporting about the ice, and several flocks of antarctic petrels.  The
+ships did not alter their course an hour too soon, for that night a
+heavy gale sprang up which would have rendered their position very
+dangerous.  After this, search was in vain made for the land said to
+have been seen by the French captain in the longitude of the Mauritius.
+
+On February 8, during thick weather, the Adventure was separated from
+the Resolution, and though, according to arrangement, Captain Cook
+cruised for three days about the spot where his consort had last been
+seen, and continued burning blue lights and firing guns, he was
+compelled at last to give up the search.  On the night of the 17th the
+aurora presented a very beautiful appearance.  It was first seen in the
+east, and, gradually rising, formed a brilliant arch across the heavens,
+with a light sufficiently strong to cast shadows on the deck, and at one
+time to allow a book to be read.  A description of the incidents met
+with during this part of the voyage would not prove generally
+interesting.  One, however, must not be omitted.
+
+The Resolution being off a large ice island, round which there was a
+quantity of loose ice, Captain Cook sent two boats to take some on
+board.  The island was not less than half a mile in circumference, and
+its summit three or four hundred feet above the surface of the sea.
+While the boats were thus engaged in its neighbourhood, it was seen to
+bend over till it turned nearly bottom up, though it seemed by the
+change not to have lost either in height or size.  The boats escaped
+without damage from their dangerous position.
+
+During all the time, up to the separation of the two ships, the crews
+had enjoyed generally excellent health.  A few slight symptoms of scurvy
+had appeared, but they were quickly subdued by a liberal use of the
+remedies which had been supplied.  The fresh wort made from malt seems
+to have been very efficacious in arresting the malady.  Occasionally,
+too, when the weather allowed, the men's bedding and clothes were spread
+on deck to air, and the ship was smoked and cleaned between decks.  This
+prevented the crews from contracting those diseases which have proved so
+fatal on board ships where they have been neglected.
+
+At length, by the middle of March, the antarctic summer being nearly
+over, and his crew requiring rest and his ship refitting, Captain Cook
+shaped a course which would soon bring her into a more genial clime.  He
+had purposed visiting Van Diemen's Land, but as the wind would not allow
+him to shape a course for that country, he steered for New Zealand,
+which was sighted on March 25.  A heavy gale compelled him to keep at
+sea, but the following day he entered Dusky Bay, at the south-west end
+of Tavai Poenammoo, or the Middle Island, as it is now called.  This was
+on Friday, March 26, after having been one hundred and seventeen days at
+sea, and sailed over three thousand six hundred and sixty leagues, or
+nearly ten thousand miles, without having once sighted land.  Only one
+man, and he of a naturally bad habit of body, had been seriously ill;
+and Cook attributed the excellent health of his crew, partly to the
+frequent airing and sweetening of the ship by fires, etcetera, and
+partly to the portable broth, sweet-wort, pickled cabbage, and
+sour-krout.  Although no discovery, except of a negative character, was
+made during this part of the voyage, we cannot but admire the hardihood
+and perseverance, the skill and courage, exhibited by the great
+navigator during the whole of that trying time.
+
+A secure harbour having been found by Lieutenant Pickersgill in Dasky
+Bay, where the ship could lie close to the shore, she was warped into it
+and moored, her yards being locked in the branches of the trees; there
+being also, a hundred yards from her stern, a fine stream of fresh
+water.  No place could have been better suited for refitting the ship
+and refreshing the crew, and both officers and men enjoyed their stay at
+this healthy and beautiful spot.  Places were forthwith cleared of trees
+to set up the observatory, the forge, and the tents for the sail-makers
+and coopers.  At the captain's suggestion, wholesome beer was brewed
+from the leaves of a tree resembling the American black spruce, mixed
+with the inspissated juice of wort and molasses.  The constant attention
+of the great navigator to the most minute points calculated to maintain
+or improve the health of those placed under his charge cannot be too
+strongly commended.  Throughout his journals notices constantly occur
+which show that whenever anti-scorbutic vegetables, or herbs of any
+sort, were required, he did not entrust the search to others, but went
+himself to look for them.  It is sad to reflect how indifferent to his
+example many other navigators have been, especially the masters of
+merchantmen; and that even at the present day, notwithstanding all the
+assistance which science is able to render, their crews often suffer
+fearfully from scurvy.
+
+Shooting and fishing parties now went out constantly, and an ample
+supply of wild-fowl was obtained.  The bay was also surveyed, and found
+to contain several good harbours.  Some exploring expeditions for short
+distances into the exterior were also started, but very few natives were
+met with.  There appeared, indeed, to be only three or four families
+settled in the neighbourhood, and it was not understood why they had
+separated themselves from their countrymen; but it was conjectured that
+they were the remnant of a tribe which, in one of the frequent native
+wars, had escaped massacre.  Only one of these families became intimate
+with the strangers, in whom they showed unusual confidence by taking up
+their quarters very near to the watering-place.
+
+These people evinced little astonishment at sight of a few sheep and
+goats which, having escaped the effects of the cold, were taken on
+shore, but stared at them with what appeared to be stupid insensibility;
+and when various articles of European manufacture were offered to them
+they received these gifts with indifference, except, indeed, hatchets
+and spike-nails, the value of which they could comprehend.
+
+After some further acquaintance, the head of this family and his
+daughter were persuaded to visit the ship.  Before venturing on board,
+he presented to the captain a piece of cloth and a green talc hatchet;
+he gave another to Mr Forster, and the girl gave one to Mr Hodges.
+This custom of making presents had been found common with the natives of
+the South Sea Islands, but had not before been observed among the New
+Zealanders.  After these propitiatory gifts were received, and before
+stepping on to the stage which led to the deck, the native took a small
+green branch in his hand, with which he several times struck the ship's
+side, while he also repeated a speech or prayer.  When this ceremony was
+concluded he stepped on deck.
+
+On taking leave of this New Zealander, Captain Cook was presented by him
+with another piece of native cloth, with the expression of a wish for a
+cloak in return.  One of red baize was accordingly given to him, and
+seemed to afford great satisfaction.  Thus far, therefore, on this
+visit, intercourse with these aborigines of the new country was pleasant
+and successful.
+
+Other natives were afterwards seen by some of the explorers, who were on
+a shooting expedition.  These set up a hideous noise, and were with
+difficulty persuaded to approach and lay down their spears.  At last one
+of them came forward, with a plant in his hand, one end of which he
+presented to Captain Cook, while he himself held the other.  He then
+began a long speech with frequent pauses, and as soon as the captain
+replied--of course, not understanding a word that was said--the savage
+proceeded in his harangue.  This done, he took off his cloak, which he
+put on the captain's shoulders, and seemed to consider that their peace
+was established.  The natives followed the English to the boat, and
+seeing some muskets lying across the stern, desired them to be taken
+away, having probably observed their effects on the wild ducks.  They
+then assisted to launch the boat, but it was necessary to keep a
+watchful eye on them, for they wanted to take away everything in the
+boat on which they could lay hands.  No canoes were observed belonging
+to these people, two or three logs of wood tied together serving them
+for crossing rivers; indeed, fish and fowl were so plentiful that they
+had not far to go in order to procure food.
+
+In accordance with Cook's desire to benefit the countries he visited, he
+took five geese which he had brought from the Cape of Good Hope, and
+left them in a retired cove (which was on that account called Goose
+Cove), in hope that they might there multiply and be useful to future
+inhabitants.  A garden was also dug, and, with the same object in view,
+various sorts of garden seeds were sown in it.
+
+On April 28, the tents and other articles being taken on board, the
+Resolution once more got under way, though, owing to light and contrary
+winds, it was not till May 11 that she was fairly at sea.  She then
+proceeded along the west coast, towards Queen Charlotte's Sound, in
+Cook's Straits, between the two islands.  Nothing of importance occurred
+till the ship was about three leagues to the westward of Cape Stephens,
+when just as it fell calm six waterspouts appeared round her, four
+between her and the land, and one outside; the sixth in the south-west,
+two or three miles off.  Progressing in a crooked line to the
+north-east, it passed within fifty yards of her stern.  A gun had been
+got ready to fire into it when it should come nearer.  The diameter of
+the base was about sixty feet, the sea within which was much agitated,
+and foamed up to great height.  From this the water appeared to be
+carried in a spiral stream up to the clouds.  Some of the seamen said
+that they saw a bird in it, which was whirled round like the fly of a
+jack.  During the time the waterspouts were in sight there were light
+puffs of wind from all points of the compass, while occasionally large
+drops of rain fell.
+
+On the 18th the Resolution appeared off Queen Charlotte's Sound, where,
+greatly to the satisfaction of all on board, her consort, the Adventure,
+was found to be awaiting her.  Her boats soon came out, and the
+Resolution was brought to an anchor in Ship Cove, close to her.  Captain
+Furneaux at once came on board, and gave Captain Cook a narrative of his
+proceedings after being separated from him.  Having in vain looked-for
+the Resolution, he bore away to the north, till Van Diemen's Land was
+sighted.  He sailed along the east coast for some distance, some parts
+of which appeared fertile and thickly populated.  The Adventure lay
+within Maria Island for five days, to take in wood and water, and then
+proceeded to the north along shore.  For some distance no land was seen,
+but as the soundings were very regular, Captain Furneaux was of opinion
+that no straits existed between New Holland and Van Diemen's Land, but
+only a very deep bay.  Having come to this erroneous opinion, he bore
+away for New Zealand, and had been five weeks in Ship Cove when the
+Resolution appeared.  He had kept up a friendly intercourse with the
+natives, who frequently asked for Tupia, and seemed much concerned when
+told that he was dead.
+
+While at Queen Charlotte's Sound Captain Cook had a garden planted, as
+before, and gave the natives some potatoes, explaining their use and the
+mode of cultivating them.  A pair of goats and a boar and two sows were
+put on shore, in the hopes of their multiplying.  A ewe and ram, which
+had been brought with great trouble and care to the place, were also
+landed, but the following day were found dead, from having eaten some
+poisonous plant.
+
+An idea had prevailed on board the Adventure that the natives were ready
+to sell their children.  This Captain Cook soon proved to be incorrect.
+Their object in bringing them on board was to obtain presents for them.
+A man brought his son, a boy of about ten years of age, and at first
+Captain Cook fancied from what he had heard that the object of the
+father was to sell him, but he soon found that it was merely to obtain a
+white shirt, which was given.  The boy was so proud of it that he went
+about showing it to everybody he met, till he encountered old Will, the
+goat, who, making a butt at him, knocked him over in some dirt, sadly
+soiling his shirt.  The boy considered the mischief irreparable, and was
+afraid of appearing before his father.  At last he was brought in by Mr
+Forster, when he told a lamentable story against the great "dog"--nor
+was he comforted till his shirt was washed and dried.  Captain Cook
+justly remarks in his journal that this incident shows how easily people
+can be deceived, when ignorant of the language, as to the customs and
+habits of the natives of foreign countries.
+
+While these friendly natives were on board, a strange canoe full of
+people entered the harbour.  The natives on seeing them said they were
+enemies, and two of them mounted the arm chests on the poop, one armed
+with a native hatchet, and the other with a spear, and, in bravado, bade
+their enemies defiance.  The rest who were on board, jumping into their
+canoe, went on shore, probably to secure their women and children.  The
+two who remained begged Captain Cook to fire at the strangers.  The
+latter, however, came on board, apparently without having had any evil
+intentions, and peace was soon established among all parties.  The
+strangers at once asked for Tupia, and hearing that he was dead, one or
+two expressed their sorrow in a way which appeared more formal than
+real.
+
+A brisk trade was soon established with the newcomers; but the
+thoughtless seamen were so ready to give even the clothes off their
+backs for the merest trifles, neither useful nor ornamental, that the
+captain was compelled to dismiss the strangers.  He afterwards crossed
+the harbour with Mr Forster and one of the officers to a spot where a
+hundred natives--men, women, and children--were collected, with six
+canoes, and apparently all their utensils.  These they seem always to
+carry with them when they go even a short distance from home, lest they
+should be stolen by their enemies in their absence.
+
+The state of constant warfare and consequent distrust in which they
+lived, especially in the Middle Island, was very evident, for they were
+generally found on their guard, travelling or working with their weapons
+in their hands; even the women were seen occasionally armed with spears.
+Captain Cook had reason to believe that the entire population of the
+Sound had changed since he was there in 1770, as he could not recognise
+the face of a single person he then knew.  Those who asked for Tupia had
+possibly not seen him, but had only heard of him from their countrymen,
+among whom he was very popular.  The immorality of the natives met with
+during their visit to New Zealand appears to have been very flagrant,
+and it is sad to reflect that advantage was taken of it by the seamen,
+without the slightest rebuke or censure from their superiors; indeed, it
+cannot be discovered from the journals of the officers that they were at
+all aware of their duties as a Christian people with regard to heathen
+savages whose shores they visited.
+
+The king's birthday was spent with the usual festivities, the officers
+of the two ships dining together.
+
+On June 7, 1773, the two ships put out to sea, with the intention of
+exploring all the unknown parts of the ocean between the meridian of New
+Zealand and Cape Horn.  In case of separation they were to rendezvous at
+Otaheite, where Captain Furneaux was to wait till August 20, and then to
+proceed to Queen Charlotte's Sound.  If not joined at that place before
+November 20 by Captain Cook, he was to put to sea, and carry out the
+instructions he had received from the Admiralty.  Cook's object in
+attempting to explore in so high a latitude during the winter season was
+to get some of the work done which would otherwise have occupied the
+precious months of summer; and besides, he wished to show future
+navigators that it would be practicable to make discoveries even in the
+depths of winter.
+
+After leaving New Zealand, the course steered was generally about
+north-east, so that the ships soon got into a warm latitude, and the men
+once more put on their cool clothing.  Sad news was brought on board the
+Resolution at this time, June 29.  It was that scurvy had broken out on
+board the Adventure; that her cook had died, and that twenty men were
+ill with that complaint and the flux.  The Resolution had only three men
+on the sick-list, and but one of these had the scurvy.  A few others,
+showing symptoms of it, were supplied with wort, marmalade of carrots,
+and thickened juice of lemons.  It appeared that the crew of the
+Adventure, during the six weeks they were in Queen Charlotte's Sound,
+had eaten no vegetables, partly from not knowing what herbs to gather,
+and also from the inveterate dislike of the seamen to a new diet.
+Captain Cook had, from the first, when he thought it necessary, insisted
+on having wild celery, scurvy grass, and other herbs boiled with the
+pease and wheat, both for officers and men; and though some refused to
+eat it, he was firm, and would allow no other food to be served out, so
+that at last the prejudice wore off.  Captain Furneaux instantly made
+use of all the remedies in his power, and his people improved in health.
+Still it was necessary for their sakes to put into harbour where
+vegetables could be procured, and a course was accordingly steered for
+Otaheite.
+
+Several small low islands, clothed with cocoanut trees, were seen, but
+the necessity of reaching a harbour without delay prevented their
+examination.
+
+On August 15, Osnaburg Island, or Maitea, was seen, and the ships then
+steered for Oaiti-piha Bay, near the south-east end of Otaheite, in
+order to procure there such refreshments as the place could afford.
+
+At daybreak they found themselves not half a league from a reef, towards
+which the scud of the sea rapidly sent them, the wind having completely
+fallen.  The depth was too great to anchor, and the boats failed to tow
+the ships off.  A number of natives came off with provisions, but seemed
+totally unconscious of the dangerous position of the ships.  It was
+curious that, though they recognised Captain Cook and those who had been
+there before, no one asked for Tupia.
+
+The position of the ships became more and more critical; the captain had
+hoped to get round the end of the reef, but as they drew nearer and
+nearer this hope vanished, and shipwreck seemed certain.  Just then a
+passage was discovered through the reef, but a boat being sent ahead to
+sound, it was found that there was not water sufficient for the ships to
+pass over: indeed, so strongly did the flood-tide set towards it, that
+the Resolution seemed nearer than ever to destruction.  The horrors of
+shipwreck stared the explorers in the face; there was no wind to fill
+their sails; the boats were powerless; the only means of saving the
+ships was to anchor; but would the anchors hold?  They were let go, and
+the Resolution was brought up in less than three-fathom water, striking
+at every fall of the sea, while the Adventure brought up close on her
+bow without striking.  Kedge anchors and hawsers were now carried out,
+and found ground; by hauling on these the ship was got afloat, but there
+was a fear that these would come home or be cut by the rocks, and
+nothing could then have saved the Resolution.  Happily, they held on
+till the tide turned, when a light breeze coming off the land both
+vessels made sail, and got out of danger, though with the loss of
+several anchors and cables.
+
+The next day the ships anchored in Oaiti-piha Bay, about two cables'
+length from the shore.  Both ships were crowded with natives, who
+brought off cocoanuts, plantains, bananas, apples, yams, and other
+fruits and vegetables, which they exchanged for nails and beads.
+Presents of shirts and axes were made to several who called themselves
+chiefs, or _earees_, and who promised to bring off hogs and fowls,
+which, however, they did not do.  These earees did not scruple to pilfer
+whatever came in their way, and one of them, who pretended to be very
+friendly, was found handing articles which did not belong to him out of
+the quarter-galley.  As his companions on deck were behaving in the same
+way, they were all turned out of the ship, and two muskets were fired
+over the head of the chief offender to frighten him.  On this, he jumped
+out of his canoe, which, with two others, was brought on board, and a
+gun was fired along shore, but so as not to hurt any one.  This soon
+cleared the coast.  In one of the canoes was a little boy, who was at
+first very much frightened, but beads were given to him, and he was sent
+in safety on shore.  This quickly restored the confidence of the
+natives, and all by the evening were again good friends.
+
+The intercourse with the natives now went on with tolerable smoothness,
+though their thieving propensities frequently nearly brought about a
+rupture.  On one occasion, in Captain Cook's presence, a native seized
+the musket of one of the guards on shore, and made off with it.  Some of
+the seamen were sent after him, but he would have escaped had not the
+natives also given chase, knocked down the thief, and brought back the
+musket.  Although fear may possibly have operated on this occasion with
+the natives more than a sense of justice, Captain Cook was thankful to
+them, because he would certainly have lost ten times the value of the
+weapon in endeavouring to recover it by force.
+
+The following day a thief brought on board a quantity of fruit as a
+present, among which were a number of cocoanuts, which, after the juice
+had been extracted, had been thrown away by the seamen.  These had been
+so artfully tied up in bundles that at first the cheat was not
+perceived.  The chief did not seem at all ashamed when the trick was
+discovered, but having opened a few himself, acknowledged that they were
+empty.  On going on shore, however, he sent off a quantity of plantains
+and bananas.
+
+A supply of water, fruit, and roots having been got on board, Captain
+Cook was preparing to sail for Matavai, when it was announced that
+Waheatoua was coming to meet him.  He found the young chief seated in
+the open air on a stool, surrounded by a large number of attendants, and
+at once recollected him, having known him when a boy, under the name of
+Tearee.  He had, on the death of his father, Waheatoua, taken his name.
+The chief begged Captain Cook to remain some months, promising hogs and
+provisions of all sorts.  He insisted on keeping the captain by his
+side, and whenever they moved about the stool was carried after them,
+that they might again be seated in the same position.
+
+Before the ships had come to an anchor in Matavai Bay, the decks were
+covered with natives, many of whom Captain Cook recognised.  The king,
+Otoo, was among those on board, but he took fright without any apparent
+reason, and landed again.  The next day an encampment was made on shore
+for the sail-makers, coopers, and the sick.  This done, Captain Cook,
+accompanied by Captain Furneaux, Mr Forster, and others, set off to
+visit Otoo.  He was found seated on the ground, under the shade of a
+tree, with a large crowd round him, all standing uncovered, as a mark of
+respect; that is, not only their heads bare, but their shoulders, and
+some wore no clothing above the breast--his father not excepted.
+Presents were made by Captain Cook, and the king was told that they were
+given in friendship, and that none would be received in return.  The
+king inquired for Tupia, and for all the officers who were on board the
+Endeavour on the former voyage.  Otoo, though a fine tall young man, was
+very nervous, and acknowledged that he had left the ship because he was
+afraid of the guns.  On the 27th, however, he came to the camp with a
+large retinue, having first sent on board a quantity of cloth, fruits, a
+hog, and two large fish.  He, a sister and younger brother, with several
+attendants, were persuaded to visit the ship, and all received presents,
+Captain Cook afterwards taking them to their home at Oparree in his
+boat.
+
+On landing, the captain met a venerable old lady, the mother of Toutaha.
+She seized him by the hands, and bursting into tears, exclaimed,
+"Toutaha, the friend of Cook, is dead!"  Captain Cook says that he was
+so much affected that he should have wept also had not Otoo drawn him
+away.  Captain Furneaux made the king a present of a male and female
+goat, in the hope that they might stock the island.
+
+On another occasion, when Otoo came on board, as he entered the cabin
+several chiefs who were there immediately uncovered their shoulders,
+although they did not rise or show him any other mark of respect.  He
+was entertained with the bagpipes, which seemed to have especial charms
+for the natives.  The seamen also danced hornpipes and country dances.
+In return, the king entertained the voyagers with a dramatic
+performance, in which his sister took a part.  The drama seemed to have
+reference to the circumstances of the time, as Captain Cook's name was
+frequently mentioned.  The lady's dress was very elegant, being
+decorated with long tassels made of feathers, hanging from the waist
+downwards.  The performance lasted about two hours.  So far as the
+disposition of the natives was concerned, the visit seems to have been
+satisfactory, though fewer hogs were obtained than were required.  Mr
+Pickersgill was sent about in all directions to obtain them, and in one
+of his expeditions he saw Oberea, once the person of most importance in
+the island.  She had now become old, poor, and of little consequence.
+
+Otoo was very unwilling that the ships should go, and shed tears when he
+parted from Captain Cook.  A young lad, called Boreo, was taken on board
+the Resolution.  Though he seemed tolerably satisfied, he could not help
+weeping as he saw his native island left astern.  Two days afterwards
+the ships anchored in the harbour of Owharre, in the island of Huaheine.
+The two captains, on landing, were received with the greatest
+cordiality by the natives, who, after a few presents had been
+distributed amongst them, brought hogs, fowls, dogs, and fruit, which
+they exchanged for hatchets, nails, and beads; indeed, there seemed
+every prospect of an abundance of provisions being obtained.  The chief,
+Oree, who had, on Cook's former visit, exchanged names with him, was
+still living, and sent word that he was hastening to see him.  Before,
+however, the captain was allowed to leave his boat, five young plantain
+trees--the emblem of peace employed by the natives--were brought on
+board separately, and with some ceremony.  Three young pigs, their ears
+ornamented with cocoanut fibre, accompanied the first three, and a dog
+the fourth.  Lastly, the chief sent the inscription engraved on a piece
+of pewter which had been left with him in July 1769.
+
+This ceremony ended, the guide who had come to conduct the English to
+the shore requested them to decorate three young plantain trees with
+looking-glasses, nails, medals, and beads.  This being done, they landed
+with the trees in their hands, and were conducted to the chief through a
+multitude of people, who made a lane for them to pass.  They were then
+made to sit down a few paces from the chief, and the plantains were
+taken from them.  One was for their god, one for the king, and the third
+for friendship.  Captain Cook then wished to advance to the king, but he
+was told that the king would come to him, which he did, falling on his
+neck and embracing him; the tears flowing down his venerable cheeks,
+showing the affectionate feelings of his heart.  His friends were then
+introduced, and presents were made to them.  Cook speaks in the most
+affectionate terms of Oree; indeed, all his actions showed him to have
+been an upright, kind-hearted man.
+
+The trading expeditions sent out were so successful that three hundred
+hogs, besides fowls and vegetables of all sorts, were obtained.  It was
+from this island that Captain Furneaux received on board a young man,
+named Omai, a native of Ulietea, where he had some property, of which he
+had been dispossessed by the people of Bolabola.  Omai was not a chief,
+and he was so inferior in figure, complexion, and manners to the chiefs,
+that Captain Cook was surprised that Captain Furneaux should have
+selected him.  He was not, indeed, a favourable sample of the natives of
+the Pacific Isles as far as appearance went.  Ultimately, however, Omai,
+by his intelligence and good conduct, won the regard of Captain Cook,
+who afterwards, in his journal, speaks of him in warm terms of
+commendation.
+
+Here, as elsewhere, there were thieves and rogues.  Mr Sparrman was
+attacked while wandering in the woods, beaten, and robbed of his clothes
+and hanger.  Oree, on hearing of it, shed tears, and set off in person
+to recover the clothes, most of which he got back.  Altogether, however,
+the chief and his subjects were among the best disposed of all the
+people visited during the voyage.  He came on board the Resolution as
+she was leaving the harbour, and did not quit her till he had taken an
+affectionate farewell of Captain Cook, when nearly half a league out at
+sea.  He then went away in a small canoe, paddled by himself and another
+man, all the other natives having long before left the ship.
+
+The following morning the ships entered the harbour of Ohamaneno, in the
+island of Ulietea, where they lay safely moored.  The ships were at once
+surrounded with canoes, and hogs and vegetables were offered in
+abundance.  At first, none of the former would be taken, as the ships
+were already crowded; but as killing and salting went on, room was made
+for them; and, in all, four hundred and fifty hogs were collected at
+this island.  Most of them were brought in canoes from different
+directions to the ship, so that there was very little trading on shore.
+It was in consequence of the exertions made by Captain Cook in
+collecting provisions, and the judicious means he employed, that he was
+able to remain away from home so many years, and to make so many
+important discoveries.
+
+The chief of that part of the island was Oreo.  Captain Cook paid him a
+visit at his own house, and was cordially received.  He, as others had
+done, inquired after Tupia and the captain's companions on his former
+voyage, by name.  A play was soon got up--the chiefs daughter and seven
+men being the actors.  The plot was as follows:--A theft was committed
+in a masterly manner, but discovered before the thief had time to carry
+off his plunder.  He and his accomplice were attacked by those who had
+charge of it; but the latter were beaten off, and the rogues escaped in
+triumph.  This incident gives a notion of the moral character of the
+people in that respect.  On another occasion Oreo entertained the
+strangers with a feast, in the native fashion.  The floor was strewed
+thick with leaves, on which hot bread, fruit, and plantains were placed,
+with two pigs roasted whole--one of about sixty, the other thirty
+pounds.  They were admirably dressed, having been baked in the native
+underground ovens, all parts being equally cooked.  Cocoanuts supplied
+the beverage, but the visitors had brought some bottles of wine, which
+the chief seemed to like, as he both then and always filled his glass
+whenever the bottle came to him, but seemed not to be affected by it.
+Plays were got up every day for the amusement of the strangers; indeed,
+the natives seemed anxious in every way to please them.  The people of
+this island appeared to be of a mild, amiable, and timid disposition.
+
+A native lad about eighteen years of age, called Oedidee, joined the
+Resolution at this island, in the place of Boreo, who, falling in love
+with a damsel he met with, remained that he might marry her.  Oedidee
+was a native of Bolabola, and a near relation of the great Opoony, chief
+of that island.
+
+On this his second visit to these islands, Captain Cook, knowing more of
+the language of the people, was able to gain a better insight into their
+habits and customs.  Among other points, he discovered, without doubt,
+that human sacrifices were frequently offered up at their morais.  At
+first the natives would only acknowledge that criminals were killed, but
+afterwards they confessed that any whom the priest chose to denounce
+were offered up.  Thus, a priest who had a dislike to a man might at any
+moment doom him to death by pronouncing him a bad man.  He then sent out
+his executioners, who, with a couple of blows from their heavy clubs,
+struck the unsuspecting victim dead at their feet.  The corpse was
+forthwith carried to the morais, when the chief, who was compelled to
+attend such sacrifices, had the eye offered to him to eat!  At some of
+the islands, the inhabitants of which Captain Cook describes as the most
+happy on earth, the priests held this terrific power to a fearful
+extent.  At the time of his thus writing he was not aware of the fact
+which is so strikingly illustrative of the declaration of holy writ,
+that "the dark places of the earth are full of the habitations of
+cruelty."
+
+On September 17, 1773, the ships were again at sea.  It was the
+intention of Captain Cook to get into the latitude of Middleburg and
+Amsterdam, in order to touch there before hauling up for New Zealand.
+At night they generally lay to, lest any land might be passed in the
+dark.  Some small islets clothed with cocoanut trees were passed on the
+23rd, and named Hervey's Islands, but no inhabitants were seen on shore.
+
+Middleburg was reached on October 1, and the following day, as the ships
+were beating up to an anchorage, two canoes came boldly off to them.
+Directly the anchors were dropped, the ships were surrounded by canoes,
+bringing cloth and other curiosities.  Among the people who came on
+board was a chief, whose good services were secured by the present of a
+hatchet, spike-nails, and other articles.  His name was Tioony.  He
+piloted the boats to a place where the landing was very easy, and where
+a large concourse of people were assembled to receive them with
+commodities, which they pressed on their visitors, scarcely expecting to
+receive anything in return.  At last, the chief, making the people open
+right and left, conducted his visitors to his house, which was
+delightfully situated about three hundred yards from the sea, at the
+head of a fine lawn under the shade of some shaddock trees.  The floor
+was covered with mats, on which the guests were invited to be seated,
+the people arranging themselves on the ground in a circle outside.  The
+piper having landed, Captain Cook ordered the bagpipes to be played,
+and, in return, three young women sang with a very good grace.  A
+present being made to each of these, all the other women commenced
+singing.  Their songs were musical and harmonious, and in no way harsh
+or disagreeable.  The chief had another house in an adjoining
+plantation, to which his guests were conducted, and where they were
+entertained with bananas and cocoanuts, and bowls of cava; though, on
+witnessing the mode of preparing that beverage, the thirst of the
+visitors was sufficiently quenched.  They were seated in an open space
+in front of the house, which was surrounded with fruit and other trees,
+whose fragrance filled the air.
+
+The chief, Tioony, went on board and dined, and then, at their request,
+conducted the strangers through part of the island.  There were numerous
+plantations of fir trees and edible roots, laid out with great judgment,
+and enclosed with neat fences made of reeds.  The ships were crowded the
+whole day with people trafficking, and perfect good order prevailed.  In
+the evening, on the return of the officers on board, they expressed
+themselves highly delighted with the country and the very obliging
+behaviour of the inhabitants, who seemed to vie with each other in doing
+what they thought would please their visitors.
+
+The group of islands, at one of which the ships now were, was called the
+Tonga Islands; but Cook, from the treatment he received, named them the
+Friendly Islands, by which name they are now generally known.  Tasman,
+who discovered them in 1642-3, named the two principal islands Amsterdam
+and Middleburg.  The former is called by the natives Tongatabu, or the
+Great Tonga; the latter Ea-oo-we.  There are other volcanic islands to
+the north, belonging to the group, not then known.
+
+Leaving Ea-oo-we, or Middleburg, the ships ran down to Tongatabu,
+keeping about half a mile from the shore, on which the sea broke with a
+heavy surf.  With the aid of glasses it was seen that every part of the
+shore was laid out in plantations, while the natives were observed
+running along the shore waving small white flags, which were, of course,
+looked on as an emblem of peace.  They were answered by hoisting a Saint
+George's ensign.  Several canoes paddled alongside, and the people in
+them, after presenting the cava root, came boldly on board.  The ships
+anchored in Van Diemen's Road, just outside the breakers, with a
+casting-anchor and cable to seaward in forty-seven-fathom water, to
+prevent them from tailing on the rocks.  Their decks were quickly
+crowded with natives, who brought off only native cloths, for which the
+seamen too readily gave them clothes.  To put a stop to this proceeding,
+Captain Cook ordered that no sort of curiosities should be purchased by
+any person whatever.  The good effect of this order was visible next
+morning, when, instead of comparatively useless articles, the natives
+brought off bananas and cocoanuts in abundance, and some pigs and fowls.
+
+Proper arrangements having been made for conducting the trade, the
+captains landed under the guidance of a chief, Attago, who had at once
+singled out Captain Cook as the principal person, and offered him the
+usual presents.  Cook and Attago also exchanged names, the custom of so
+doing being practised at the Friendly as well as at the Society Islands.
+The friendly chief pointed out a creek into which the boats could run,
+and on landing the visitors were seated under the shade of a tree, the
+people forming a circle round them; but no one attempted to push
+forward, as was the habit of the Otaheiteans.  The officers then begged
+Attago to show them the country.  This, without hesitation, he at once
+signified his readiness to do.
+
+The first visit was paid to a sort of temple in an open green, raised on
+the top of an artificial mound, about seventeen feet above the level
+ground.  The mound was of an oblong form, enclosed by a wall, and the
+building, which differed little from the ordinary dwelling-houses of the
+people, was of the same shape.  On approaching this temple the people
+seated themselves on the grass, about fifty yards off, when three
+venerable-looking priests appeared and addressed the strangers, with
+whom, as soon as their speech was finished, they came and sat down, when
+some presents were made to them.  After this, Attago signified that the
+strangers were welcome to examine the temple.  In the interior were some
+images, but when Cook inquired if they were Etuas, or gods, Attago
+kicked them over without any ceremony, to show that he did not look upon
+them with reverence.  Neither Omai nor Oedidee understood the language
+spoken by the natives of Tonga, consequently it was difficult to
+ascertain the exact object of the building.
+
+It appears extraordinary to us at the present day, and it is painful to
+narrate, that Captain Cook should have conceived it right, as he said he
+did, to make an offering at the altar.  He and his companions,
+therefore, laid down some blue pebbles, coins, nails, and other
+articles, as presents to the gods of these poor heathens.  Unhappily,
+this proceeding was in accordance with the customs of our countrymen,
+and even of the English Government in India, who, to a much later
+period, furnished a money grant to the temple of Juggernaut (one of the
+principal gods of the Hindoos), and it was only in comparatively modern
+times that this disgraceful grant was discontinued.  In the present
+instance, however, it did not appear that these offerings were looked
+upon as particularly sacred, as the chief, Attago, took them up, and
+placing them in the folds of his dress, appropriated them to himself.
+
+The green in which this temple stood was at the junction of several
+roads, two or three of which were very much frequented.  The high road
+along which the chief led the strangers was perfectly level, and sixteen
+feet broad; many others led into it, and all were enclosed on each side
+with neat fences made of reeds, and shaded from the scorching sun by
+fruit trees.  Not an inch of ground was waste; the roads occupied no
+more space than was necessary, while the fences did not take up above
+four inches on each side, and even this was not wholly lost, for many of
+them were composed of useful trees or shrubs.  Numbers of people were
+met, some travelling down to the ships with their burdens of fruits and
+other articles for barter.  All courteously got out of the road, sitting
+down or standing with their backs to the fences as their visitors
+passed.
+
+At most of the cross roads the temples just described were seen standing
+on mounds, but were surrounded by palisades instead of stone walls.
+After walking several miles a larger temple than usual was reached, and
+near it was a house, at which the party stopped, and were treated with
+fruit and other provisions, while an old priest made a long speech.
+These temples at the cross roads remind us of the shrines set up to
+legendary saints in Roman Catholic countries.
+
+The party returned on board with Attago, and while at dinner they
+received a visit from an old chief of superior rank, in whose presence
+the former would not sit down or eat.  As soon, however, as the old man
+was gone, Attago took his place, finished his dinner, and drank two
+glasses of wine.
+
+Here, as at most places, the natives of inferior rank showed a
+disposition to thieve.  Poor Mr Wales was found seated on the shore,
+unable to move, for having, when landing, in order to wade to the shore,
+taken off his shoes and stockings, a native had run off with them, and
+it was impossible for him to follow over the sharp coral rocks.  Attago,
+however, soon discovered the thief, and had the stolen garments
+returned.  On two or three other occasions the boats were pillaged, and
+a man, having run off with a seaman's jacket, though hotly pursued and
+fired at, would not abandon his prize till intercepted by some of the
+English on shore.  A native also got into the master's cabin, and had
+stolen some articles, when, as he was leaping through the port into his
+canoe to escape, he was discovered.  He was pursued by one of the boats,
+when, taking to the water, he dived under her several times, just as the
+men thought they were about to catch hold of him.  Finally, he contrived
+to unship the rudder, and thus rendering the boat unmanageable, made his
+escape.
+
+Just as the explorers were about to sail, it was discovered that there
+was a much greater person in the island than any one they had yet seen.
+Mr Pickersgill, who had met him, said that the people paid him
+extraordinary respect; that some, when they approached him, fell on
+their faces, and put their heads between their feet, and that no one
+presumed to pass him without permission.  When, however, Captain Cook
+saw the monarch, he took him for an idiot, from his stolid or sullen
+manner.  On being spoken to, he neither answered nor altered a feature
+of his countenance, and even when a shirt was put on him, and other
+articles were placed by his side, he neither lifted an arm of his own
+accord, nor put out his hand to receive them.  Probably, however, this
+manner was assumed, as adding, in his opinion, to his dignity, as he was
+afterwards caught laughing at something Attago said to him.
+
+During the whole time of their stay at this island, Attago had proved
+himself of great use to Captain Cook and his companions.  He had
+presented himself on board the captain's ship every morning, and did not
+quit his side till dark.  On the departure of the ships he earnestly
+pressed the captain to return, and to bring cloth and axes, promising
+hogs, fowls, fruit, and roots in abundance.  He asked also, for himself,
+a uniform similar to that worn by the captain.  Among other presents
+made by Cook to this friendly chief were two dogs, as there were none at
+that time in the island; indeed, pigs appear to have been the only
+four-footed animals in the possession of the inhabitants, although they
+knew of the existence of dogs.  Besides fowls, there were pigeons,
+doves, parrots, and other birds.  The whole island was thoroughly
+cultivated, and produced bread-fruit, cocoanut trees, plantains,
+bananas, shaddocks, yams, and other roots, the sugar-cane, and a fruit
+like a nectarine.  The roads also were so well laid out that there was
+an easy communication from one part of the island to the other in every
+direction.  There were no towns or villages, but most of the houses
+stood in the midst of plantations.  They were neatly constructed, but
+not much superior to those of the Society Islands.  The floor, however,
+was slightly raised, and covered with thick mats; the same sort of
+matting serving to enclose them on the weather side, while on the
+opposite they were left open.
+
+The ingenuity of this people was more especially exhibited in the
+construction of their canoes, which were superior to any that had been
+seen in the Pacific, though their tools were made of stone, bone, or
+shells, like those of the other islanders.  The canoes are built of
+several pieces, sewed together in so neat a manner that on the outside
+no join could be seen.  They were of two kinds, double and single.  The
+single were from twenty to thirty feet long, and twenty-two inches broad
+in the middle, with wedge-shaped heads and sterns, and decked over at
+both ends, leaving only a third part open.  They had outriggers, and
+some few carried sails, but were generally impelled by short paddles,
+the blades of which were broadest in the middle.  The double canoes were
+composed of two vessels, each from sixty to seventy feet long, and four
+or five broad in the middle, and sharp at each end.  They were fastened
+together by strong beams placed across their gunwales, which were raised
+for that purpose, and they were kept about seven feet apart.  A platform
+of boards was placed on these beams, and served as a deck.  They were
+very strongly built, and as the canoes themselves were also decked over,
+they might be immersed to the very platform without sinking.  On the
+platform was a hut, serving as a cabin for the crew, and there was a
+hatchway through the platform into the hulls by which the water was
+baled out.  The canoes also carried, as a movable fire-hearth, a square,
+shallow trough of wood, filled with stones.  They were rigged with one
+mast, which could be easily lowered, and had a lateen sail of matting,
+stretched on a long, slightly-bent yard, which could be quickly shifted
+round when beating to windward.  These vessels were capable of making
+long voyages, and the Tonga islanders were in the habit of going to
+Fejee, where they built canoes for the natives, and had probably
+extended their voyages to the Navigators' Group, and possibly to New
+Zealand itself.  Indeed, when these vessels are seen, there is no
+difficulty in understanding the means by which so large a number of the
+islands of the Pacific have been peopled by the same race, some
+retaining a portion of the civilisation their ancestors possessed,
+others losing it altogether.
+
+The natives of Tonga were slightly tattooed, and their natural
+complexion was of a light copper colour.  The size of both men and women
+was that of ordinary Europeans.  The dress of both sexes consisted of a
+piece of cloth or matting, wrapped round the waist and hanging below the
+knees, while their shoulders and arms were uncovered, and usually
+anointed.  They wore their hair short, and had ornaments in the form of
+necklaces, bracelets, and finger-rings, made of bone, shells, or
+mother-of-pearl.  Their cloth was of the same material as that of
+Otaheite, but coarser and more durable, because glazed so as to resist
+the rain.  They used vegetable dyes of various colours--brown, purple,
+yellow, red, and black.  Their baskets, made of the same material as
+their mats, were very beautiful.  They had different kinds of musical
+instruments: one of these was a sort of flute, which was made resonant
+by the breath of the nostril; another was similar to Pandean pipes, and
+composed of reeds; and a third was a drum made out of a heavy log.
+Their mode of saluting was like that of the New Zealanders, by rubbing
+noses together; and when anything was presented to them, they put it on
+their heads as a sign of its being accepted.
+
+The government of the country was vested in a great chief or king,
+called the Areeke; and there were other chiefs under him, as governors
+of districts.  It seemed pretty evident to the voyagers that the land of
+the island was apportioned among certain dignitaries, for whom the rest
+of the community worked, either as free labourers or slaves.  When
+purchases were made by the English, although the collected goods were
+brought to market by a number of natives, one person uniformly received
+payment, and no bargain was struck without his consent.
+
+Captain Cook was unable to obtain information respecting the religion of
+the people, excepting that he saw their temples and tombs in his
+excursions through the island.  It was observed, however, that nearly
+all the adults had lost the little finger of one hand, some of both
+hands, and it was conjectured that the amputation was made at the death
+of parents or other relations.  The people also burnt incisions in their
+cheeks, near the cheek-bone, probably also as a sign of mourning for the
+dead.
+
+The expedition sailed from Tongatabu on October 7, Captain Cook's last
+act being to send off by a canoe, to his friend Attago, some wheat,
+peas, and beans, which he had neglected to give him with other seeds.  A
+course was then shaped for Queen Charlotte's Sound, in New Zealand,
+there to take in wood and water; the commander intending afterwards to
+continue his discoveries to the south and east.  The next day the lofty
+island of Pilstart was seen.  It lies thirty-two leagues south by west
+from the south end of Eua.  On the 21st the north end of New Zealand was
+made, and the ships ran down the east coast for the purpose of
+communicating with the natives, Captain Cook being very anxious to give
+them seeds and animals with which to stock the country.  He had,
+however, no opportunity of doing this till he reached Cape Kidnappers,
+when a canoe came off with two men, who, by their dress and behaviour,
+appeared to be chiefs.  To the principal of these, pigs, fowls, seeds,
+and roots were given, and a promise exacted that he would not kill the
+animals.  He seemed more delighted with a long spike-nail which was
+offered him than with the animals.  It was evident that the people on
+the coast had not forgotten what occurred on the previous voyage, as the
+first words they uttered on coming on board were, "We are afraid of the
+guns;" yet they seemed to understand that if they behaved properly they
+would be well treated.
+
+Soon after this a heavy gale sprang up, which lasted several days.
+During its continuance the Adventure was separated from the Resolution,
+and no more was seen or heard of her during the remainder of the voyage.
+The stormy weather continued for some time, and the Resolution had all
+her sails split before she at length came to an anchor in an inlet
+discovered on the east side of Cape Teerawhitte.  While she lay at
+anchor, some natives came off who were tempted on board with the offer
+of nails, which they highly valued.  To one of the men two cocks and two
+hens were given, but it was feared from his manner, on receiving the
+present, that he would not take proper care of them.
+
+The next day, the gale having abated, the Resolution proceeded to Ship
+Cove, in Queen Charlotte's Sound.  Here the sails were unbent to be
+repaired, and tents were set up on shore.  It was now discovered that
+the bread, which was in casks, was greatly damaged.  It was therefore
+examined, the copper oven was set up, and the better portions re-baked.
+The natives at once visited the ship, several of whom Captain Cook
+remembered, especially an old man, Goubiah by name.  Some of them
+appropriated whatever they could find on shore unguarded, and, among
+other things, a seaman's bag of clothes.  These were, however, recovered
+by the captain, who made, he says, a "friendly application for them," a
+mode of proceeding which, with a due exhibition of power, might possibly
+have succeeded on other occasions under similar circumstances.  The
+youngest of the two sows which Captain Furneaux had put on shore in
+Cannibal Cove was seen with these people, but lame of a leg and very
+tame.  It was said that the other had been killed, but this was
+afterwards found not to be the case.  The people proved to be adepts in
+thieving, and one chief, pretending to keep his countrymen at a proper
+distance, with furious actions, was discovered putting a handkerchief
+into his bosom which he had just picked out of Captain Cook's pocket.  A
+fresh party, after bartering fish for cloth very fairly, stole six small
+water-casks, and then made off in a fright, leaving a boar, which had
+been given them, and some of their own dogs.  It is pleasant to have to
+describe the persevering endeavours of Captain Cook to stock the country
+with animals likely to prove useful to the inhabitants, little thinking
+how largely his own countrymen would benefit by his labours, and that,
+before a century would have passed by, vast flocks of sheep, and horned
+cattle, and horses would be feeding on the widely extended pastures of
+those fertile islands.
+
+Before sailing, when at length one day his visitors had left him, he
+took on shore three sows and a boar, two cocks and two hens, carrying
+them some little way into the woods, where they were left with a supply
+of food to last them for ten or twelve days.  The food was left that the
+animals might remain in the woods, and not roam down to the shore, where
+they might be discovered by the natives.  Some cocks and hens were also
+left in Ship Cove, but as the natives occasionally went there, there was
+a risk of the birds falling into their hands.  Two more goats were
+landed, but the he-goat was seized with a sort of fit, and was supposed
+to have rushed into the sea and been drowned, as his mate, who followed
+him when he started off on his mad career, came back without him.  The
+vegetables which had been planted on the former visit had thriven, and
+most of the potatoes had been dug up.
+
+All the time of the ship's stay a friendly intercourse was kept up with
+the natives.  The best way of securing peace with savages, Captain Cook
+observes, is by first convincing them of your superiority, and then by
+being always on your guard.  A regard for their own safety will then
+prevent them from being unanimous in forming any plan to attack you,
+while strict honesty and kindly treatment will gain their friendship.
+These principles mainly guided the great navigator in his intercourse
+with the savages he visited, and it was owing to this that he was so
+long able to pursue his useful discoveries.
+
+He had ample evidence on this occasion of the savage character of the
+people by whom he was surrounded.  A party of them had gone away on a
+war expedition, and returned with the body of a youth whom they had
+killed.  Most of the body had been eaten, when one of the officers
+brought the head and a portion of the flesh on board.  This latter was
+boiled and eaten by one of the natives with avidity, in the presence of
+Captain Cook and most of the officers and ship's company.  This horrid
+proceeding had such an effect on some of the men, as well as on the
+captain, as to make them sick.  [Note 2.]  It had a still greater effect
+on the native of Otaheite, Oedidee.  He at first became perfectly
+motionless, and looked the personification of horror.  When aroused from
+this state he burst into tears, and continued to weep and scold by
+turns, telling the New Zealanders that they were vile men, and that he
+would no longer be their friend.  He would not suffer them to touch him.
+He used the same language to one of the crew who tasted the flesh, and
+refused to accept or to touch the knife with which it had been cut.  It
+would be difficult to paint more perfectly than Captain Cook has done,
+in the above description, the natural horror felt by human beings when
+first becoming aware of the existence of cannibalism.  It must be
+remembered that the people of Otaheite and those of New Zealand
+evidently sprang from the same race; and it is remarkable that the
+latter should have become addicted to such an abominable practice, while
+the former viewed it with unmitigated horror.  Captain Cook says that he
+did not suppose the New Zealanders to have commenced the practice for
+want of food, as their coasts supplied a vast quantity of fish and
+wild-fowl, and they had also numerous dogs which they ate.  They had
+also some vegetables and many land birds.  He was not aware that at the
+distance of a few days' sail there was a race of men equal, if not
+superior, in intelligence to the New Zealanders, still more addicted to
+the horrible practice, the accounts of which, thoroughly authenticated
+as they are, make the heart sicken at the thought of the depths of
+depravity to which human nature can sink.
+
+In vain the Adventure was looked-for.  The unanimous opinion was that
+she was not stranded, nor likely to be in any neighbouring harbour; and
+as no actual rendezvous had been appointed, all hopes of seeing her
+again during the voyage were abandoned.  This, however, did not
+discourage Cook from pursuing his researches in the South Pacific, in
+which he intended to occupy the whole of the ensuing summer; while his
+officers and crew expressed themselves willing to accompany him even
+without their consort, wherever he might think fit to go.
+
+On the morning of November 26 the Resolution took her departure from
+Cape Palliser, and steered south, inclining to the east.  Heavy gales
+were soon met with, and on the morning of December 12, in latitude 62
+degrees 10 minutes South and longitude 172 degrees West, the first
+iceberg was seen, as also were many antarctic birds; while the explorers
+were greeted with a fresh gale and thick haze and snow, a great sea,
+rolling up from the north-west and south-west, at the same time showing
+that there was no continent in that direction, unless at a great
+distance.  Two days afterwards more large ice islands and loose ice were
+encountered; and with strong gales of wind, a heavy sea, dense
+snow-storms and fogs, surrounded by masses of floating ice, the ship
+pursued her course to the east.  Christmas Day was calm, and, with a
+hundred ice islands in sight, the ship was allowed to drift quietly on.
+Providentially, the weather was clear, with a light air, and as there
+was continued daylight she was prevented from falling aboard any of the
+masses of ice.  Had it been blowing, and as foggy as on the preceding
+days, a miracle alone could have saved her from being dashed to pieces.
+A full description of this part of the voyage would be tedious.
+Especially so must the reality have been to the voyagers; and before
+long all began to feel the effects of the bitter weather to which they
+were exposed.  Cook himself was dangerously ill, though he concealed his
+malady from the crew.
+
+On January 30, at four in the morning, the clouds over the horizon were
+perceived to be of an unusual snow-white brightness, denoting a wide
+extent of ice.  By eight the ship was close to its edge, when, from the
+mast-head, it was seen to extend to the brink of the southern horizon,
+as well as to the east and west; while ninety-seven ice mountains were
+counted rising out of it.  To penetrate this field was hopeless, and at
+length the captain, to the satisfaction of all on board, announced his
+intention of proceeding in search of the island of Juan Fernandez, said
+to have been discovered a century before, in latitude 38 degrees, and
+failing to find it, to look for Easter Island, or Davis Land, which had
+been unsuccessfully sought for by Byron, Carteret, and Bougainville.
+After this he purposed getting within the tropic, and had thoughts of
+running as far west as the Tierra Austral del Spiritu Santo of Quiros.
+In vain the island of Juan Fernandez was looked-for in the latitude in
+which it was supposed to lie, and the conclusion arrived at was, that
+though such an island might be in existence, it could occupy but a small
+space in the ocean.
+
+The captain was now again taken ill of what he calls a bilious colic,
+which was so severe as to confine him to his bed, the charge of the ship
+devolving on Mr Cooper.  Mr Patten, the surgeon, proved not only a
+skilful physician, but an affectionate friend.  A favourite dog
+belonging to Mr Forster fell a sacrifice, it being killed and made into
+soup for the captain, there being no other fresh meat in the ship.  A
+few fish were afterwards caught, which were very acceptable to him.
+
+Early on the morning of March 11, 1774, land was seen about twelve
+leagues distant, which, to the joy of all on board, ultimately proved to
+be the long-sought-for Easter Island.  On getting near the coast, off a
+sandy beach, two men in a canoe came off, and after sending up, by a
+rope, a bunch of plantains, they returned to shore.  This showed the
+good disposition of the islanders, and gave the voyagers hopes of
+obtaining refreshments.  A better anchorage than this part of the coast
+afforded having been found, the ship brought up here.  On the English
+landing, a few potatoes, plantains, and sugar-canes were brought to
+them; but the natives were such expert thieves that those on board could
+scarcely keep their hats on their heads or anything in their pockets.  A
+supply of potatoes was obtained; indeed, this appeared to be the chief
+production of the island.  The natives had been digging them up as fast
+as they could from a field close to the landing-place, till a person
+arrived who appeared to be the rightful owner, and who drove all the
+rest away.
+
+As Captain Cook was unable to walk any distance, he sent Lieutenants
+Pickersgill and Edgecombe, with a party of men armed, to explore the
+country.  They were at first pressed on by a crowd of the natives, till
+a man appeared, tattooed and painted, who drove them away, and then,
+hoisting a piece of white cloth on a spear, marched forward at the head
+of the party.  A considerable portion of the island was barren and
+stony, but in other parts were plantations of potatoes, plantains, and
+sugar-canes.  Water was very scarce, and hardly drinkable.  Some huts
+were found, the owners of which came out with roasted potatoes and
+sugar-canes, and as the party marched in single file on account of the
+narrow path, gave some to each man as he passed by.  They distributed
+water in the same manner.  On the east side, near the sea, three ruinous
+platforms of stone were met with, on each of which had stood four large
+statues; but most of them had fallen down and been broken.  Mr Wales
+measured an entire one, and found it to be fifteen feet in length and
+six feet across the shoulders.  On the head of each statue was a large
+cylinder of a red-coloured stone.  One of these cylinders, which was
+measured, was fifty-two inches high, and sixty-six in diameter.  There
+were others, however, very much larger.  Some of them were perfectly
+round, others had a cavity worked out, in the upper edge, for a quarter
+of the way round.
+
+The opposite side of the island to this, to which their guide conducted
+them, was full of these gigantic statues, some placed in groups, on
+masonry, others single, fixed only in the earth.  The latter were much
+larger than the others.  One which had fallen down was twenty-seven feet
+high and eight feet across the shoulders; and yet this was much shorter
+than one they found standing--its shade being sufficient to shelter
+their party of nearly thirty persons from the rays of the sun at about
+two o'clock.  Near this place was a hill, from which a view of the whole
+island was obtained.  Not a creek large enough even for a boat was seen,
+nor any indication of fresh water.  In a small hollow on the highest
+part of the island several cylinders were found, and Mr Wales was of
+opinion that the quarry had been at that spot, and that after the
+cylinders had been formed they were rolled down the hill.  There must
+have been great difficulty in raising them to the heads of the statues.
+It was conjectured that this was done by raising a mound round each
+statue and rolling up the stone on it, the mound being afterwards
+removed.  It must have required a considerable amount of mechanical
+knowledge to bring the statues from the quarry, and to place them
+upright.  The natives knew nothing whatever as to the origin of the
+statues, nor did they look on them with any respect, nor, indeed, seem
+interested in any way in them.  No quadrupeds were seen on the island,
+but few birds, and only two sorts of low shrubs.
+
+The party were greatly inconvenienced in their walk by the attempts of
+the natives to steal from them, and at length one man, who ran off with
+a bagful of provisions, was fired upon with small shot and wounded
+slightly.  He dropped the bag, and seemed in no way offended at the
+treatment he received.  The people carried short clubs and also spears
+with flint heads.  The dress of the chiefs consisted of two pieces of
+cloth, one round the waist and the other thrown over the shoulders; but
+many were almost naked.  The men wore their hair and beards short, with
+a fillet ornamented with feathers round the head; while the women wore
+the hair long, and had straw caps, shaped like a Scotch bonnet, on their
+heads.  Their habitations were low huts, built with sticks bent
+overhead, and joined together so as to form an arch.  The longest seen
+was sixty feet long, and only four or five wide.  Their canoes were very
+poor, owing to the want of materials, and very few were seen.  Captain
+Cook considered that there were about six or seven hundred inhabitants
+on the island.  In colour, features, and language they were similar to
+the inhabitants of the islands to the west, so that it was evident they
+had sprung from the same race.
+
+The Resolution left Easter Island on March 16, and stood
+north-west-by-north, and north-north-west, for the Marquesas, with a
+fine easterly gale.  Having reached the latitude of the group, the
+course was changed to west.  On April 5 first one island and then others
+in succession were seen; and the explorers were satisfied that they had
+reached the Marquesas, discovered by the Spaniards in 1595.  The first
+island seen was called Hood's Island, after the midshipman who
+discovered it, and the others were Saint Pedro, Dominica, and Saint
+Christina.  The ship, after being nearly driven on the rocks, brought up
+in port in the last-mentioned island.  Directly afterwards, thirty or
+forty natives came off in ten or twelve canoes, in the bow of each of
+which a heap of stones was observed, while all the men had slings
+fastened to their hands.  It required some address to get them
+alongside, but at last a hatchet and some spike-nails induced the people
+in one canoe to venture under the quarter-galley.  The rest then
+followed, exchanging bread-fruit and fish for small nails.  At sunset
+they all returned to the shore.  The next morning the natives returned
+in greater numbers, with plantains, bread-fruit, and a pig, but soon
+showed themselves ready to cheat, and to be expert thieves.  Captain
+Cook was going into the boat to look for a convenient place to moor the
+ship, when, seeing too many natives on board, he warned one of the
+officers on deck, saying that something would be stolen.  Just then he
+was told that an iron stanchion had been carried off from the opposite
+gangway.  He therefore ordered the officer to fire over the canoe till
+he could get round in the boat, but to be careful not to kill any one.
+But the noise made by the natives prevented this last warning from being
+heard, and at the third shot the unhappy thief was killed.  Two other
+natives who were in the canoe leaped overboard, but soon got in again,
+and threw away the stanchion.  One of them sat baling the blood and
+water out of the canoe, uttering a kind of hysteric laugh, while the
+other, a youth of fifteen, looked at the dead body with a serious and
+dejected countenance.  The latter was found to be the son of the man who
+had been killed.  Immediately on this, the natives took to flight, but
+on being followed by the captain into the bay the people in one canoe
+were persuaded to come alongside the boat, and to receive some nails.
+This restored their confidence in some degree, but soon afterwards they
+attempted to carry off the buoy of the kedge anchor.  A musket-shot on
+this was fired at them, but it fell short, and they took no notice of
+it; but a second bullet passing over them, they immediately let go the
+buoy and made for the shore.
+
+The natives undoubtedly were bold fellows, for, notwithstanding the
+effects of the firearms which they had witnessed, before long some more
+ventured off.  One of them appeared to be a person of consequence.  His
+dress was similar to that of the chiefs of Otaheite.  Bound his head was
+a fillet with the tail feathers of birds fixed in it, and standing
+upright.  He also wore ornaments of feathers round his legs and arms.
+The women wore a petticoat of native cloth, and a broad fillet made of
+the fibre of the cocoanut husk, with a piece of mother-of-pearl shell
+the size of a tea-saucer in front.  On either side were other ornaments
+of tortoiseshell and mother-of-pearl, with feathers in the upper part.
+The chief brought a pig, and was persuaded to come up to the side, but
+soon went away.
+
+The party from the Resolution who went on shore were received with
+courtesy by the natives; the captain was disappointed in not obtaining
+the number of pigs he had expected.  Some of the young officers, it
+seemed, gave away thoughtlessly several articles which the natives
+valued more than the nails, and thus spoilt the trade.  Among those
+highly coveted objects were some of the red feathers obtained at Tonga.
+
+The productions of the Marquesas Islands were similar to those of
+Otaheite; the habitations were of a like character, but not so well
+built, and the habits of the people were not so cleanly.  The people
+were considered the handsomest that had been met with during the whole
+voyage.  The men were generally tattooed, but the women and children,
+who were not so, were thought to be as fair as many Europeans.  Hogs
+were the only quadrupeds, and cocks and hens the only tame fowls seen,
+and these were not procured in any great number.  Notwithstanding the
+length of time the crew had been at sea previous to their arrival at the
+Marquesas, yet, owing to the abundant supply of anti-scorbutic food, and
+the watchful care of the surgeon, there was not a man seriously ill on
+board.  Captain Cook therefore determined to proceed on his voyage
+without further delay.
+
+The Resolution therefore left the Marquesas on April 12, 1774; and ten
+days afterwards she reached Otaheite, and anchored once more in Matavai
+Bay.  In the course of this passage several low coral islands or islets
+had been passed, and one of them had been visited.  This was the Island
+of Tioakea, first of all discovered by Captain Byron, and formed one of
+a group, called Saint George's Islands.  After passing these, the
+Resolution had fallen in with four other smaller islands, not set down
+in any chart; and these Captain Cook had named Palliser's Isles, in
+honour of his particular friend, Sir Hugh Palliser.
+
+Captain Cook's object in visiting Matavai Bay was that Mr Wales, the
+astronomer, might correct the chronometers of the ship by a known
+longitude.  The first thing done, therefore, was to erect tents, and to
+land the instruments required in this operation.
+
+As soon as the arrival of the voyagers was known, many of their old
+friends paid them a visit, expressing great joy at seeing them.  Among
+others came Otoo, the king, with several chiefs, and a train of
+attendants, who brought with them a dozen large hogs and a quantity of
+fruit, which made them very welcome.  A supply of red parrots' feathers
+having been collected at Tonga, these were shown to the natives, and
+took their fancy to such a degree that the principal people of both
+sexes brought hogs, fruit, and everything the island afforded, in order
+to obtain them.  So exhausted was his stock-in-trade that, had it not
+been for these feathers, Cook says he should have found it difficult to
+supply his ship with the necessary refreshments.  He had intended
+remaining here only long enough to allow Mr Wales to take the
+observations he desired, but he found so great an improvement in the
+state of the country, and provisions so abundant, that he resolved at
+once to repair and refit his ship.
+
+When Captain Cook on one occasion went to Opparree to pay King Otoo a
+visit, a formidable fleet of three hundred double war canoes was found
+drawn up along the beach, while a number of armed men were seen on the
+shore.  What could be the object of this armament it was difficult to
+conjecture.  The Englishmen, however, on landing, were received with
+great courtesy; but Otoo was not to be found, and, greatly disappointed,
+they returned on board.  At length they were told that this fleet was
+part of an armament intended to be sent against Eimeo, whose chief had
+declared himself independent of Otaheite.
+
+The chief next in consequence to Otoo was Towha, who seemed to be a very
+sensible man, and most friendly to the English.  He showed it on a
+trying occasion.  A native had been caught stealing a water-cask, and
+having been kept in irons on board, was returned on shore to be flogged.
+Otoo, his sister, and others, begged that the man might be set at
+liberty; but Cook explained that as he flogged any of his people who
+stole from them, or behaved ill in any way, so in justice, and to
+preserve peace between them, he must punish any natives who behaved ill
+to him.  The sentence was carried out, the natives looking on.  On the
+culprit being set at liberty, the people were going away, when Towha
+called them back and addressed them, recapitulating what had been said
+to Otoo, condemning their present bad habits, and advising a reformation
+in future.  The gracefulness of action and the attention with which he
+was heard showed that he was no mean orator.  After this the marines
+went through their exercises and loaded and fired in volleys, to the
+utter amazement of the natives, especially to those who had seen nothing
+of the kind before.
+
+The next morning a small portion of the fleet of war canoes was observed
+exercising, and Mr Hodges had the opportunity of sketching them.  The
+largest had about thirty rowers, the smaller only eighteen.  The
+warriors stood on the stage, and encouraged the rowers, or paddlers
+rather, to exert themselves.  Some youths were seated high up on the
+carved stem above the steersman, with white wands in their hands,
+apparently to look out and give notice of what they saw.  The warriors
+were completely equipped for war, and the quantity and weight of cloth
+they had on them made it difficult to conceive how they could stand up
+under it when fighting.  A large quantity was wrapped round their heads
+as turbans of helmets, to guard them from the blows of their enemies.
+The turbans of some of the warriors were surmounted by small bunches of
+shrubs covered with white feathers, intended as ornaments.  On returning
+to the shore all the rowers leaped out the moment the canoe touched the
+ground, and, with the assistance of those on shore, hauled it up on the
+beach.  Each man then walked off with his paddle, and so rapidly was
+everything done, that in less than five minutes there was no sign of the
+canoes having been lately afloat.  Afterwards, at the dockyard of King
+Otoo, among many large canoes, two were seen in the course of building a
+hundred and eight feet long.  They were to be united so as to form one
+double canoe; the largest, Cook says, he had seen in those seas.
+
+On another occasion an example was given of the way the warriors, in
+attacking a place, are thrown on shore.  Four or more canoes were lashed
+side by side, and then each division paddled in so judiciously that they
+formed one unbroken line along the shore.  To do this they were directed
+by a man who stood in the fore part of the centre vessel, with a long
+wand in his hand, directing all their movements.  The fleet was attended
+by some small double canoes, called marias.  On the fore part of each
+was a sort of bed place with one division, capable of holding the body
+of a man, intended for the reception of any chief who might be killed in
+battle.  Cook estimated, from the number of canoes he saw furnished by
+each district, that the whole island could raise and equip one thousand
+seven hundred and twenty war canoes, requiring sixty-eight thousand men,
+calculating forty for each canoe.  As these would not amount to a third
+of the number of people in the island, he considered that it could not
+contain less than two hundred and four thousand inhabitants.  He was
+convinced, from the vast swarms of people he met wherever he went, that
+this estimate was not too great.  This is possible; but war, disease,
+and vicious habits had fearfully decreased the population before
+Christianity was established among them.
+
+Otoo and his chiefs at first appeared very anxious that Captain Cook
+should accompany them in their proposed expedition, and they begged him
+to help them against their enemies.  This he very properly declined
+doing, but would have been glad to have accompanied them to witness the
+mode in which they carried on their naval operations.  It would have
+been more in accordance with the character of a Christian people had the
+English tried to reconcile the contending parties, and to prove to them
+the advantages and blessings of peace.  But such a thought does not
+appear to have entered the mind of the sagacious navigator, or of his
+companions.
+
+Cook's endeavours to benefit the islanders in other respects appeared
+likely to be successful.  Two goats had been left by Captain Furneaux.
+They had had two kids, now nearly full grown, and the mother was also
+again with kid.  The animals were in excellent condition, and the people
+seemed very fond of them.  One of two sheep had, however, died, but
+twenty cats were given to the natives, though it is difficult to
+understand how they were likely to prove useful, unless mice had
+threatened to overrun the island.
+
+During this visit a man from a distant part of the island made off with
+a musket and effected his escape.  The dread of the consequences to
+themselves caused Otoo and several other chiefs to run away and hide
+themselves, and the people were afraid to bring down provisions to the
+ship.  After a considerable amount of negotiations, and the delay of
+nine days, the musket and some other articles which had been stolen
+were, by the intervention of the chiefs, brought back to the tents, and
+confidence was restored.
+
+Preparations were now made for leaving Otaheite.  On May 11 a large
+supply of fruit arrived from all parts, some of it sent by Towha, the
+admiral of the fleet, with orders to his servants to receive nothing in
+return.  However, the captain thought fit to send an equivalent present
+by Oedidee.  That young native had come to the resolution of remaining
+at Otaheite, but was persuaded to go on in the ship to Ulietea, his
+native island.  Nothing but Captain Cook's warning that it was very
+probable he would be unable to return to the Pacific would have induced
+him to leave the ship, so great was his affection for the English, and
+his desire to visit their country.
+
+On the 12th old Oberea, who had been supposed by Captain Wallis to be
+the queen of the island, came on board, and brought a present of pigs
+and fruit, and soon afterwards Otoo appeared with a retinue and a large
+quantity of provisions.  Handsome presents were made in return, and the
+visitors were entertained in the evening with fireworks.  A succession
+of broadsides from the great guns on another occasion must have still
+more astonished the natives.
+
+Captain Cook waited in vain for the sailing of the fleet on the proposed
+warlike expedition.  It was evident that the chiefs considered, since
+they could not obtain the assistance of the English, that they should be
+more at liberty to act if left alone, and therefore, as long as the
+Resolution remained, they continued to make excuses for not setting out.
+Otoo's large canoe had been called, at Cook's request, the Britannia,
+and he had presented to the king a grappling-iron, a rope, and an
+English Jack and pendant for her.
+
+Several natives were anxious to accompany Captain Cook, but he firmly
+resisted all their solicitations, from motives of humanity, knowing the
+great probability that they would never return to their native land.  At
+length, on May 14, 1774, the anchor was hove up, and the ship proceeded
+out of the harbour, Otoo remaining in his canoe alongside till the ship
+was under sail.  At that juncture, all the boats being hoisted in, a
+gunner's mate, a good swimmer, slipped overboard, hoping to reach the
+shore and remain behind.  He was, however, seen before he got clear of
+the ship; a boat was lowered, and he was brought back.  He was an
+Irishman by birth, but he had been long-absent from home, and he was
+without any tie of kindred; Captain Cook says that he could not be
+surprised at his wish to remain where he could enjoy not only all the
+necessaries, but all the luxuries of life, in ease and plenty; and that
+had he asked permission to remain it might, perhaps, have been granted.
+He had formerly been in the Dutch service, and had come on board the
+Endeavour at Batavia during the former voyage.
+
+On the 15th the Resolution anchored in O'Wharre Harbour, in the island
+of Huaheine, and immediately old Oree, the chief, and several natives
+came on board, when the former presented a hog and some other articles
+with the usual forms.  A friendly intercourse was kept up with Oree the
+whole time of the visit, but several of the officers and men were robbed
+on shore.  There appeared to exist a gang of banditti who set their
+chief at defiance, and robbed every one they met.  Captain Cook,
+however, landed and quietly took possession of a house with two chiefs
+in it, who were kept as hostages till the articles were returned.  On
+another occasion, at the request of Oree, he, with a strong party of
+armed men, landed, and went in pursuit of the thieves; but Oedidee, who
+was with them, became alarmed, and warned the captain that they were
+being led into an ambush to be destroyed.  From the strict discipline,
+however, kept up by the party, this (even should the natives have
+intended treachery) was rendered impossible.  In spite of these
+drawbacks the people brought cocoanuts and other fruits, and two young
+chiefs presented to the captain a pig, a dog, and some young plantain
+trees, the usual peace offerings.  Notwithstanding this good feeling, he
+caused several volleys to be fired to show the natives the power and
+effect of musketry, for the young officers and others who went on shore
+shooting with muskets were so very inexpert in their use that they had
+brought firearms somewhat into contempt.
+
+On the 21st a fleet of sixty canoes was seen steering for Ulietea.  The
+people on board them were Eareeoies, going to visit their brethren in
+the neighbouring islands.  They formed a secret society, and seemed to
+have customs which they would not explain.  Infanticide appeared to be
+almost universal among them, and they had many other practices of a most
+abominable character.  Cava-drinking and acting plays seemed to be the
+principal amusements of the chiefs of this island.
+
+Early on the morning of the 23rd the ship put to sea.  The good old
+chief Oree was the last man who left her.  When told by the captain that
+he should see him no more, he wept, and said, "Let your sons come; we
+will treat them well."
+
+The next day, it having been calm all night, the Resolution reached
+Ulietea.  While warping into a secure berth, the captain's old friend,
+Oreo, with several other persons, came off, bringing presents.  On
+returning the visit, the captain and his companions were met at the door
+of the house by five old women, who had been cutting their heads with
+sharks' teeth, and now, while the blood was streaming down their faces,
+insisted on saluting their visitors.  Directly afterwards they went out,
+washed themselves, and returned, appearing as cheerful as any of the
+company.  A large number of people had collected on shore near the ship;
+they were said to be Eareeoies, and they continued feasting for several
+days.  There, as at the other islands, plays were acted for the
+amusement of the visitors.
+
+Ulietea was Oedidee's native island, and here he took leave of his
+English friends, whom he left "with a regret fully demonstrative of his
+esteem and affection; nor could anything have torn him from them but the
+fear of never returning."  The captain declares that he had not words to
+describe the anguish of this young man when he went away.  "He looked up
+at the ship, burst into tears, and then sank down into the canoe."
+
+This young South Sea Islander is described as "a youth of good parts,
+and of a docile, gentle, and humane disposition," and as one who would
+have been--physically at least--a better specimen of the people than
+Omai.  It is to be feared that he returned to his home, after his
+lengthened cruise with his English patrons, without having received any
+real benefit from the intercourse.  So far as can be learned, "no man
+had cared for his soul."
+
+After leaving Ulietea, the Resolution proceeded westward on her voyage,
+being cautiously navigated at night, and having all sails set in the
+daytime.  The first land seen was Howe Island, previously discovered by
+Captain Wallis; the next was an island before unknown, to which was
+given the name of Palmerston.
+
+On June 20 more land was in sight.  This proved to be an island about
+eleven leagues in circuit, and standing well out of the sea, having deep
+water close into its shores.  As this island was perceived to be
+inhabited, Captain Cook was induced to go on shore with a party of
+explorers, and endeavoured to open communication with the natives.  They
+were found, however, to be fierce and intractable, furiously attacking
+the visitors with stones and darts.  Two or three muskets discharged in
+the air did not hinder them from advancing still nearer, and one of them
+threw a long dart or spear which narrowly missed the captain, passing
+close over his shoulder.  The boldness and fury of this man nearly cost
+him his life, for, aroused by the instinct of self-preservation, and
+probably also by, momentary anger, Captain Cook raised a musket he
+carried, and pointing it at his assailant, who was only a few paces off,
+he pulled the trigger.  Happily, the weapon missed fire, and the English
+commander was spared the after-remorse of needless bloodshed, for the
+explorers, or the invaders and intruders, as the natives considered
+them, reached their boat, and afterwards their ship, unharmed.
+
+In consequence of the apparent disposition and the behaviour of the
+people, the island received from Cook the name of Savage Island, a name
+it still bears, although the inhabitants no longer merit the appellation
+of Savage Islanders.
+
+After leaving this island, the ship's course was west-south-west, and on
+June 25 a string of islands was seen ahead when the wind dropped.  The
+next morning more islands were seen and soundings found.  The islands in
+sight proved to be those of the Tonga group to which Cook had given the
+name of the Friendly Islands.  A canoe came boldly off, and the people
+in her pointed out Anamocka, or Rotterdam, towards which the ship
+proceeded, and anchored on the north side of the island.  The natives
+came off in their canoes in great numbers, and exchanged yams and
+shaddocks for nails and old rags; but, as usual, some began to pilfer,
+and one man got hold of the lead-line, which he would not relinquish
+till fired at.
+
+On the captain and some of the officers going on shore, they were
+received with great courtesy by the natives, who assisted in filling the
+water-casks and rolling them down to the beach, contented with a few
+nails as payment.  When, however, the surgeon was afterwards out
+shooting by himself, having been left on shore, a fellow seized his
+fowling-piece and made off with it.  Afterwards, when the watering party
+were on shore, Mr Gierke's gun was snatched from him, and several of
+the cooper's tools were carried off.  This style of proceeding, if
+allowed, would have hazarded the safety of all on board; the captain,
+therefore, who had been summoned, sent off for the marines, while two or
+three guns were fired from the ship to alarm Mr Forster, who was on
+shore.  Several of the natives remained, who acted with their usual
+courtesy, and long before the marines arrived Mr Clerke's gun was
+brought back.  As the other was not restored, two large double
+sailing-canoes were seized by the marines on their landing; and one man,
+making resistance, was fired at with small shot.  This showed the
+natives that the English were in earnest, and the musket was returned;
+but an adze had also been carried off, and it was insisted that this
+also should be brought back.  The chiefs thought that the captain wanted
+the man who had been wounded, and whom they said was dead.  Soon
+afterwards he was brought up, stretched out on a board, and apparently
+lifeless.  Captain Cook was very much shocked at first, till, examining
+the body, he found that the man was alive and only slightly hurt.  His
+wounds were dressed by the surgeon, who soon afterwards arrived, and a
+poultice of sugar-cane was applied to prevent inflammation.  A present
+recompensed to some extent what the poor man suffered.  No person of any
+consequence was seen by the voyagers while they remained here.  Several
+lofty islands were seen in the group--among them Amattagoa, whose summit
+was veiled in clouds, and was rightly supposed to be a volcano.  Many of
+the islands in the South Seas are volcanic, and in some of them the
+volcanoes are in full activity.  That of Kilanea, in the Sandwich
+Islands, often presents a spectacle of awful fury and grandeur.
+
+After leaving the Friendly Islands, and calling, on July 1, at Turtle
+Island, a brisk gale carried the ship on for some distance, till, on the
+15th, high land was seen to the south-west.  This was the _Australia del
+Espirito Santo_ of Quiros; it also went by the name of the great
+Cyclades.  After exploring the coast for some days, the captain came to
+an anchor in a harbour in the island of Mallicollo, where one of his
+objects was to open friendly communication with the natives.
+
+A number of these came off, some in canoes, others swimming.  They
+exchanged arrows tipped with bone for pieces of cloth, while two who
+ventured on deck received presents.  The next morning so many made their
+appearance, and with such increased confidence, that after a large
+number had boarded the ship it was found necessary to refuse admittance
+to others.  Upon this one of the repulsed natives threatened to shoot a
+boat-keeper in one of the boats.  In the confusion that ensued Captain
+Cook came on deck, when the savage turned his arrow toward him.  Upon
+this the captain, who had a gun in his hand loaded with small shot,
+fired at his assailant, who, being but slightly wounded, still kept his
+bow bent in a threatening attitude.  Receiving the contents of a second
+musket, however, he dropped his bow and paddled off with all speed.
+
+By this time others of the natives had begun to discharge their arrows;
+neither did a musket fired over their heads frighten them.  It was not
+till they heard the thunder of a four-pounder that they were seriously
+alarmed; then the natives on deck and in the cabin leaped overboard,
+and, with those in the canoes, made their escape as fast as they could.
+Directly after the gun was fired drums were heard beating on shore,
+probably to summon the people to arms.
+
+The next day the captain landed with a green branch in his hand, and was
+met by a chief who also carried one, and these being exchanged a
+friendly intercourse was established.  The English made signs that they
+wished to cut down wood, and permission was granted to them by the
+natives to do so.  These people, however, set no value on nails or
+anything their visitors possessed.  They seemed unwilling that any one
+should advance beyond the beach, and were only anxious to get rid of the
+strangers.  When the English left the shore the natives retired in
+different directions.  In the afternoon a man was seen to bring to the
+beach a buoy which had been taken in the night from the kedge anchor.
+On a boat being sent it was at once put on board, the man walking off
+without saying a word, and this was the only thing which was stolen
+while the ship lay there.  Some houses, similar to those of the Friendly
+Islands, were seen, with plantations of cocoanuts, plantains, yams, and
+bread-fruit, and a number of pigs were running about.
+
+Other parts of the shore were visited, but the people kept aloof; and
+not till the ship was under way did they come off, showing then every
+disposition to trade, and acting with scrupulous honesty.  Sometimes,
+for instance, they had received articles, and not having given anything
+in return, their canoes being shoved off by their companions, they used
+every exertion to get back to the ship.  They were the most ugly,
+ill-proportioned people the explorers had yet seen; dark-coloured and
+rather diminutive, with long heads, flat faces, and monkey-like
+countenances.  Their hair was black or brown, short and curly, but not
+so soft or woolly as that of a negro.  Their beards were strong, crisp,
+and bushy.  A belt round the middle curiously contracted that part of
+the body, while, with the exception of a wrapper between the legs, they
+went naked.  The women wore a petticoat, and a bag over their shoulders
+in which the children were carried; but none came near the ship.  A
+piece of white stone, an inch and a half long, with a slight curve in
+it, was worn in a hole made through the nose.  Their arms were clubs,
+spears, and bows and arrows.  Some of the officers were very nearly
+poisoned by eating portions of two reddish fish, the size of large
+bream, caught with hook and line.  They were seized with violent pains
+in the head and bones, attended by a scorching heat all over the body,
+and a numbness of the joints.  A pig and dog died from eating the
+remainder.  It was a week or ten days before the officers quite
+recovered.  The crews of Quiros had suffered in the same way.  He had
+named the fish Porgos.
+
+A number of islands were now passed, to which the names of Montagu,
+Sandwich, Hitchinbrook, and Shepherd were given; the ship continuing
+along the coast to the south-east.
+
+On August 3 the Resolution approached another island, and anchored about
+a mile from the shore, when several natives attempted to swim off to
+her, but a boat being lowered they returned.  The next morning the
+captain went off to the shore in search of wood and water, with presents
+which he distributed among some people who appeared on the rocks which
+line the coast.  In return, they offered, as he supposed with a friendly
+feeling, to drag the boat through the surf on shore; but he declined the
+offer, wishing to have a better place to land at.  This he found on a
+sandy beach, in a bay where he could land without wetting his feet.  To
+this spot crowds followed him, headed by a chief, who made them form a
+semicircle, while with only a green branch in his hand Cook stepped on
+shore.  The chief was loaded with presents, which he received
+courteously; and when, by signs, water and fruit were asked for, he
+immediately sent for some.  Still, as all the people were armed with
+clubs, spears, bows and arrows, the captain was suspicious of their
+intentions, and kept his eye on the chief.  Again signs were made by the
+natives that they would haul the boat up, and just then the chief
+disappeared among the crowd.  On this, Cook stepped back into the boat,
+making signs that he would soon return.  The islanders, however, had no
+intention of allowing him to depart, so while some of them laid hold of
+the gang-board, and attempted to drag up the boat on to the beach,
+others snatched at the oars, and tried to wrest them away from the
+sailors.  In this predicament, and seeing that neither expostulations
+nor menaces were of any avail, the captain raised his musket, pointed it
+at the chief, who had again made his appearance, and pulled the trigger;
+but, as on a former occasion, the piece missed fire, or only flashed in
+the pan.  The savages then began throwing stones and darts, and shooting
+their arrows.  The captain now felt compelled to order his men to fire.
+The first discharge threw the savages into confusion, but even a second
+was hardly sufficient to drive them off the beach, and they then retired
+behind trees and bushes, popping out every now and then to throw a dart.
+Four lay to all appearances dead; but two managed to crawl behind the
+bushes.  Happily, half the muskets missed fire, or more would have been
+wounded.  One of the boat's crew was badly wounded in the cheek by a
+dart, and an arrow shot from a distance struck Mr Gilbert.  The
+skirmish ended by the English making good their retreat.
+
+On the arrival of the party on board, the ship was got under way and
+stood closer in shore; and presently two of the natives appeared with
+two oars which had been lost in the scuffle.  In a fit of exasperation,
+probably on account of the treatment he had received, and of
+mortification at his partial defeat, Captain Cook ordered a round shot
+to be fired at the men, which, though it proved harmless, had the effect
+of driving the men away.  They left the oars, however, leaning against
+some bushes.
+
+The whole of this unhappy affair seems to have been a series of
+misunderstandings.  At least, it is not difficult to conceive that the
+natives were, at first, friendly disposed; that their offer to haul the
+boat upon the beach may have been dictated by kind motives, and that
+their subsequent conduct arose from what they might have conceived to be
+the suspicious actions of their strange and uninvited visitors.  As to
+their being armed, and declining to lay down their arms, it is to be
+remembered that the English had arms also, which they did not lay down.
+It certainly does not seem improbable that if the chief of these poor
+barbarians and the English captain could have interchanged a few words,
+intelligible on both sides, and so convinced each other of their honest
+intentions and wishes, the subsequent fracas might have been prevented;
+but this, of course, was out of the question.  It is to be feared, too,
+that the superiority over all uncivilised nations which the English
+voyagers proudly felt themselves to possess gave an air of contemptuous
+defiance to their actions which the natives might resent.  The firing of
+that last shot was not unlikely (together with the previous scuffle) to
+provoke feelings of deep enmity, and not only to rankle in the minds and
+memories of those present, but to be handed down by tradition to the
+next generation, and the next after that, so as to keep up both
+detestation of all white men, and dread of their future visits.
+
+These remarks are not uncalled for, nor will they be considered as
+without point when the name of the island is given--Erromanga; a name
+full of painful associations to all who take an interest in missionary
+enterprise, and in the advancement, by human instrumentality, of the
+kingdom of the Redeemer.  It was here that, sixty-six years afterwards,
+the valuable life of one of the foremost in the ranks of modern
+Christian missionaries, John Williams, was sacrificed to the hatred of
+the whites of which we have just spoken.  The proximate incentive to the
+murder was revenge for some ill-treatment the natives had shortly before
+received from a white man, a sandal-wood trader; but it is probable that
+the commencement of their strong dislike to strangers may be traced to
+the visit of the Resolution to their native island in 1774.
+
+After leaving Erromanga, the ship steered for another island, which
+proved to be Tanna, being directed at night by a great light which was
+seen at the east end of it, and which, in the morning, was discovered to
+be that of a volcano in full activity.  A harbour was found, and two
+boats, well armed, were sent in to sound.  Here the ship anchored.  A
+number of armed natives were seen on shore, and soon they began to come
+off, some swimming, others in canoes.  Some cocoanuts were thrown into
+one of the boats, and cloths and other articles were given in return.
+This induced more to venture alongside, when they proved themselves to
+be most daring thieves; some attempted to knock off the rings from the
+rudder, others tried to tear away the fly of the ensign, and a bold
+effort was made to run away with the buoys.  A musketoon fired over
+their heads had the effect of driving them off.  Even here there was an
+exception to the rule.  An old man continually came off to the ship with
+fruit, evidently trying to ingratiate himself with the strangers.
+Although a very strong party landed in the evening, it was clear to the
+voyagers that the natives would have attacked them, had they not, to
+avoid bloodshed, quickly embarked.  As it was necessary to take in a
+fresh supply of wood and water, the ship was warped in close to the
+shore, both to overawe the natives, and more easily to get on board what
+was wanted.  The natives again quickly manifested their thievish
+propensities.  For instance, a man came off with a club, with which he
+struck the ship's side in defiance, and then offered to exchange the
+weapon for beads.  No sooner, however, did he get them, than he made off
+without giving up the club.
+
+Captain Cook had wished for an opportunity of showing the natives the
+effect of firearms; some small shot were therefore sent after the thief,
+and several musketoons were discharged.  As this did not seem to produce
+the desired effect, the Resolution was moored with her broadside to the
+shore, with her guns placed so as to command the whole harbour.  The
+captain then landed, with a guard of marines and sailors, all well
+armed, hoping by this means to overawe the natives, who assembled in
+vast numbers on each side of the landing-place.  Instead of being
+frightened by the display of strength, they began to use such
+threatening gestures that it was thought necessary to file upon them.
+This was the signal for the guns to open from the ship.  The savages at
+once dispersed, but soon came back greatly humbled in manner.  The old
+man, whose name was Paowang, was the only one who stood his ground, and
+was rewarded with gifts.  Cook then drew a line on the ground, and
+signified to the natives that they must not pass it.
+
+The captain had now every reason to believe that the natives were
+induced to be submissive, and taking old Paowang into the forest, he
+explained that he wanted wood, and asked permission to cut some down.
+This was readily granted, the old man begging only that he would not cut
+down any cocoanut trees.
+
+The watering party meanwhile filled the casks; but still the lower
+orders were very troublesome.  Some buckshot, fired at a man, at last
+brought them to order, and now everything seemed to go on pleasantly.
+Paowang even brought an axe and several other articles which had been
+left on shore; indeed, Cook's demeanour seemed to have won the respect
+of the savages, and it was no longer necessary to mark a barrier line,
+as they did not press near the tents nor incommode the English when at
+work.  Yet, savages they were, for they acknowledged voluntarily that
+they were cannibals, and asked their visitors if they also did not eat
+the flesh of their enemies.  Yet they could have no excuse for the
+practice, as their island abounded with pigs, and fruit of all sorts.
+
+All this time the English were constantly on their guard; still they ran
+no little risk, as they made some excursions up the country, when they
+were threatened by parties of natives, who, however, retired when they
+turned towards the harbour.  It is manifest, however, that the natives
+were not badly disposed, but were influenced by the very natural feeling
+of jealousy at seeing strangers, whose object they could not comprehend,
+attempting to penetrate their country.  It would have been difficult to
+convince untutored savages, who had been peppered with buckshot, and
+fired at with bullets and cannon-balls, that their white visitors were
+influenced by the purest feelings of philanthropy, and a disinterested
+desire to do them good.  Fortunately, the muskets supplied to the
+Resolution must have been kept in very bad order, as they missed fire as
+often as they went off, or more lives of savages would have been
+sacrificed.  There is no doubt, as has already been intimated, that
+Captain Cook had no delight in exercising cruelty towards the natives of
+the places he visited, and believed that he acted in self-defence when
+he, as he would have said, was unfortunately called upon to wound and
+perhaps to slay them.  It may be added, also, that he frequently had
+great trouble in restraining the ardour of his officers, who were not
+troubled with so nice a conscience as the captain's regarding the lives
+of the savages.
+
+On one occasion, for instance, some native boys (little mischievous
+urchins, no doubt) who had got into a thicket near where a party were
+cutting wood, and had thrown stones, were fired at by some of the petty
+officers.  The captain was very much displeased at so wanton a use being
+made of firearms, and took measures, as he thought, to prevent it for
+the future; but not long afterwards, to his horror, he saw a sentry
+level his musket, and before he could cry out, the soldier had fired and
+shot a native dead.  The marine's only excuse was that he saw a native
+bending his bow, an act they often performed without intending to shoot.
+After all, the sentry did not kill the man who bent the bow, but
+another who was standing near.
+
+Among the excursions made by the officers was one towards the volcano,
+which, however, they could not reach.  It was in such furious eruption
+that the air was filled with dust and ashes, and when it rained they
+were covered with mud.  On their way they passed a spot emitting columns
+of smoke, and near the harbour hot springs were discovered; a
+thermometer placed in one of them rose to 170 degrees.
+
+Although the people of this island had no notion of the use of iron,
+they were not so savage as at first appeared; their plantations were
+carefully cultivated, and produced sugar-canes and yams, bread-fruit,
+plantains, and cocoanuts.  They had, however, one of the chief
+characteristics of savages--the women carried all the burdens, and were
+compelled to do every description of hard work.  Though dark, they had
+not the peculiarities of the negro race, but they made themselves darker
+than they were by painting their skins.  They differed in many respects
+from the inhabitants of the neighbouring islands, both in appearance and
+language.  Their dwellings were of some size, but had no walls, being
+merely roofs--looking like those of English barns taken off their walls
+and placed on the ground.  Their canoes were tolerably well constructed,
+but though their shores abounded with fish, they had no notion of
+catching them with nets or lines, the only way being to spear them as
+they swam by.
+
+------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+On the morning of August 20 the ship left Resolution Harbour, [so-called
+by Captain Cook, because the Resolution had anchored there,] in Tanna,
+and continued the survey along the coasts of this extensive group of
+islands.  A large number of natives were seen at the south-west side of
+Mallicollo, and on the opposite shore a brief communication was held
+with apparently another race of people, who came off in numerous small
+outrigger canoes.  Though gifts were handed to them, they could not be
+induced to come up the side, or even to take hold of a rope.
+
+The scenery of the coast in all directions was much admired; the
+vegetation was most luxuriant; every hill was chequered with
+plantations, and every valley was watered by a sparkling stream.  The
+survey of the group being at length completed, the Resolution stood away
+towards New Zealand.  The supposed continent of Quiros had dwindled into
+a small island, and, as Captain Cook took his departure from the
+south-west point in latitude 15 degrees 40 minutes, longitude 165
+degrees 59 minutes, he named it Cape Lisbourne.  The Resolution
+continued her course to the south-west, from September 1 till the 4th,
+when land was discovered bearing south-south-west, and extending round
+for some leagues.  Breakers were seen half-way between the ship and the
+shore, and inside them were several canoes, evidently coming off, but as
+night fell they returned.  The night was spent in standing off and on
+the land, and the next morning, the boats having discovered a channel
+through the reef, the ship stood in and came to anchor.  She was
+immediately surrounded by a number of natives, who came off in eighteen
+canoes.  They were entirely unarmed, and apparently well disposed.  Some
+presents were thrown to them, for which they offered two stale fish in
+return, and, confidence being established, numbers crowded on board.
+Some were asked into the cabin to dinner.  They showed, however, no
+curiosity to taste the pea-soup, salt beef, or pork, but ate some yams.
+
+Except a curious wrapper generally in use these people were entirely
+naked.  They seemed intelligent, and examined with considerable interest
+the goats, hogs, dogs, and cats on board, which, it was evident, they
+had never before seen.  They valued spike-nails and cloth of all
+colours, but red cloth they preferred.  A young chief was seen in one of
+the canoes, but did not come on board.  After dinner, Captain Cook,
+accompanied by a native, landed with two armed boats' crews.  The beach
+was thronged with people, and the native pointed out those to whom
+presents should be given, mostly old men; among them was the chief,
+Teabooma, who soon calling for silence addressed the people, apparently
+in favour of the strangers.  All the chiefs in succession made speeches,
+the old men giving a grunt and a nod of approbation at the end of each
+sentence.  The captain kept his eyes on the people all the time, and was
+completely convinced of their good intentions.  Having made signs that
+water was wanting, his native friend conducted them along the coast,
+lined with mangroves, to a creek, on going up which, above the
+mangroves, a straggling village appeared; the ground around being laid
+out in well cultivated plantations of sugar-canes, plantains, yams, and
+other roots, watered by rills conducted from the main stream, whose
+source was in the hills.  Here was an abundance of fresh water.  Among
+other things, some roots were seen baking in an earthen jar, holding
+from six to eight gallons, apparently manufactured by the natives.  On
+their way Mr Forster shot a duck, which the native begged to have, that
+he might explain to his countrymen how it was killed.  The party
+returned on board at sunset, convinced that they were not likely to
+obtain provisions at the place, as it did not appear to produce more
+than the inhabitants themselves required, although it was clear that
+they were ready to give what they could, for a more obliging, civil,
+pleasant people had not been met with during the voyage.  Hundreds came
+on board the ship, but not a theft was committed.  One of them, who had
+attached himself to Captain Cook, brought some roots; a few of the
+others had weapons, such as clubs and darts, which they willingly
+exchanged for nails and pieces of cloth.  A present had been made up for
+Teabooma, who, however, slipped out of the ship, and lost it.  A good
+watering-place was found, not far off, up a creek; but as only a small
+boat could enter it the casks were rolled over the beach, and put on
+board the launch.  Plenty of fuel could also be procured.
+
+An excursion on shore gave the explorers a better idea of the island
+than they could otherwise have possessed.  They were accompanied by
+several natives, the numbers increasing as they advanced, till they had
+a large _cortege_.  Reaching the summit of a rocky hill, the sea was
+observed in two places on the opposite side between the heights, thus
+enabling them to calculate the width of the island.  Below them was a
+large valley, through which ran a river, on whose banks were several
+villages and plantations, while the flat land which lay along the shore
+appeared to great advantage; the winding streams running through it, the
+plantations, the little straggling villages, the variety in the woods,
+the shoals on the coast, with the blue sea and the white breakers, made
+up a very beautiful and picturesque scene.  The country in general bore
+a strong resemblance to parts of New Holland, under the same latitude;
+several of its natural productions appeared to be the same; while the
+forests, as in that country, were without underwood.  The general aspect
+of the island was, however, that of a dreary waste; the sides of the
+mountains and other places being of hard rock, or of a thin soil baked
+by the sun.  Even these unpromising spots were, however, covered with a
+coarse grass, which though of no use, as there were no cattle to feed on
+it, would afford pasture to numberless sheep if they were to be
+introduced into the island.  There was a good supply of fish on the
+coast; but one day a somewhat ugly-looking one being dressed for supper,
+the captain and the two Mr Forsters, though they did but taste the
+liver and roe, were seized with a numbness and weakness over their
+limbs.  An emetic and a sudorific considerably relieved them by the
+morning, but a pig which ate the fish died.  A native who had sold the
+fish did not warn the buyer, though its poisonous character seems to
+have been known to the people, for, on seeing the skin hanging up the
+next morning, they expressed their utmost abhorrence of it, and
+intimated that it was not fit to eat.  The captain was anxious to
+benefit the people as far as his short stay would allow; he, therefore,
+presented a dog and a bitch to Teabooma, who seemed delighted with the
+gift; indeed, he could scarcely suppose that the animals were for him.
+A boar and a sow were also intended for him, but as he was not then to
+be found they were given to another chief, or head man, and his family,
+who promised to take care of them.  These people had made some advance
+out of the purely savage state.  Their dwellings were circular, very
+thickly thatched, something like a beehive, and very close and warm.
+Many had two fireplaces, and some had two storeys, spread with mats and
+grass.  As the entrance was very small, and there was no other outlet
+for the smoke, the heat was intolerable.  It was strange that natives of
+so hot a climate should delight in all the extra heat they could get.
+Outside the huts were little pyramids, five together.  On the point of
+the pyramids the clay pots in which they cooked their food were placed,
+not upright, but on the sides, the fire being lighted beneath.  The
+canoes of the islanders were large, but rude and clumsy in build; and
+they constructed double canoes formed of the trunks of two trees
+fastened together, much in the fashion of the other double canoes of the
+Pacific.  They had sometimes one, and sometimes two, lateen sails,
+composed of pieces of matting, the ropes being made of the coarse
+filaments of the plantain tree.  When they could not sail they were
+propelled by sculls, the handles of which rose, nearly upright, four
+feet above the deck.
+
+On standing down the coast, some objects were seen which the scientific
+gentlemen insisted were basaltic pillars, like those of the Giant's
+Causeway in Ireland, contrary to the opinion of the captain, who held
+that they were trees of a peculiar growth.  An island was discovered to
+the south of the large island, and the name of the Isle of Pines was
+given to it, on account of the number of tall trees growing thereon, and
+which the philosophers still maintained were basaltic pillars.  It was
+not without some difficulty that, at length, the ship got near enough to
+the Isle of Pines to enable the captain, with a party of officers, to
+land on one of the islets connected with it.  The objects observed were
+found to be a species of spruce pine, admirably fitted for masts and
+spars.  After dinner, therefore, two boats went on shore with the
+carpenter and his crew, and as many spars as were required were cut
+down.  It was of this tree that the natives made their canoes.  The
+island on which the party landed was called Botany Island.
+
+The Resolution got under way on October 1.  Soon afterwards a gale
+sprang up, which, in spite of all the exertions which could be made,
+rendered the further survey of the group impossible.  She therefore bore
+away for New Zealand.
+
+New Caledonia, thus discovered, Captain Cook considered to be, with the
+exception of New Zealand, the largest island in the South Pacific Ocean,
+being about eighty-seven leagues long, extending from the north-west to
+south-east, that is, from latitude 19 degrees 37 minutes to 22 degrees
+30 minutes South, and from longitude 163 degrees 37 minutes to 167
+degrees 14 minutes East, although its width is nowhere very
+considerable.
+
+The ship stood on about west-south-west till October 10, when land was
+discovered--an island of good height, five leagues in circuit, to which,
+as a compliment to the family of Howard, the name of Norfolk Island was
+given.  The ship stood in, when after dinner two boats landed without
+difficulty behind some large rocks.  The island was found to be
+uninhabited, and probably no human being had ever before set foot on its
+shore.  Many trees and plants common in New Zealand were observed,
+especially the flax plant, which here appeared to be more luxuriant than
+in any part of that country.  A spruce pine also grew in abundance, and
+to a great size, and there were also found a number of cabbage palms.
+They had large pinnated leaves, and the cabbage is, properly speaking,
+the bad of the tree.  Each tree produces but one crown, which grows out
+of the stem, and by cutting this out the tree is destroyed.  As many as
+could be collected were carried on board, and proved very welcome.  The
+voyage to New Zealand was then continued.
+
+On October 17 Mount Egmont was seen, and the next day the ship anchored
+at the entrance of Ship Cove, a strong wind preventing her getting in.
+The day after she warped up, and being moored, the usual preparations
+were made for carrying on operations on shore.  The forge was set up,
+and coopers' and sail-makers' tents were erected.  For several days no
+natives appeared.  The gardens were visited, and several of the plants
+were in a flourishing condition.  When the natives did appear their
+conduct was very strange.  At first they kept at a distance, with their
+weapons in their hands; but when they recognised Captain Cook and his
+officers, they danced and skipped about like madmen, though even then
+they would not let any of their women come near.
+
+Several of them talked about killing, but their language was so
+imperfectly understood that no meaning could at first be gathered from
+what they said.  The following story was made out, however, before
+long:--The natives said that a ship like the Resolution had been lost in
+the strait, and that some of the people got on shore, when the natives
+stole their clothes, for which several were shot; that afterwards, when
+the sailors could fire no longer, the natives rushed in and killed them
+with their clubs and spears, and ate them.  The narrators declared that
+they themselves had no hand in the matter, which occurred at some
+distance along the coast.
+
+Friendly relations were at once established with the natives the English
+had first met, who brought a good supply of fish, which they willingly
+exchanged for Otaheite cloth.  Cook's training in the merchant service
+had given him some useful notions with regard to mercantile principles,
+and in many other cases, as well as in this, he purchased articles with
+the view of taking them to another market, where their value would be
+increased.  Still, though Cook was trying to do the natives all the good
+in his power, it was evident that they were shy of the English.  Their
+more intimate friends at last acknowledged that the Adventure had been
+there, and though the captain's mind was relieved with regard to her, he
+still feared that some disaster had occurred to another vessel along the
+coast.  He probably was, as usual, on his guard, and careful in
+preventing any causes of dispute between his people and the natives, or
+he himself might have had to experience the effects of New Zealand
+treachery.
+
+On November 10 the Resolution left Queen Charlotte's Sound for the last
+time, and steered south-by-east, with a fine wind, Cook's intention
+being to get into latitude 54 degrees or 55 degrees, and to cross the
+ocean nearly in those parallels, thus to pass over those parts which
+were left unexplored the previous summer.
+
+On the evening of December 17 the west coast of Tierra del Fuego, near
+the entrance of the Straits of Magalhaens, was made; and now Captain
+Cook says that he had done with the South Pacific, but he had a sound
+ship and a healthy crew, and he resolved to accomplish some more work
+before returning home.  Among other things, he made a survey of the
+coasts he was now on.  Nothing could be more desolate than those shores.
+They seemed entirely composed of rocky mountains, without the least
+appearance of vegetation, the mountains terminating in horrible
+precipices, while their craggy summits shot up to a vast height.  The
+mountains seen inland were covered with snow, but those nearer the sea
+coasts were free from it.  The former were supposed to belong to the
+mainland of Tierra del Fuego, while the latter were probably islands.
+
+The ship at length was brought to an anchor, on December 20, in one of
+the numerous harbours in which the otherwise inhospitable-looking coast
+abounds.  This was called Christmas Sound, as the ship remained at
+anchor during Christmas Day.  An abundance of wild-fowl were shot here,
+so that the Christmas fare consisted of roast and boiled geese, goose
+pie, goose stew, and goose in every form which could be thought of,
+accompanied, in the cabin, by some Madeira, the only article of their
+provisions which had improved by keeping.
+
+Some natives made their appearance here in nine canoes.  They were a
+little, ugly, half-starved, beardless race.  They were almost naked,
+their clothing being merely two or three seal-skins, sewed together to
+form a cloak reaching to the knee.  Most of them had only one seal-skin,
+and the women had a sort of apron, but in other respects were clothed
+like the men.  Some young children were seen entirely naked, so that
+they must be inured to cold and hardships from their infancy.  They had
+with them bows and arrows, and darts, or rather harpoons, made of bone,
+fitted to a staff.  These were probably intended to kill fish and seals,
+or perhaps whales, as the Esquimaux do.  That they were accustomed to
+the use of train oil the noses of the officers had powerful evidence;
+indeed, it was far from pleasant to approach them.  Their canoes were
+made of bark, and in each was a fire, round which the women and children
+huddled.  There was also a large seal-skin, perhaps to form a covering
+to a hut on shore.  As these people seemed well acquainted with
+Europeans, it was considered probable that they moved during the winter
+more to the northward.  They called themselves Pecheras, at least that
+word was continually in their mouths.  "Of all the people I have ever
+seen, these Pecheras are the most wretched," says Cook; "they are doomed
+to live in one of the most inhospitable climates in the world, without
+having sagacity enough to provide themselves with such conveniences as
+might render life in some measure more comfortable."  Yet, unattractive
+as were these people, they had souls as precious in the sight of a
+loving Saviour as those of the more intelligent and attractive
+inhabitants of Otaheite.  It was in the attempt to carry the glad
+tidings of salvation to people such as these that the noble-minded
+Captain Allan Gardiner lost his life; and it is for the sake of people
+sunk as low as were these in the scale of humanity that missionaries are
+labouring in many other parts of the earth.
+
+A good supply of wood and water having been obtained at Christmas Sound,
+the Resolution got under way again on the 28th, and steered towards Cape
+Horn, which she rounded the next morning.  She now steered East by North
+a half East for the Straits of Le Maire, with a view of looking into
+Success Bay, to ascertain if the Adventure had been there.  A boat,
+commanded by Lieutenant Pickersgill, was sent on shore, but no traces of
+her were found.  A notice, however, was left nailed to a tree, in case
+Captain Furneaux should afterwards touch there.  Some natives appeared
+who behaved very courteously to Lieutenant Pickersgill, and made signs
+to him to bring in the ship.  The bay was full of whales and seals;
+indeed, great numbers had been seen in the straits.  At last, the
+Resolution came to an anchor near an island, on which seals had been
+observed.  After dinner three boats were hoisted out and landed with a
+large party of men, some to kill seals or sea-lions, and others to kill
+or catch birds, fish, or whatever came in their way.  The sea-lions,
+with which the island was covered, were so unaccustomed to the sight of
+man that they did not attempt to escape, and were knocked on the head
+with sticks and clubs.  The only danger was by getting between them and
+the water, when, as they came floundering on, they were likely to knock
+down and rush over any one thus placed.  A large supply of sea-lions,
+bears, geese, and ducks was soon obtained.  The old lions were killed
+solely for the sake of their blubber, from which oil was extracted, for
+their flesh was abominable, but that of the cubs was considered very
+good, and even that of the lionesses was not amiss.
+
+Once more, on January 3, 1775, the Resolution was at sea, steering an
+easterly course, in search of land said to exist in about the latitude
+53 degrees or 54 degrees.  At nine o'clock on the morning of the 13th
+land was seen by a man named Willis.  At first it was taken for an
+iceberg, but on their drawing nearer the appearance changed, and
+soundings being found, with a muddy bottom, at one hundred and
+seventy-five fathoms, there was no doubt that it was really land, and
+the name of the discoverer was given to it.  Passing between Willis
+Island and another islet, called Bird Island, land was seen extending
+for a considerable distance.  The ship ranged along it, about a league
+from the shore, for part of two days, till an inlet appeared, towards
+which the ship steered.  Instead, however, of the ship going in, a boat
+was hoisted out, and the captain, with Mr Forster and others, embarked
+in her to survey the bay.  They landed in three different places,
+displayed the British flag, and took possession of the country in his
+Majesty's name, under a discharge of small arms.
+
+The appearance of the territory thus added to the dominion of Great
+Britain was not attractive.  The head of the bay, as well as two
+portions on either side, consisted of perpendicular ice cliffs of
+considerable height.  Pieces were continually breaking off and floating
+out to sea, and even while they were in the bay huge masses fell which
+made a noise like the discharge of a cannon.  The inner parts of the
+country were not less savage and horrible.  Wild rocks raised their
+lofty summits till they were lost in the clouds, and even the valleys
+were covered with everlasting snow.  Not a tree was to be seen, nor even
+a shrub big enough to make a toothpick.  The only vegetation met with
+was a coarse, strong-bladed grass, growing in tufts, wild burnet, and a
+plant like moss, which sprang from the rocks.
+
+Seals or sea-bears were pretty numerous, and so were penguins; some very
+large, weighing from twenty-nine to thirty-eight pounds, were brought on
+board.  At first it was hoped that the land now discovered was part of a
+great continent, but by going partly round it it was discovered to be an
+island of about seventy leagues in circuit, and the name of the Isle of
+Georgia was given to it.  It seemed to answer very little purpose, for
+though the island lies between the latitudes of 54 degrees and 55
+degrees, the whole coast was a mass of ice and snow even in the middle
+of summer.  "The disappointment I felt did not, I must confess, affect
+me much," says Cook, "for to judge of the bulk by the sample, it would
+not be worth the discovery."  Various other islets and rocks were seen,
+when, believing that no other discovery of importance would be made
+thereabouts, on January 25 the Resolution continued her course, steering
+east-south-east.
+
+On the 31st several islands and a considerable extent of land were
+discovered, to which the name of Sandwich Land, or Southern Thule, was
+given, as it was the most southern land then known.  It showed a surface
+of great height, everywhere covered with snow.  While the Resolution was
+close in with this coast, the wind fell, and left her to the mercy of a
+great westerly swell, which set right upon the shore.  A line of two
+hundred fathoms found no bottom.  The weather became hazy; the coast
+could not be seen.  A most fearful wreck now seemed inevitable, when the
+fog cleared away, and a point (Cape Bristol) appeared, bearing
+east-south-east, beyond which no land could be seen.  This discovery
+relieved the explorers from the dread of being carried by the swell on
+to one of the most horrible coasts in the world.  After undergoing this
+and similar fearful risks, it was scarcely necessary for Cook to make
+any apology for leaving this inhospitable region, and proceeding in
+search of the long-sought-for Cape Circumcision.  He sailed over and
+round the spot where it was said to lie, and became thoroughly convinced
+that no cape, indeed no land, lies thereabouts.  He was soon sure that
+if there was land it would only be a small island, from the long
+southerly swell which was found in that latitude.
+
+What we are most struck with is the hardihood and fine seamanship
+displayed by Captain Cook and his officers in this run across the
+Antarctic Ocean.  It was the summer season, and the nights were short;
+but they had to encounter storms and bitter cold, ice, and snow, and
+hail, with the risk, at any moment, of running on an iceberg or some
+hidden rock; but still greater was the risk when such inhospitable
+shores as those of Tierra del Fuego, or Staten Island, or the Isle of
+Georgia, or Southern Thule were to be explored.
+
+A course was now steered for the Cape of Good Hope, greatly to the
+delight of all on board.  On March 16 two sails were seen in the
+north-west, standing westward, one of them under Dutch colours, a sign
+that they were once more approaching civilised regions.  In the evening
+land was seen.  In pursuance of his instructions, the captain now
+demanded of the officers and petty officers the log-books and journals
+which they had kept, and which were sealed up for the inspection of the
+Admiralty.  The officers and men were also especially charged not to say
+where they had been until they had received the permission of the Lords
+of the Admiralty.
+
+Several other ships were now met with, one of which proved to be the
+True Briton, Captain Broadly, from China, bound direct home.  With that
+liberality for which commanders of East India Company's ships were
+famed, Captain Broadly sent on board the Resolution a present of a
+supply of fresh provisions, tea, and other articles, which were most
+acceptable.  A heavy gale kept the Resolution from entering the harbour.
+At length, however, on Wednesday, March 22, according to the ship's
+reckoning, but with the people on shore Tuesday, the 21st, she anchored
+in Table Bay.  Finding an East India Company's ship homeward bound,
+Captain Cook sent by her a copy of his journal, charts, and other
+drawings, to reduce the risk of the result of his enterprise being lost.
+He also found here a letter from Captain Furneaux, from which the
+mysterious conduct of the natives of Queen Charlotte's Sound was
+completely explained.  It was as follows:--On December 17, 1773, the
+large cutter, with ten men under charge of Mr Rowe, a midshipman, had
+been sent on shore to gather greens for the ship's company, with orders
+to return that evening.  On their non-appearance another boat was sent,
+under the command of Lieutenant Barney, when the mutilated remains of
+the cutter's crew were discovered, some parts scattered about on the
+beach, and others carefully packed with fern leaves, in baskets,
+evidently intended for the oven.  It was clear that some quarrel had
+arisen, and that after the unfortunate men had discharged their muskets
+they had been clubbed by the natives.  It was afterwards discovered, by
+the acknowledgment of the natives, that they themselves had been the
+aggressors, having stolen some of the seamen's clothes, and that then
+they pretended to make up the quarrel, but that finding the party seated
+at dinner, and utterly unsuspicious of evil, they had rushed down on
+them and killed them all.  After this misfortune the Adventure sailed
+for the Cape of Good Hope, and thence returned to England.
+
+Captain Cook speaks of the great courtesy and kindness he received from
+the Dutch authorities, as well as from the residents, and of the
+abundance of good provisions which he obtained.  On April 27, the
+repairs of the ship being completed, the Resolution sailed in company
+with the Dutton, East Indiaman, for Saint Helena, and was saluted with
+thirteen guns.  She was also saluted by a Spanish and Danish Indiaman as
+she passed them--she, of course, returning the salutes.
+
+At daylight on May 15 the island of Saint Helena was sighted.  It, at
+that time, belonged to the East India Company, and was laid out chiefly
+in pasture, in order that their ships might here obtain supplies of
+fresh meat.
+
+The Resolution anchored off Ascension on May 28, and found some vessels
+from America come to load with turtle.  A good supply was taken on
+board, and on the 31st she again sailed.  On June 9 the island of
+Fernando de Moronha was sighted, and was found to be in possession of
+the Portuguese.  Without anchoring, the Resolution continued her course
+for the Azores, at one of which, Fayal, she anchored on July 13.  Among
+several vessels there was one belonging to the place, which had taken in
+a cargo of provisions at the Amazon, for the Cape de Verde Islands, but
+had been unable to find them--a specimen of Portuguese navigation not at
+all singular even in later days.  The Resolution sailed on the 19th,
+passing the island of Terceira, and on the 29th made the land near
+Plymouth, and the next morning anchored at Spithead.  The same day
+Captain Cook landed at Portsmouth, with Messrs. Wales, Forster, and
+Hodges, and set off for London.  He had been absent from England three
+years and eighteen days, and during that time had lost but four men, and
+only one of them by sickness.  This was owing, under Providence, to the
+very great care taken of the health of the people.  All means were used
+to induce the crew to keep their persons, hammocks, bedding, and clothes
+clean and dry.  The ship, once or twice a week, was aired with fires,
+and when this could not be done she was smoked with gunpowder mixed with
+vinegar and water.  There was frequently a fire in an iron pot at the
+bottom of the well.  The ship's coppers were kept carefully clean, fresh
+water being taken on board whenever practicable.  Of remedies against
+scurvy the sweet-wort was proved to be most valuable.  At the slightest
+appearance of the disease two or three pints a day were given to each
+man.  A pound of sour-krout was supplied to each man, twice a week, at
+sea.  Preparations of potatoes, lemons, and oranges were served out with
+good effect.  Sugar was found useful, as was wheaten flour, while
+oatmeal and oil were considered to promote the scurvy--such oil, at
+least, as was served to the Navy.  Olive oil would probably have had a
+different effect.  Captain Cook thus concludes his journal of the
+voyage:--"But whatever may be the public judgment about other matters,
+it is with real satisfaction, and without claiming any merit but that of
+attention to my duty, that I can conclude this account with an
+observation which facts enable me to make, that our having discovered
+the possibility of preserving health amongst a numerous ship's company
+for such a length of time, in such varieties of climate, and amidst such
+continued hardships and fatigues, will make this voyage remarkable in
+the opinion of every benevolent person, when the disputes about a
+southern continent shall have ceased to engage the attention and to
+divide the judgment of philosophers."
+
+In concluding this account of Captain Cook's second voyage round the
+world it is well, while admitting the value of the discoveries made, and
+admiring the perseverance and general prudence and kindness of the
+discoverer, to express deep regret that the scrupulous and unremitting
+care exercised over the physical health of the crew was not, with equal
+assiduity and anxiety, manifested in respect of their spiritual health.
+Those were not the days in which the souls of sailors were much cared
+for; but it may be supposed that the character of this expedition,
+together with the unusual number of educated gentlemen on board,
+furnished facilities for Christian exertion which certainly were not
+improved.  So far, indeed, as the existing records of this voyage inform
+us, we are led to the conclusion that instead of setting an example of
+morality and virtue to the ignorant heathen they visited, it would, in
+many instances, have been better for the heathen had they never known
+these so-called Christians.
+
+------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+Note 1.  Among sailors, a ship is said to be _crank_ when the rigging is
+too weighty for the hull, so as to risk being upset.
+
+Note 2.  It seems strange that this "horrid proceeding" should have been
+permitted on board the English ship; and that Captain Cook, with his
+well-established character, should have stood by and witnessed it, is
+unaccountable.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER FOUR.
+
+THIRD VOYAGE OF DISCOVERY, FROM JULY 1776 TO OCTOBER 1778.
+
+It will be remembered that Captain Cook landed in England on July 30,
+1775.  He at once received well-merited acknowledgments of the services
+he had rendered to his country.  On August 9 he received post rank, and
+three days afterwards was nominated a Captain in Greenwich Hospital, an
+appointment that would have enabled him to spend the remainder of his
+days in honourable retirement.  In February of the following year he was
+elected a Fellow of the Royal Society; and on the evening of his
+admission, March 7, a paper was read, in which he gave a full account of
+the various means he had adopted for the preservation of the health of
+his crew.
+
+The importance of this paper, and the way in which it was received, will
+be best understood by those who have read accounts of Lord Anson's and
+other voyages, where the scurvy made fearful havoc among the ship's
+companies.  In consequence of this paper, it was resolved by Sir John
+Pringle, the President of the Council of the Society, to bestow on
+Captain Cook the gold medal known as the Copley Annual Medal, for the
+best experimental paper of the year.  Cook was already on his third
+voyage before the medal was bestowed, though he was aware of the honour
+intended him; and his wife had the pleasure of receiving it.
+
+Sir John Pringle's words are worthy of repetition.  Having pointed out
+the means by which Captain Cook, with a company of a hundred and
+eighteen men, performed a voyage of three years and eighteen days, in
+all climates, with the loss of only one man from sickness, he proceeds!
+"I would now inquire of those most conversant with the study of the
+bills of mortality, whether, in the most healthful climate, and in the
+best conditions of life, they have ever found so small a number of
+deaths within that space of time.  How great and agreeable, then, must
+our surprise be, after perusing the histories of long navigations in
+former days, when so many perished by marine diseases, to find the air
+of the sea acquitted of all malignity; and, in fine, that a voyage round
+the world may be undertaken with less danger, perhaps, to health, than a
+common tour in Europe."  He concludes: "For if Rome decreed the civic
+crown to him who saved the life of a single citizen, what wreaths are
+due to that man who, having himself saved many, perpetuates in your
+Transactions the means by which Britain may now, on the most distant
+voyages, preserve numbers of her intrepid sons--her mariners, who,
+braving every danger, have so liberally contributed to the fame, to the
+opulence, and to the maritime empire of their country?"
+
+This address ought to be read by all British shipowners and
+ship-masters.  They possess ample means of preventing the approach of
+the scurvy, and yet numerous vessels, even at the present day, return
+home with a portion of their crews suffering from that fearful scourge.
+The masters must exert themselves, must take some trouble in the matter,
+no doubt; but if they will not do so, if they will not take an interest
+in the welfare of their men, they are unfit to command ships; they are a
+disgrace to their honourable profession.
+
+Among those who reached England in the Adventure, with Captain Furneaux,
+was Omai, the native of Ulietea.  Captain Cook did not approve at the
+time of the selection Captain Furneaux had made, as Omai did not belong
+to the chiefs, nor to the priestly class, while in appearance and
+intelligence he was inferior to many of his countrymen.  Oedidee, who
+had been received on board the Resolution, had, it will be remembered,
+been left behind at Ulietea, Cook fearing that he might have no other
+opportunity of restoring the youth to his native island.  Both seem to
+have been inferior to Tupia, who died at Batavia.  However, Omai, as the
+first native of the South Sea Islands who had been seen in England, was
+made a great deal of by people of all ranks.  He was introduced to
+George the Third, who settled on him a pension while he remained in
+England.  He had his portrait painted by Sir Joshua Reynolds, and Cowper
+mentions him in one of his poems, while he was constantly in the society
+of Dr Johnson, Madame d'Arblay, Sir Joseph Banks, Dr Burney, Lord
+Sandwich, Lord Mulgrave, Granville Sharpe, and many other illustrious
+persons.  The power of imitation is strong among his people, and he,
+therefore, very quickly copied the manners of the people with whom he
+associated, and became, in appearance, a polished gentleman.
+
+He very slowly acquired a knowledge of English; indeed, he always
+required the aid of signs and gestures to express himself.
+
+In vain was much trouble expended in trying to teach him to write, by
+Mr Sharpe, who also endeavoured, with no better success, to instruct
+him in the principles of Christianity.  Such was Omai, a dark-minded
+savage, amidst civilisation and enlightenment.  His great desire seems
+to have been to obtain the means of successfully waging war with the men
+of Bolabola, of expelling them from Ulietea, and of regaining possession
+of his hereditary property.  It is with regret that we read this account
+of the miserable Omai, when we reflect how eagerly and how thoroughly
+many of his fellow-islanders in after years imbibed the principles of
+the Christian faith, and how steadfastly they have held to them, in all
+simplicity and purity.  Had Omai--like the Ethiopian eunuch of other
+days--but embraced with all his heart the truths of the Gospel, and
+returned to his native land, carrying with him the glad tidings of
+salvation to his benighted countrymen, the light of the knowledge of the
+glory of God might have been spread throughout the islands of the
+Pacific even then.
+
+For two centuries a strong desire had existed in England, among people
+interested in navigation, to discover a passage by the north-west, round
+the coast of North America into the Pacific, so that China and Japan and
+the East Indies might be reached by a route shorter than that by the
+Cape of Good Hope.  All the early expeditions had been undertaken by
+private enterprise, to encourage which, an Act of Parliament was passed
+in 1745, securing a reward of 20,000 pounds to any ship belonging to any
+of his Majesty's subjects, which should discover the passage.  Often was
+the attempt made by numerous bold adventurers, from Frobisher, in 1576,
+onwards to the time of which we are writing.  In the middle of the
+century public interest was again awakened by the exertions of Mr
+Dobbs, who was strongly impressed with the belief that a north-west
+passage could be found.  Captain Middleton was sent out by Government in
+1741, and Captains Smith and Moore in 1746.  In 1773, at the instigation
+of the Hon. Daines Barrington, an influential member of the Royal
+Society, Lord Sandwich sent out Captain Phipps (afterwards Lord
+Mulgrave) with the Racehorse and Carcase.  Captain Lutwidge commanded
+the latter vessel, and had on board a young boy--Nelson, the future
+naval hero.  Captain Phipps returned, unable to penetrate the wall of
+ice which barred his progress.
+
+Still, that a passage existed, and might be found, was the belief of
+many enlightened men, and the Admiralty came to the resolution of
+sending out another expedition, better prepared than former ones to
+encounter the difficulties to be met with.  Lord Sandwich very naturally
+desired to have Captain Cook's opinion on the subject, and his lordship
+accordingly invited him to meet Sir Hugh Palliser, Mr Stephens, and
+others at dinner, where it might freely be discussed.
+
+The importance and grandeur of the undertaking, and, should it be
+successful, the great advantage it would be to navigation and science,
+thus completing the circuit of discoveries made by Cook, were
+particularly dwelt on.  When it came to the point of fixing on a fit
+person to recommend to his Majesty to command the proposed expedition,
+Captain Cook started to his feet, and declared that he himself was ready
+to take the command.
+
+This was probably what Lord Sandwich desired.  Cook's offer was eagerly
+accepted, and he was appointed to the command of the expedition on
+February 10, 1776.  It was arranged that on his return to England he
+should be restored to his post at Greenwich.  An Act was also at once
+passed, by which the officers and ship's company of any of his Majesty's
+ships discovering the north-west passage would be able to claim the
+reward of 20,000 pounds offered in 1745 only to persons not in the Royal
+Navy.  The usual plan of search was to be reversed, and instead of
+commencing on the Atlantic side of America, and endeavouring to
+penetrate into the Pacific, the expedition was to proceed round Cape
+Horn, and then sailing north, attempt to work its way through Behring's
+Straits eastward into the Atlantic.
+
+Two vessels were fixed on for the intended service, the Resolution and
+the Discovery.  The command of the former was given to Captain Cook,
+with Mr Gore as his first lieutenant, and of the other to Captain
+Clerke, while Lieutenant King went out again as second lieutenant of the
+Resolution.  He had undertaken to make the necessary astronomical and
+nautical observations during the voyage, in conjunction with his
+captain, and for this purpose various instruments were entrusted to him.
+
+Mr Bayley was again appointed as astronomer, to sail on board Captain
+Clerke's ship, while Mr Anderson, the surgeon of the Resolution, took
+charge of the department of natural history.  An artist, Mr Webber, was
+selected to sail on board the Resolution, and to make sketches of any
+scenes of interest which might be met with.
+
+Every care and attention was paid to the fitting-out of the ships, and
+some months passed before they were ready for sea.  The officers of the
+Resolution were John Gore, James King, and John Williamson, lieutenants;
+William Bligh, Master; William Anderson, surgeon; Molesworth Philips,
+lieutenant Royal Marines: those of the Discovery were James Burney, John
+Rickham, lieutenants; Thomas Edgar, master; John Law, surgeon.  The
+latter vessel, which had been purchased into the service, was of three
+hundred tons burden.
+
+An ample supply of all the articles which past experience had shown were
+likely to preserve the health of the crews was put on board these
+vessels, as well as an abundance of warm clothing.  By desire of the
+King, several useful animals, which were to be left at the Society or
+other islands, for the benefit of the natives, were embarked, with
+fodder for their support.  There were two cows and their calves, a bull,
+and several sheep.  Others were to be purchased at the Cape.  The
+captain was also furnished with a large variety of European garden
+seeds, for distribution among the inhabitants of newly-discovered
+islands.  He received, besides, by order of the Board of Admiralty, many
+articles calculated to improve the condition of the natives of the
+islands of the Pacific, while, for the purposes of traffic, a large
+assortment of iron tools, trinkets, and other articles were sent on
+board.  Nothing, indeed, was omitted which it was thought likely would
+benefit the people to be visited, or would promote the success of the
+voyage.  As it was not probable that another opportunity would occur of
+restoring Omai to his native island, it was settled that he should
+return in the Resolution.  It was supposed that this semi-civilised, and
+still heathen, savage had become so impressed with the grandeur and
+power of England, and so grateful for the patronage he had enjoyed and
+the presents he had received, that he would (as a writer of the day
+expresses it) "be rendered an instrument of conveying to the inhabitants
+of the Pacific Ocean the most exalted ideas of the greatness and
+generosity of the British nation."  How completely these hopes were
+disappointed the following narrative will show; nor should we be
+surprised at this, when we recollect how entirely superficial were all
+poor Omai's accomplishments.  He appears to have learned to play very
+well at chess; but that seems to have been the only science in which he
+attained anything like proficiency.  The truth is, he had been made a
+lion of, and had been courted and petted by the rank and fashion of the
+day.  It would not have been surprising if his head had been turned.
+Possibly, a man of superior mind or quicker sensibilities might have
+been powerfully affected by the same amount of flattery.  On being told
+that he was to go, he could scarcely refrain from tears when he spoke of
+parting from his English friends, but his eyes immediately sparkled with
+pleasure when his native islands were mentioned.
+
+Captain Cook received the secret instructions for his guidance on July
+6, 1776.  His chief object was to find a passage from the Pacific into
+the Atlantic.  He was to leave the Cape of Good Hope early in November,
+and first to search for certain islands said to have been seen by the
+French, south of the Mauritius.  He was not to spend much time in
+looking for them, nor in examining them if found, but to proceed to
+Otaheite, touching at New Zealand, should he consider it necessary to
+refresh his crews.  Thence he was to proceed direct to the coast of New
+Albion, avoiding, if possible, any Spanish settlements; or should it be
+necessary to touch at any, to take great care not to excite the jealousy
+or ill-will of the Spaniards.  Arrived in the Frozen Ocean, he was to
+examine all channels and inlets likely to lead eastward, and to take
+possession of any territory on which he might land, not before
+discovered, with the consent of the natives, in the name of the King of
+Great Britain.  He was to winter at the Russian settlement of Saint
+Peter and Saint Paul in Kamtschatka, and to return in the spring to the
+north.  Each ship was supplied with a small vessel in frame, which was
+to be set up, if necessary, to prosecute the search for a passage along
+the northern coast of America.
+
+Although numerous expeditions have since been sent out, they have mostly
+commenced their operations on the Atlantic side of America; and it is
+remarkable that the only successful one, that of Captain McClure, in the
+Investigator, and Captain Collinson, in the Enterprise, in the years
+1850-53, entered the Frozen Sea on the Pacific side.  [Note 1.]  Captain
+McClure had, however, to abandon his ship, and to make the voyage over
+the ice, till he could join one of the ships sent up Baffin's Bay to his
+relief; while Captain Collinson, getting his ship free from the ice,
+returned westward by the way he had come.  The question of a north-west
+passage was thus solved in the affirmative; but, unless in some very
+exceptional case, it is shown to be impracticable and useless for all
+commercial purposes.  It is easy to conceive what would have been the
+fate of Cook's ships had they proceeded eastward, and there become beset
+by the ice.
+
+Captain Cook, with Omai in his company, joined his ship on June 24,
+1776, at Sheerness, and immediately sailed for Plymouth.  He did not
+leave that port till July 11, and, owing to contrary winds, did not take
+his departure from the Scilly Isles till the 16th.
+
+The Discovery remained at Plymouth, Captain Clerke not having yet
+arrived on board.  He was directed to proceed, as soon as he was ready
+for sea, to the Cape of Good Hope, there to join the Resolution.
+Captain Cook touched at Teneriffe, where he found an abundance of
+supplies, and sailed again on August 4.  On the evening of the 10th,
+Bonavista, one of the Cape de Verde Islands, was seen bearing south,
+little more than a league off, though at the time it was supposed that
+the ship was at a much greater distance from the land.  Just then
+breakers were discovered directly under her lee, and for a few minutes
+she was in great danger.  She happily just weathered them, and stood for
+Porto Praya, where it was expected the Discovery might be.  As she was
+not there, the Resolution did not go in, but continued her course to the
+Cape.  On September 1 the line was crossed, and the usual ceremonies
+were observed; on October 18 the ship anchored in Table Bay.  Here
+arrangements were at once made to obtain a supply of fresh bread and
+other provisions, which, as soon as ready, were conveyed on board, while
+the tents were set up on shore, and astronomical observations diligently
+carried on.  Meantime, the ship was caulked, which she much required.
+On the evening of the 31st a fearful gale tore the tents to pieces, and
+some of the instruments narrowly escaped serious injury.  No
+communication with the Resolution was possible for those on shore.
+
+She was the only ship in the harbour which rode out the gale without
+dragging her anchors.
+
+On November 10 the Discovery entered the bay.  She had sailed on August
+1, and would have come in a week sooner but had been blown off the coast
+by the late gale.  She also required caulking, which detained the
+expedition some time.
+
+On November 30 the two ships sailed together.  The Resolution had now on
+board, in addition to her former stock of animals, two bulls and two
+heifers, two horses and two mares, two rams, several ewes and goats, and
+some rabbits and poultry--all of them intended for New Zealand,
+Otaheite, and the neighbouring islands, or other places where there
+might be a prospect of their proving useful.  The course steered was
+about south-east.  Before long a heavy squall carried away the
+Resolution's mizzen-topmast; and a mountainous sea made the ship roll so
+much that it was with difficulty the animals on board could be
+preserved.  Owing to this, and to the cold, several goats and sheep
+died.
+
+On December 12 two islands were seen about five leagues apart.  These,
+with four others which lie in the same latitude, about nine degrees of
+longitude more to the east, were discovered by two French navigators in
+1772.  Cook now bestowed the name of Prince Edward's Island on the two
+he had just discovered, and those of the French officers on the four
+others.  They were mostly covered with snow, and where the ground seemed
+free from it lichen or a coarse grass was the only herbage.
+
+On leaving Prince Edward's Island a course was shaped to fall in with
+Kerguelen's Land.  On the evening of the 24th an island of considerable
+height and the next day other islands were seen.  As the ships ranged
+along the coast a terrific sea rolled in on the shore, placing them in
+great danger, and both had considerable difficulty in weathering the
+points and reefs they met with.  Though it was midsummer the weather was
+as cold as it is generally during the winter in the British Channel.  At
+last a harbour was discovered, into which the ships beat and found good
+anchorage, an abundance of water, innumerable penguins and other birds,
+as also seals, which were so unacquainted with human beings that they
+allowed themselves to be knocked on the head without attempting to
+escape.  The casks were immediately landed to be filled up with water,
+while a supply of seals was secured for the sake of their oil.  Not a
+tree nor shrub was to be found in this inhospitable region.  A bottle
+was brought to Captain Cook, containing a document left by Kerguelen,
+who had discovered this land at the end of 1773, and had taken
+possession of it in the name of the King of France.  The harbour in
+which the ships lay was called Christmas Harbour, in commemoration of
+the day on which they entered it.  The ships left this harbour on the
+morning of the 28th, and continued to range along the coast, in order to
+discover its position and extent.  They brought up in another harbour
+just in time to escape a heavy gale, and then proceeded to the south,
+towards Cape George, to determine the shape of the land.  On finally
+leaving it, on December 30, the ships steered east-by-north for New
+Zealand.  Captain Cook came to the conclusion that the land he had just
+left was a large island, seventy or eighty miles from north to south,
+and a much greater distance from east to west.  Captain Furneaux had, in
+1773, passed across the meridian of this land, only seventeen leagues to
+the south of Cape George, thus settling the point of its being an
+island.
+
+It seems to have been a mistake to send the ships into these inclement
+regions with cattle on board, as many died, among them two young bulls
+and a heifer, two rams, and several more of the goats.
+
+The weather continued so thick that for many days together the ships did
+not see each other, though by constantly firing guns they managed to
+keep in company.  At length Captain Cook determined to put into
+Adventure Bay, in Van Diemen's Land, where Captain Furneaux had touched
+on the former voyage.  The land was made on January 24, and on the 26th
+the ships brought up in the bay.  They expected to obtain a supply of
+wood for fuel, and of grass for the cattle, of which they stood greatly
+in need.  A supply of fish was caught, and plenty of grass brought on
+board.  While the party on shore were cutting wood some natives
+appeared.  They came forward with perfect confidence, only one having a
+lance in his hand.  They were entirely without clothes, their skin and
+hair black, their stature about the ordinary height, their figures
+rather slender.  Their features were not disagreeable, as they had
+neither very thick lips nor flat noses, while their eyes and teeth were
+good.  Most of them had their heads and beards smeared with a red
+ointment, while some had their faces painted with the same composition.
+They seemed indifferent to all the presents offered them; even bread and
+fish they threw away, till some birds were given them, at which they
+expressed their satisfaction.
+
+A boar and sow had been landed for the purpose of being left in the
+woods, but no sooner did the natives see them than they seized them by
+the ears, evidently with the intention of carrying them off and killing
+them.  Captain Cook, wishing to know the use of the stick one of them
+carried, the native set up a mark and threw his stick at it.  He missed
+it, however, so often, that Omai, to show the superiority of the white
+men's arms, fired his musket.  This very naturally made the whole party
+ran off, and drop some axes and other things which had been given to
+them.  They ran towards where the Adventure's people were cutting wood,
+when the officer, not knowing their intention, fired a musket over their
+heads, which sent them off altogether.  The boar and sow were carried to
+a thick wood at the head of the bay, where it was hoped that they would
+conceal themselves and escape the natives; but some cattle which it had
+been intended to leave there were returned on board, as it was clear
+that the natives would immediately kill them.
+
+A calm kept the ships in harbour, and the next day, notwithstanding the
+fright which the natives had received, a party of twenty or more, men
+and boys, made their appearance.  Among them was one terribly deformed,
+who seemed to be the acknowledged wit of the party, as he and his
+friends laughed heartily at the remarks he made, and seemed surprised
+that the English did not do the same.  Their language was different from
+that of the tribes met with in the north.  Some of these people had
+bands of fur passed several times round their necks, and others of
+kangaroo-skin round their ankles.  They seemed to be unacquainted with
+fishing, by the way they looked at the English fish-hooks, and their
+rejection of the fish offered them; though near their fires quantities
+of mussel shells were found, showing that they lived partly on
+shell-fish.  Their habitations were mere sheds of sticks covered with
+bark, and there were indications of their taking up their abodes in
+trees hollowed out by fire or decay.  From the marks of fires it was
+evident that they cooked their food, but they did not appear to have the
+slightest notion of cultivating the land.  The people here described
+have disappeared from the face of the earth.  The last remnant, who had
+become exceedingly ferocious and mischievous, were collected and carried
+to an island in Bass's Straits, where they were allowed to roam at
+large, it having been found impossible to tame them.  It is believed
+that they finally died out.  Mr Anderson records the beauty of the
+scenery and of the climate, though he remarks that not one single
+natural production could be found fit for the food of man.
+
+The ships left Adventure Bay on January 30, when soon afterwards the
+mercury in the barometer fell, and a furious gale began to blow from the
+south.  At the same time the heat became almost insupportable, the
+mercury in the thermometer rising from 70 degrees to near 90 degrees.
+This high temperature, however, did not last long.
+
+On February 12 the ships anchored in Queen Charlotte's Sound.  That no
+time might be lost, the tents for the observatory, with the usual guard
+and the water-casks, were landed, and operations were immediately
+commenced.  Before long several canoes came alongside, but few of the
+people in them would venture on board, the greater part being evidently
+afraid that the English would punish them for their murder of the
+Adventure's people.  Captain Cook recognised several of those with whom
+he was well acquainted during his former visits.  They must also have
+seen Omai, and remembered that he was on board the Adventure at the
+time, and thus known that Captain Cook could no longer have been
+ignorant of what had occurred.  He, however, did his best to make them
+understand that he was not come to punish them for that act, and that he
+wished to be friends with them as before.  In consequence of this the
+natives very soon laid aside restraint and distrust.  After the fearful
+experience he had had of their treachery, however, the captain took
+extra precautions to prevent a surprise.  While the people were engaged
+in their various occupations on shore, a guard was posted for their
+protection, while all the men worked with their arms by their sides, Mr
+King and two or three petty officers being constantly with them.  No
+boat was sent to a distance unless well armed, and under charge of an
+officer who could be depended on.  Captain Cook thinks that the
+precautions were probably unnecessary though he felt it his duty to take
+them.  The natives showed no fear, and came and built their huts close
+to the ship, and many employed themselves in fishing, exchanging the
+fish they caught for the usual articles of barter.
+
+Besides the natives who settled near them, chiefs from other parts
+frequently visited the ship.  Among them came a chief called Kahoora,
+who was pointed out as the leader of those who attacked the crew of the
+Adventure's boat, and was said actually to have killed Mr Rowe, the
+officer in command.  Greatly to the surprise of the natives, as also to
+that of Omai, who entreated that he might at once be killed, Captain
+Cook declined seizing him, saying that he had granted an amnesty, and
+that no one should be punished.  Kahoora, trusting to the captain's
+promise, came frequently on board, though by thus doing he placed
+himself entirely in the hands of the English.  Once only, when Omai
+accused him in the cabin of having killed Mr Rowe, he hung down his
+head and folded his arms, expecting instant death, but was soon
+reassured by the captain, who told him that he wished to forget the
+circumstance, though should a similar one occur the natives must expect
+the fearful vengeance of the English.  He says that had he listened to
+the suggestions and requests of the chiefs and others to kill their
+enemies, he should soon have extirpated the whole race.  In no country
+could life be much more insecure.  Tribes, and even families living in
+the same neighbourhood, were constantly fighting with each other, and
+war was carried on with the utmost cruelty and ferocity.  If a man was
+unable to revenge an injury inflicted on himself or any member of his
+family, it was the duty of his son to take up the quarrel, and often
+many years elapsed before an opportunity occurred of wreaking his
+long-delayed vengeance.  When such an opportunity arrived he and his
+companions stole on their unsuspecting enemies in the night, and if they
+found them unguarded they killed every one indiscriminately, not even
+sparing women or children.  When the massacre was completed they either
+made a horrid banquet of the slain on the spot, or carried off as many
+dead bodies as they could, and devoured them at home, with acts of
+brutality too shocking to be described.  As they never gave quarter nor
+took prisoners the defeated party could only save their lives by flight.
+More powerful chiefs made war in the same barbarous way, on a larger
+scale, and depopulated whole districts if the people offended them.  On
+the introduction of firearms the bloody work went on with still greater
+rapidity.  In the time of George the Fourth a chief who was taken to
+England and received at Buckingham Palace, and was looked upon as a
+highly civilised person, on his return exchanged at Sydney all the
+articles which had been given him for firearms and ammunition, and
+immediately commenced a war of extermination against all the surrounding
+tribes, and feasted without scruple on the bodies of his foes.  It is
+not surprising that, under such circumstances, two-thirds of the
+inhabitants of New Zealand have been, within the last century, swept
+away by warfare.  The process of extermination had, indeed, commenced
+long before Cook visited those shores, and it would probably ere now
+have completed its ravages had not the Christian Church been roused to a
+sense of its responsibilities, and conveyed to New Zealand, as to other
+lands, the knowledge of Him who teaches us by His Word and Spirit to
+love our enemies, to bless those who curse us, and to do good to those
+who despitefully use us and persecute us.
+
+The wandering propensities of the New Zealanders were shown by the
+desire expressed by several youths of embarking on board the ships.
+One, named Taweiharooa, eighteen years of age, the son of a dead chief,
+was selected to accompany Omai, who had been desirous of having a
+companion.  That Taweiharooa might be sent off in a way becoming his
+rank, a boy, Kokoa, of about ten years of age, to act as his servant,
+was presented by his own father with as much indifference as he would
+have parted with a dog.  It was clearly explained to the youths that
+they would probably never return to their native country, but, as Cook
+observes, so great was the insecurity of life in New Zealand at that
+time, that he felt no compunction in the matter, as the lads could
+scarcely fail to improve their lot by the change.
+
+The ships left Queen Charlotte's Sound on February 25.  No sooner had
+they lost sight of land than the New Zealand adventurers were seized
+with sea-sickness, which, giving a turn to their thoughts, made them
+bitterly lament what they had done, while they expressed their feelings
+in a sort of song which they continued to sing till they got better.  By
+degrees their lamentations ceased, and in a short time their native
+country and friends seemed to be forgotten, and they appeared as firmly
+attached to their new friends as if they had been born among them.
+
+On March 29, 1777, the Discovery made the signal of land in the
+north-east.  It was soon found to be an island of no great extent, and
+the night was spent standing off and on, in the hope that the next day a
+landing-place might be found.  No landing nor anchorage, however,
+appeared practicable, on account of the heavy surf which broke
+everywhere, either against the island or the reef which surrounded it.
+Before long a number of people appeared on the shore or wading to the
+reef, most of them nearly naked, except the usual girdle, brandishing
+spears and clubs.  Some of them had mantles of native cloth over their
+shoulders, and turbans or wrappers round their heads.  After a time a
+canoe was launched, and came off with two natives to the ship.  When
+presents were offered, they asked for some for their Eatooa before they
+would accept any for themselves.  Omai spoke to them in the tongue of
+Otaheite, which they perfectly understood.  The principal man said that
+his name was Monrooa, and that the island was called Mangaia.  His
+colour was that of most southern Europeans; he was stout and well made,
+and his features were agreeable.  The other man was not so good-looking.
+Both of them had strong, straight black hair, tied at the crown of the
+head.  They wore sandals, to protect their feet from the coral rocks.
+
+The men would not venture on board, but when the boats were lowered and
+stood towards the shore to find a landing-place, Monrooa stepped into
+Captain Cook's of his own accord, and took his seat by his side.  No
+landing could be found without the risk of swamping the boats; they
+therefore returned, and Monrooa came on board.  He was, evidently, too
+anxious about his safety to ask questions.  At last he stumbled over one
+of the goats, when he inquired eagerly of Omai what strange bird that
+was!  The boat conveyed him just outside the surf, when he leaped
+overboard and swam through it, his countrymen being seen eagerly
+gathering round him to receive accounts of what he had seen.  Cook says
+he left that fine island with regret, as it seemed capable of supplying
+all their wants.  [Note 2.]
+
+Mangaia was left on March 30, and the next day, at noon, two islands
+were seen--a large and a small one.  The following day the shore of the
+larger island was reached, and boats at once put off to try and find a
+landing-place.  At the same time several canoes came from the shore,
+with one man in each.  The natives stepped on board without showing
+fear, but seemed to value very little any of the gifts bestowed on them.
+After the first party had gone, a man arrived in a canoe, bringing a
+bunch of plantains as a present to Captain Cook, whose name he had
+learned from Omai.  This present had been sent by the principal chief.
+The bearer went away, well contented, with an axe and a piece of red
+cloth.  Not long after a double canoe approached the Resolution, with
+twelve men in her, who chanted in chorus, and when their song was
+finished they came alongside and asked for the chief.  On the captain's
+showing himself a pig and some cocoanuts were handed up the side, and
+the natives coming on board presented some pieces of matting in
+addition.  Though the natives expressed surprise at some of the things
+they saw, nothing seemed to fix their attention.  They were afraid of
+the horses and cows, and inquired, when they saw the goats, as the
+native of Mangaia had done, what sort of birds they were.
+
+The following day Mr Gore and Mr Barney, with Mr Anderson and Omai,
+went on shore in hope of obtaining food for the cattle.  The boats
+approached the surf, when some canoes came off and took the party
+through it.  The day passed on, and as they did not return Captain Cook
+became somewhat uneasy; his only comfort being that the natives
+continued to come off to the ship as before, bringing cocoanuts, and
+taking anything given them in return.  Late in the day the boats
+returned; it then appeared that the party had been conducted, amid a
+vast crowd, up an avenue of cocoa palms, till they reached a body of men
+drawn up in two rows, armed with clubs resting on their shoulders.  In
+the middle row was a chief, sitting cross-legged on the ground, and
+having bunches of red feathers in his ears.  They were then introduced
+to two other chiefs, one, though a young man, excessively corpulent,
+also distinguished by the red feathers, and they were then entertained
+by a dance, performed by twenty girls, all of whom wore red feathers.
+The dancers did not leave the spot where they stood, for though their
+feet moved up and down the dance consisted of various motions of the
+body and hands.  The visitors were next entertained by a sham fight
+between the men armed with clubs.  They now found themselves separated
+from each other, and pressed on by the crowd, while they had their
+pockets picked of every article they possessed, the chiefs not
+interfering.  Their position was sufficiently embarrassing, for whenever
+they tried to get back to the boats they were stopped.  Omai, meantime,
+who was by himself, surrounded by a crowd of natives, and equally
+anxious with the rest, described, in exaggerated terms, the power of the
+English guns, which, he affirmed, could blow the whole island to pieces.
+He had some cartridges in his pocket, and to prove his assertion he let
+several of them off together.  The sudden flash and report seem to have
+produced a great effect on the minds of the natives, as the party were
+sent off with a large supply of cooked plantains as a gift; and a bag
+containing a pistol, which Mr Anderson particularly required, was
+restored.
+
+Omai found on this island three of his own countrymen who had arrived
+there, eleven years before, in a canoe.  They were the survivors of a
+party of twenty persons who had been driven before the wind from
+Otaheite, distant at least two hundred leagues.  They declined a passage
+offered to them to return to their native island.  The circumstance was
+interesting as giving an example of the way the islands of the Pacific
+have been peopled.  The name of this island was Wateeoo.  The language
+was equally well understood by Omai and the two New Zealanders.
+
+Though the visit was an interesting one, the chief object in calling off
+the island (that of procuring provender for the cattle) was not
+attained, as nothing was sent off.  From the small island which had been
+seen three days before, and to which the ships now steered, all that was
+required was obtained, consisting of grass and leaves of young cocoanut
+trees and of the pandanus.  Though the island, called Ota Kootaia, was
+uninhabited, still, as it was occasionally visited by the natives of the
+neighbouring island, Mr King left an axe and some nails in payment for
+what he took away.
+
+Captain Cook next sailed for Hervey Island, which he had supposed, when
+he discovered it in 1773, to be uninhabited.  As he now approached,
+however, a number of canoes came off, but the people on board behaved in
+a very wild and disorderly manner.  They were of a darker colour than
+the neighbouring islanders, and of a fiercer expression of countenance.
+As no anchorage was found for the ships they stood away for Palmerston's
+Island, which was found to be thickly covered with cocoanut trees,
+pandanus, cabbage palm, and grass.  The ships stood off and on for three
+days, while four or five boats' crews were busily employed in cutting
+food for the cattle, and in collecting two thousand cocoanuts for the
+crews of the two ships.  On leaving Palmerston's Island a course was
+steered for Annamook, and on the night between April 24 and 25, Savage
+Island was passed.
+
+On the evening of the 28th the ships anchored off Komango, and the next
+morning canoes came off with all sorts of provisions.  Mr King, who
+went on shore, was treated very civilly by the inhabitants, and by two
+chiefs, Taipa and Toobou.  As it was important to find a good harbour,
+and no other, after two days' search, having been discovered, Captain
+Cook came to anchor in the spot where he had been three years before.
+Here the chief Toobou received him, and offered a boat, and also a house
+to serve as a tent; at the same time he promptly selected a spot where
+the observatories might be set up and other arrangements made.  He
+conducted the captain and Omai to his house.  Round it was a fine
+grass-plot, which he explained was for the purpose of enabling people to
+clean their feet before entering the house.  The floor was covered with
+mats, and no carpet in an English drawing-room could be kept cleaner.
+Taipa, the chief, who had been among the first to introduce himself,
+that he might be close to his new friends, had a house brought on men's
+shoulders, full a quarter of a mile, and placed near the shed they
+occupied.  The greatest man, however, had not as yet appeared, and on
+May 6 a chief arrived, it was understood, from Tongataboo, who was
+introduced by Taipa as Feenou, King of all the Friendly Islands.  That
+he was of great power there could be no doubt, as the natives ordered
+out to meet him bowed their heads as low as his feet, the soles of which
+they touched, first with the palm, and then with the back of each hand.
+He appeared to be about thirty years of age, tall, but thin, and had
+more of the European features than any native of the South Seas yet met
+with.  He showed his power by recovering a large axe which had been
+stolen out of the ship.  The people of these islands were great thieves;
+even the chiefs stole.  One was caught, when he was sentenced to receive
+a dozen lashes, and was not set free till he had paid a hog for his
+liberty.  This put a stop to the practice among the chiefs.
+
+At Feenou's invitation Captain Cook agreed to go to Hapaee.  During the
+passage the great chief came on board and remained all day, but in the
+evening took his departure with Omai, while the ship remained under sail
+in a somewhat perilous position, no anchorage having been found.
+Several times during the day the smoke from the burning mountain of
+Toofoa was seen; at night the flames were observed bursting forth, but
+to no great height.
+
+Hapaee consists of four islands, of inconsiderable elevation.
+Immediately the ships came to an anchor, on the 17th, they were crowded
+with natives, who brought off all sorts of provisions.  A house had been
+brought down to the beach, and on Captain Cook's going on shore, he and
+Omai, with Feenou, took their seats within it, the other chiefs and
+people forming a circle outside.  Feenou then directed Taipa to proclaim
+to the people that the strangers were going to remain five days, and
+that they were to bring hogs, fowls, and fruit to the ships; that they
+were not to steal, but to behave in every way politely and courteously.
+After this, it was suggested by Taipa that a present should be made to
+Earoupa, the chief of the island.
+
+Omai seems to have been greatly taken with Feenou, and scarcely ever
+quitted him.  The next day this chief came off, requesting the captain's
+presence on shore, when a hundred men appeared, laden with bread-fruit,
+plantains, yams, cocoanuts, and sugar-canes, with several pigs and
+fowls, and two turtles, which were deposited in two heaps, Earoupa
+seating himself near one heap, and another chief near the other.  A
+number of men then appeared, armed with clubs made out of the green
+branches of the cocoanut tree.  They formed two parties, and numerous
+single combats took place, the victors being highly applauded by the
+spectators.  These were succeeded by wrestling and boxing matches, much
+in the English fashion.  In the latter several young women took part.
+One of the first pair gave in within a minute, but the second fought on
+till separated by two old women.  The greatest good humour prevailed,
+however, though many severe blows were received.  Feenou now explained
+that one-third of the presents were for Omai, and the others for Captain
+Cook, who made the handsomest returns he could.  There was enough to
+fill four boats; indeed, no chief in any part had ever made a present at
+all equal to it.
+
+At the desire of the chief the marines were exercised on shore, and in
+return a sort of dance was performed by a hundred and five men, who had
+each a paddle in his hand.  Nothing could exceed the beautiful precision
+and the variety of graceful movements of the performers.  When it grew
+dark their visitors greatly pleased the natives by a display of
+fireworks.  After this the people collected in an open space among the
+trees, where a circle was formed by lights, and just outside the circle
+a number of dances were performed, some by men, and others by women,
+many of the principal people taking a part.  The performances appear to
+have been very graceful and perfect in every way, the natives evidently
+priding themselves on them.
+
+Making an excursion on shore, Captain Cook formed a high opinion of the
+state of cultivation of Lifooga.  On his return on board he found a
+large double canoe, with the silent chief who had been met with at
+Tongataboo, and was supposed to be the king of the island.  Feenou was
+on board, but neither great man took the slightest notice of the other.
+Feenou now announced that business required his absence, and begged
+Captain Cook to await his return.  He had not been gone long when a
+large sailing-canoe arrived, in which was a person named Poulaho, and
+whom the natives on board affirmed to be the real King of Tongataboo and
+of all the neighbouring islands.  He was a sensible, sedate man,
+enormously fat, and about forty years of age.  He was, of course,
+invited into the cabin, but his attendants observed that that could not
+be.  On this the captain sent Omai to say that he would give directions
+that no one should approach the part of the deck above the cabin.  The
+king, however, settled the question by going below without making any
+stipulation.  Omai seemed much disappointed at discovering that the
+chief he had taken to be king was no king after all.  Feenou was,
+however, a very powerful chief, generalissimo of the army, and head of
+the police of all the islands, so that he was held in general awe.
+
+The king was much pleased with the presents he received, and when he
+went on shore ordered two more hogs to be sent off, in addition to two
+he had brought with him.  On landing he was taken up to the house
+erected for his accommodation, on a board resembling a hand-barrow.  On
+Feenou's return he looked rather confused on finding that the king had
+paid the voyagers a visit; and he then acknowledged who and what he
+really was.  After this, on one occasion, Poulaho and Feenou accompanied
+the captain on board.  Feenou, however, did not presume to sit with the
+king, but, saluting his foot with head and hands, retired out of the
+cabin.  It appeared, indeed, that he declined to eat and drink in the
+royal presence, though there were persons of much inferior rank who did
+so.
+
+At the request of Poulaho the captain paid a visit to Tongataboo, where
+the ships were in considerable danger of driving on a low, sandy island,
+but escaped.  At Tongataboo the English were entertained much in the
+same way that they had been at Hapaee.
+
+The king had a son, Fattafaihe, to whom great respect was paid.  His
+mother was the daughter of an old chief, of large possessions and great
+influence, called Mareewagee, and Feenou was his son.  That chief was,
+therefore, brother-in-law to the king, and uncle to the heir-apparent.
+
+On June 19 Captain Cook invited the chiefs and others to a meeting, that
+he might present them with the animals he proposed to leave on the
+island.  To the king, Poulaho, he gave a young English bull and cow; to
+Mareewagee, a Cape ram and two ewes; and to Feenou, a horse and mare;
+and he instructed Omai to explain their use, and that they must be
+careful not to injure them, but to let them increase till they had
+stocked the island.  Some goats and rabbits were also added.  It soon
+appeared, however, that the chiefs were dissatisfied with this
+allotment, and early next morning it was found that a kid and two
+turkey-cocks were missing.  On this the captain put a guard over the
+king, Feenou, and some other chiefs, whom he found in the house which
+the English occupied on shore, and told them that they should not be
+liberated till the animals and other articles lately stolen had been
+restored.  On the captain inviting them to go on board to dinner they
+readily consented.  Some objected to the king's going, but he jumped up
+and said that he would be the first to go.  They were kept on board till
+four, and on their return on shore the kid and one of the turkey-cocks
+were brought back, and the other was promised the next day.  After this
+a party of officers from both ships made an excursion into the interior,
+with muskets and ammunition, and a number of articles for barter, but
+the natives stripped them of everything.  The officers made application,
+through Omai, for restitution, and this caused the king, Feenou, and
+other chiefs hastily to go off.  Omai, however, persuaded Feenou that
+nothing would be done to them, when he, and afterwards the king,
+returned, and were apparently on as good terms as ever.
+
+Captain Cook even ventured to attend a grand ceremony, held for the
+purpose of introducing the young prince to certain royal privileges, the
+principal of which was to be that of eating in the society of his
+father.  There seemed to be great distinctions of rank among the people.
+There were some who had greater honour shown to them than even to the
+king himself.  His father had an elder sister, of equal rank to himself,
+and she married a chief who came from Fejee.  By him she had a son, the
+silent chief Latoolibooloo, who was looked upon as a madman, and two
+daughters.  The king met one of these women on board the Resolution, and
+would not venture to eat in her presence.  On afterwards encountering
+Latoolibooloo, the king bent down and touched the silent prince's feet
+with the back and palms of his hand, as he was accustomed to be treated
+by his subjects.
+
+Captain Cook here observed the taboo system.  If applied to places, they
+may not be entered or approached; if to persons, they may not be
+touched, or may not feed themselves; if to things, they may not be
+touched.  The system, however, did not appear to be so rigidly observed
+in Tonga as in some other groups of the Pacific.
+
+With regard to the religion of the people, Captain Cook gained very
+little information, and Omai, who seems to have been especially dull of
+apprehension, and never to have made inquiries of his own accord, was
+very little able to help him.  That great cruelty was exercised by those
+in authority was evident by two or three occurrences witnessed by the
+English.  On one occasion, when Feenou was on board the Resolution, an
+inferior chief ordered all the people to retire from the post occupied
+on shore by the English.  Some ventured to return, when the chief took
+up a stick and beat them most unmercifully.  He struck one man with so
+much violence on the side of the face that the blood gushed out of his
+month and nostrils, and after lying for some time motionless he was
+removed in convulsions.  The chief laughed when told that he had killed
+the man, and seemed perfectly indifferent to the matter.
+
+All classes, from the highest to the lowest, were found to be thieves;
+and when the chiefs themselves did not steal they employed their
+servants to pilfer for them.  To check this propensity Captain Clerke
+suggested a plan, which was adopted with good effect.  Whenever any of
+the lower orders were caught stealing he had their heads completely
+shaved, so that they became objects of ridicule to their countrymen, and
+did not again venture on board the ships.
+
+It appeared that the larger portion of the land belonged to certain
+great chiefs, and that the inferior chiefs held their estates under
+them, while the mass of the population were mere serfs, who tilled the
+soil for their masters, and received but a scanty remuneration for their
+labour.
+
+Captain Cook heard of the Fejee Islands, distant about three days' sail,
+and of the savage and cannibal propensities of the inhabitants, some of
+whom he saw at Tonga.  The inhabitants of Tonga held them in great
+dread, on account of their prowess in war, and always endeavoured to
+keep on friendly terms with them.  He concluded that the Friendly
+Islanders had not, till lately, kept up any intercourse with those of
+Fejee, because dogs, which are very common in the latter group, had only
+been introduced into Tonga since his last visit, and to none of the
+other islands.
+
+All was ready for sailing, when the king invited Captain Cook and his
+officers to the ceremony which has already been mentioned, and which
+took place at Mooa, where the king resided.  During its performance they
+had to sit, as did the natives, with their shoulders bare, their hair
+hanging down loose, their eyes cast down, and their hands locked
+together.  None but the principal people, and those who assisted at the
+celebration, were allowed to be present.  These circumstances, Captain
+Cook says, were sufficient evidence to him that the people considered
+themselves as acting under the immediate inspection of a Supreme Being.
+He was told that in about three months there would be performed, on the
+same account, a far grander solemnity, on which occasion not only the
+tribute of Tongataboo, but that of Hapaee, Vavaoo, and of all the other
+islands, would be brought to the chief, and ten human beings from among
+the inferior sort of people would be sacrificed to add to its dignity:
+"a significant instance," Captain Cook remarks, "of the influence of
+gloomy and ignorant superstition over the minds of one of the most
+benevolent and humane nations upon earth."  King Poulaho warmly pressed
+his guests to remain, that they might witness a funeral ceremony, which
+was to take place the next day.
+
+During their stay in the island they had suffered from a succession of
+violent storms.  The wind raged fearfully amongst the forest trees, the
+rain fell in torrents, the lightning flashed, and the thunder pealed
+with an awful fury of which we, in these more temperate regions, have
+little idea.  Now, however, the wind had become fair and moderate;
+Captain Cook and his officers, therefore, hurried on board, and as soon
+as possible the ships got under way.  As, however, they could not get to
+sea before it was dark, they had to bring up for the night under
+Tongataboo.  The next day they reached Eooa, where the English were well
+received by Captain Cook's former acquaintance, the chief of the island,
+Taoofa, or, as he then called him, Tioony.  An abundant supply of yams
+and a few hogs were obtained, and the ram and two ewes of the Cape of
+Good Hope breed of sheep were entrusted to the chief, who seemed proud
+of his charge.
+
+Captain Cook made an excursion into the interior, and as he surveyed,
+from an elevation to which he had ascended, the delightful prospect
+before him, "I could not," he says, "help flattering myself with the
+pleasing idea that some future navigator may, from the same station,
+behold these meadows stocked with cattle, brought to these islands by
+the ships of England; and that the completion of this high benevolent
+purpose, independently of all other considerations, would sufficiently
+mark to posterity that our voyages had not been useless to the general
+interests of humanity."  The great navigator here gives utterance to the
+genuine feelings of his heart, for such were undoubtedly the principles
+which animated him.  He little dreamed that those friendly natives, of
+whom he had thought so highly, and whom he had praised as among the most
+humane people on earth, had, headed by Feenou, laid a plot for his
+destruction, and that of all his followers.  Providentially, the
+conspirators could not agree as to the mode of proceeding; but all were
+equally eager to possess themselves of the stores of wealth the ships
+were supposed to contain.  Probably Feenou's pretended friendship for
+the foolish Omai was in the hope that he would thus have a ready tool in
+his hands.  He had offered to make Omai a great chief if he would remain
+in Tonga, but Cook advised him not to accept the offer.
+
+Captain Cook had settled to sail on July 15, but, pressed by Taoofa, who
+promised more presents, he consented to remain a couple of days.  During
+this period a seaman was surrounded by a number of people, and, being
+knocked down, had every particle of clothing torn from his back; but, by
+seizing on a couple of canoes and a fat hog, the English obtained the
+restoration of some of the articles.
+
+The captain kept to his purpose of sailing, but when still not far from
+the land a canoe with four men came off, saying that orders had been
+sent to the people of Eooa to supply the ships with fat hogs, and that
+if they would return to their former station the king and a number of
+chiefs would, in a couple of days, be with them.  As, however, there was
+an abundant supply of provisions on board, Captain Cook declined the
+offer, and continued his coarse.
+
+It is scarcely necessary to remind the reader that more fearful
+massacres of the crews of various ships were perpetrated by the
+inhabitants of these islands than by any other natives of the Pacific,
+from the time of the visit just recorded till they were formed into a
+civilised community under their present government.
+
+After the ships had left the Tonga group they did not see land till
+August 8, when they fell in with a small island, having on it hills of
+considerable elevation, covered with grass; tall trees, and numerous
+plantations on a border of flat land, ran quite round it, edged with a
+white sandy beach.  A number of people were on the shore, and two canoes
+came off with a dozen men in them, but could not be persuaded, by all
+Omai's eloquence, to venture alongside.  They spoke the language of
+Otaheite, and called their island Toobouai.  It was at this island that
+Christian and the mutineers of the Bounty tried to form a settlement, in
+1789.  It is the scene, also, of Lord Byron's poem of "The Island,"
+though he altered the name to Toobouia.  Some of the people were dressed
+in native cloth, but the great mass had only girdles.  One continued to
+blow a conch-shell most of the time the ships lay off their island,
+while his companions made signs, inviting the strangers to land.  It is
+worthy of remark that no weapons were seen among them.
+
+On the 12th Maitea was seen, and soon after Otaheite hove in sight, and
+the next day the ships anchored in the Bay of Oheitepeha.  Some common
+people came off in canoes, but Omai took no notice of them, and they did
+not seem to recognise him as a countryman.  At length his
+brother-in-law, Ootee, appeared, but there was no exhibition of regard
+or affection till Omai took the other into the cabin and showed him the
+drawers in which he kept his red feathers.  This instantly changed the
+face of affairs, and Ootee begged that they might be _tayos_, and change
+names.
+
+Soon after the ships anchored Omai's sister came on board, and the
+meeting was marked with expressions of the most tender affection,
+evidently not feigned.  Afterwards, on going ashore with Captain Cook,
+Omai met a sister of his mother.  "She threw herself at his feet, and
+bedewed them plentifully with tears of joy," says the captain, adding,
+"I left him with the old lady, in the midst of a number of people who
+had gathered round him."
+
+Cook found that since his last visit two Spanish ships had twice visited
+the bay; that a house had been built, and that several persons had been
+left in the interval, of whom some had died, and the rest went away when
+the ships came back.  They had presented the islanders with a bull, some
+hogs, goats, and dogs, and had taken away four people, two of whom died,
+and two came back from a place which Cook conjectured to be Lima.  The
+house, which stood close to the beach, was made of planks, and as these
+were all numbered they had evidently been brought ready to be set up.
+It was divided into two small rooms, and in the inner one were a
+bedstead, a table, a bench, some old hats, and other trifles, of which
+the natives seemed to be very careful, as also of the house itself,
+which had suffered no hurt from the weather, a shed having been built
+over it.  There were scuttles all round which served as air-holes, and
+perhaps they were intended to fire from with musketry, should it have
+become necessary.  At a little distance from the front stood a wooden
+cross, on the transverse part of which was only the inscription
+_Christus vincit_, and on the perpendicular part _Carolus Tertius,
+imperat_ 1774.  On the other side of the post Cook preserved the memory
+of the prior visits of the English by inscribing, _Georgius Tertius,
+Rex_, Annis 1767, 1769, 1773, 1774, and 1777.  The natives pointed out
+the grave of the commodore of the two ships who died there during their
+first visit.
+
+The expeditions of the Spaniards to Otaheite and the neighbouring
+islands had been undertaken in consequence of the jealousy of the
+Spanish Government at the visits of the English to the South Seas.  The
+first was under the command of Don Domingo Bonechea, in the Aguila
+frigate, in 1772.  He gave so favourable a report of the islands that he
+was again sent out in 1774, having on board two monks of the order of
+Saint Francis, a linguist, a portable house, sheep, cattle, and
+implements.  Having landed them at Oheitepeha Bay, as soon as the house
+was up he set sail to make further discoveries.  He then returned to the
+bay, and six days afterwards died, and was buried, with becoming
+ceremonies, at the foot of the cross, which was erected with great pomp,
+amid the chanting of masses and the discharge of musketry.
+
+In 1775 a third visit was paid by the Aguila, sent from Callao, to
+ascertain the fate of the missionaries.  They were found to be utterly
+disappointed, and determined to abandon their task, having made no
+progress in the conversion of the natives, and were so alarmed at the
+human sacrifices constantly taking place that they would only consent to
+remain under the protection of a Spanish garrison.
+
+In God's providence, the people of Otaheite were destined to receive,
+from Protestant missionaries, a simpler and purer faith than that taught
+by the priests of Rome.  To that faith they have held fast, in spite of
+all the efforts and machinations of the Romanists.
+
+While in this bay, as an abundant supply of cocoanuts could be obtained,
+Captain Cook proposed to his crew that, as it was important they should
+economise their spirits, they should give up their grog, except on
+Saturday nights, and drink cocoanut milk instead.  To this, without a
+moment's hesitation, they consented, as did Captain Clerke's crew.  On
+their first arrival in this place red feathers were looked on as of
+great value, but as everybody had them on board they soon became a drug
+in the market.  Poor Omai began very soon to exhibit his want of
+judgment.  He had prepared a crown or cap of yellow and red feathers for
+Otoo, the king of all the islands, which the captain recommended him to
+present himself.  Instead of so doing, his vanity induced him to exhibit
+it before Waheiadooa, the chief of that part, who thereupon kept the
+crown himself and sent only a few tufts to the king.
+
+On August 23 the ships moved to Matavai Bay.  The following morning the
+captain landed with Omai and several officers, to pay his respects to
+the king, who was attended by his father, his two brothers, three
+sisters, and a large number of people.  Omai, who was becomingly
+dressed, kneeled and embraced the king's legs, but very little notice
+was taken of him.  He made the king a present of some red feathers and
+three yards of gold cloth; and the captain gave him a suit of fine
+linen, a gold-laced hat, some more red feathers, and some tools.
+Captain Cook's wish had been to leave Omai with Otoo, as he thought of
+landing all his animals here, and supposed that Omai would assist in
+looking after them, and show their various uses.  He therefore
+encouraged the friendship of Omai with the chiefs, even though it might
+have depended much on his supposed wealth.  Omai, however, rejecting his
+kind friend's advice, conducted himself in so imprudent a manner that he
+soon lost the friendship of Otoo, and of every other person of note in
+Otaheite.  He associated with none but vagabonds and strangers, whose
+sole object was to plunder him; and had not the captain interfered they
+would not have left him a single article worth carrying from the island.
+Of course, this drew on him the ill-will of the chiefs, who found that
+they could not procure such valuable presents as Omai bestowed on the
+lowest of the people, his companions.
+
+After dinner the captain and a party of officers accompanied Otoo to
+Oparree, taking with them the poultry with which they were to stock the
+island.  They consisted of a peacock and hen, a turkey-cock and hen, one
+gander and three geese, and a drake and four ducks; all left with the
+king.  A gander was found there, left by Captain Wallis, several goats,
+and a fine Spanish bull, which was kept tied to a tree near Otoo's
+house.  Three cows and a bull, some sheep, and the horse and mare were
+also landed, greatly to the captain's satisfaction, and to that of
+everybody else on board, probably, when it is considered what care and
+attention it must have required to keep them alive for so many months.
+A piece of ground was also cleared for a garden, and in it, among other
+things, were planted several shaddock trees, which had been brought from
+the Friendly Islands, two pine-apple plants, some melons and potatoes.
+The Spaniards had left a vine, which flourished, but before the grapes
+were ripe the natives tasted them, and finding them sour, nearly
+destroyed it.  It was, however, pruned, and cuttings were taken from it,
+and the natives were advised to wait till the fruit was ripe another
+season.
+
+The youth called Oedidee, whose real name was Heeteheete, who had been
+seven months with Captain Cook, was here met with.  The captain gave him
+a chest of tools, and some clothes had been sent out for his use; but
+after a few days he declined wearing them.  One of the natives who had
+been on board one of the Spanish ships had also resumed his native
+garments, and "perhaps," Captain Cook observes, "Omai, who has almost
+entirely assumed English manners, will do the same."
+
+While the ships lay at Matavai news was brought that the people of Eimeo
+had revolted, and it was resolved to send Towha, with a fleet, against
+them.  Before the fleet could sail it was necessary that a grand human
+sacrifice should be offered.  The unhappy victim--one of the common
+people--had already been knocked on the head for the purpose.  Captain
+Cook, wishing to ascertain the truth of the accounts he had received,
+accompanied Otoo to witness the ceremony, and with him Mr Anderson and
+Mr Webber, followed by Omai in a canoe.  Every facility was given them
+for witnessing the barbarous and disgusting rite.  The English were
+allowed to examine the victim, who was a man of middle age, and had been
+killed by a blow on the right temple.  Forty-nine skulls were counted in
+one heap, which, as they had suffered little change by the weather, had
+belonged to people evidently not long killed.
+
+On the captain's return he met Towha, who became very angry because he
+positively refused to assist him in his proposed expedition.
+
+Omai gave an entertainment on shore about this time, at which the king
+condescended to attend; and the following day a party dined with their
+old shipmate Oedidee; among other dishes, admirably dressed, was a hog
+weighing about thirty pounds, which an hour or two before was alive.
+Some fireworks, let off before a large concourse of people, frightened
+some of them so much that they could scarcely be kept together.  On the
+return of Otoo, on September 13, from assisting at another human
+sacrifice, the two captains mounted the two horses, and took a ride
+round the plains of Matavai, to the astonishment of a large number of
+people.  The ride was repeated every day, and seemed to convey to the
+natives a better idea of the greatness of the English than any of the
+other novelties brought to them by their European visitors.
+
+Most of the chiefs and other people of importance who were known to the
+English during their former visit were still alive, and as the island
+had enjoyed the blessings of peace, it seemed to be in a very
+flourishing condition.  Omai received here one present from Towha in
+return for the many he had given away; this was a handsome double canoe,
+ready for sea; but when he exhibited himself on board in a suit of chain
+armour, so unpopular had he become that the people would not look at
+him.  He had all along entertained the idea that Captain Cook would take
+him back to Ulietea, and reinstate him by force of arms on his father's
+property.  This made him refuse to remain at Otaheite.
+
+On leaving that island, on September 30, the ships proceeded to Eimeo.
+Omai, in his canoe, had arrived some time before.  An excellent harbour
+was found, in which the ships lay close to the shore.  The Resolution
+was much infested by rats, and, as an expedient to get rid of them, she
+was hauled as close in with the shore as the depth of water would allow,
+and some stout hawsers were fastened to the trees to afford them a
+bridge to cross over.  The natives would scarcely have thanked their
+visitors for the gifts intended for them, but whether any rats were thus
+got rid of is not known.  The natives managed, however, to carry off a
+goat, which, as it was of value for the purpose of stocking other
+islands, it was necessary to recover.  This, however, was not done till
+several canoes and some houses had been burned.
+
+The island is described as rising in one hill, with very little level
+ground, and the people, especially the women, were said to be inferior
+in appearance to those of the neighbouring islands.  Another day's sail
+brought the ships to the entrance of the harbour of Owharre, on the west
+side of the island of Huaheine.  As Omai refused to attempt the recovery
+of his property in Ulietea, except by force of arms, Captain Cook
+determined to leave him here, making the best terms with the chief that
+he could.  The English were received on shore by a large concourse of
+people, many of whom appeared to be people of consequence; the king was,
+however, only a child.  It is painful to read the following account
+given of the meeting:--"Omai began with making his offering to the gods,
+consisting of red feathers, cloth, etcetera.  Then followed another
+offering, which was to be given to the gods by the chief: each article
+was laid before a priest, who presented it with a prayer dictated by
+Omai, who did not forget his friends in England, nor those who had
+brought him safely back.  The King of England, Lord Sandwich, Cook, and
+Clerke were mentioned in every one of them."
+
+Finally, the chief agreed to give Omai a piece of ground extending about
+two hundred yards along the shore of the harbour, and reaching to the
+foot of the hill.  Here observatories were set up, and the carpenters of
+both ships were set to work to build a house for Omai, in which he might
+secure his European commodities.  At the same time some hands were
+employed on shore, making a garden for his use, planting shaddocks,
+vines, pine-apples melons, and other seeds, many of which were in a
+flourishing state before the English left the island.  Omai here found a
+brother, a sister, and a brother-in-law, but they were not people
+capable of affording him any protection.  Cook, therefore, advised him
+to make handsome presents to some of the chiefs, that they might be
+induced to protect him.  To increase his security, Captain Cook took
+every opportunity of impressing on the inhabitants that he purposed
+returning, and that should he not find Omai in the state of security in
+which he left him, his enemies might expect to feel the weight of his
+resentment.
+
+On the 22nd a man found means of carrying off a sextant from Mr
+Bayley's observatory.  Omai fixed on the culprit, who was a Bolabola
+man, a hardened scoundrel.  He confessed that he had taken the
+instrument, and would show where it was.  This did not save him,
+however, from having his head and beard shaved, and both his ears cut
+off, as a terror to the rest.
+
+Omai's house being nearly finished on the 26th, many of his movables
+were carried on shore.  Among a variety of other useless articles was a
+box of toys, which seemed greatly to please the multitude; but his
+plates, dishes, mugs, and glasses he saw would be of no use to him, and
+he therefore exchanged them with the crew for hatchets and other iron
+tools.  He is said to have had an electrical machine, a portable organ,
+a coat of mail, and a helmet.  He had also a musket and bayonet, a
+fowling-piece, two pairs of pistols, and two or three swords or
+cutlasses.  The possession of these made him quite happy, though Cook
+was of opinion that he would have been better without them.  A horse and
+mare, a boar and two sows, and a goat with kid were likewise given to
+him.
+
+The following inscription was cut on the outside of Omai's house:--
+
+_Georgius Tertius, Rex, 2 Novembris, 1777_.
+
+_Naves Resolution, Jacobus Cook, Pr.  Discovery, Carolus Clerke, Pr_.
+
+On bidding his friends farewell Omai sustained himself with firmness,
+till he came to Captain Cook, when his utmost efforts failed to conceal
+his tears, and he wept all the time of going on shore.  Even at last he
+would have remained on board the Resolution.  The two New Zealand youths
+were very anxious to remain with the English, and the younger, who was a
+witty, smart boy, and consequently much noticed, had to be carried on
+shore by force.
+
+Deep interest was often expressed in England as to the fate of the
+"gentle savage" who had been brought from the South Seas, and so soon
+learned the manners of civilised life.  Had he devoted his talents to
+the instruction of his countrymen, and raised their condition to a state
+somewhat resembling what he had seen existing in England?
+
+Many years passed before the truth was known, and yet who that has read
+the account given of him by Cook, and remembers that he remained to the
+last a dark idolater, could have expected otherwise from him?  Mr
+Ellis, in his _Polynesian Researches_, gives the account:--
+
+"Soon after the departure of his friends he assumed the native dress,
+and at the same time gave himself up to the vices, indolence, and
+barbarism of his countrymen.  The only use he made of the horses left
+with him was to ride about the country for the purpose of astonishing or
+frightening the more ignorant natives; and so far from lamenting the
+barbarous condition of the people, and endeavouring to raise them in the
+social scale, his great delight consisted in exhibiting the superiority
+which his English weapons enabled him to assume.  As his firearms,
+especially, had rendered him a powerful subject, he married the daughter
+of a chief who made himself king, and was invested with the high title
+of _Patiri_ (wise and instructed).  He had now gained the position his
+philosophical friends in England had desired for him, and had a
+favourable opportunity of acquiring the title of his country's
+benefactor, which they had hoped he would deserve.  But how did he
+employ his advantages?
+
+"From thenceforth," adds the narrator, "he continued the inglorious tool
+of the king's cruel and wanton humour, assisting him with his musket in
+time of war, and in peace frequently amusing the monarch by shooting at
+his subjects at a distance, or gratifying his revenge by despatching,
+with a pistol, those who had incurred his wrath.
+
+"He died within three years after his celebrated voyage, and the New
+Zealanders did not long survive him.  His name is now rarely mentioned,
+except with contempt or execration.  The site of his dwelling is, by the
+natives, still called Beritain (Britain); and amid the ruins of the
+garden they show a dark and glossy-leaved shaddock tree, which they love
+to tell was planted by the hands of Cook.  The horses which he left did
+not long survive; but the breeds of goats and pigs yet remain; many of
+the trinkets, part of the armour, and some of the cutlasses are also
+preserved; and the numerous coloured engravings of a large quarto Bible
+are objects of general attraction.
+
+"There is, perhaps, no place in the island to which greater interest is
+attached; for besides its association with the name just mentioned, on
+this spot was reared the first building in which the true God was
+publicly worshipped in Huaheine; and here, also, was erected the first
+school for the instruction of the benighted inhabitants in the knowledge
+of letters and the principles of Christianity."
+
+On leaving Huaheine the ships stood over to Ulietea, and the following
+day, November 3, entered the harbour of Ohamaneno.  Here they hauled
+close in with the shore, and made another attempt to get rid of their
+troublesome guests the rats.  The captain's old friend, Oreo, chief of
+the island, and his son-in-law, Pootoe, at once came off to visit him;
+the visit was returned, and amicable relations were soon established.
+In spite of this, however, thefts were continually committed; and other
+circumstances arose which seemed to threaten a rupture of this
+friendship.
+
+One of these events was the desertion of a marine, who, being on duty,
+went off, carrying his arms with him.  Captain Cook, with a few of his
+people, instantly pursued the man, fearing that he would have escaped to
+the mountains.  He was soon discovered, however, among the natives, who
+readily delivered him up to the captain.  But a more serious case of
+desertion took place a few days afterwards--that of a midshipman and a
+seaman.  The captain, thereupon, set off with two armed boats, but could
+not find the fugitives, hearing only that they had gone over to the
+neighbouring island of Bolabola.
+
+The next morning, the chief, his son and daughter, and his son-in-law
+came on board the Resolution, and the three last-mentioned were invited
+to the Discovery, with a view to their detention there till the
+deserters should be brought back--an act of high-handed injustice of
+which, one would suppose, no amount of condescension and familiarity on
+the part of the English was likely to efface the remembrance.
+
+At any rate, the step thus taken caused great consternation among the
+natives, many of whom, including many women, came off in canoes under
+the stern of the ship, and bewailed the captivity of the king's
+daughter.  Oreo, on his part, quickly aroused himself, and sent off
+canoes to Bolabola and elsewhere to find the fugitives.  The natives, in
+the meantime, in a spirit of natural retaliation, formed a plan for
+seizing Captain Cook while bathing, as was his custom every morning.
+Failing in this, they attempted to make prisoners of Captain Clerke and
+Mr Gore.  News, indeed, was brought off to the ships that they had been
+captured; and Mr King, with several armed boats, was immediately
+despatched to rescue them, when it was found that they had escaped the
+plot, probably owing their safety to the fact that Captain Clerke
+carried a pistol in his hand.  Oreo must have been aware of the plot,
+for he more than once asked Captain Cook why he did not go and bathe as
+usual.
+
+The chief at length set out for Bolabola, it being arranged that the
+ships should follow; but a strong wind kept them in harbour, and the
+next day he returned with the two deserters, who had gone from Bolabola
+to the small island of Toobaee, where they were taken by the father of
+Pootoe.  The three captives were then released.  Before leaving the
+island, Captain Cook presented Oreo with an English boar and sow and two
+goats.  Oreo and several chiefs took a passage on board the English
+ships to Bolabola, which was reached the day after they left Ulietea.  A
+large concourse of people, with the great chief Opoony in their midst,
+were ready to receive the English.
+
+One object Captain Cook had in putting in here was to obtain one of the
+anchors which Monsieur Bougainville had lost at Otaheite, and which,
+having been taken up by the people there, had been sent as a present to
+Opoony.  That chief, with remarkable honesty, positively refused to
+accept any present till the anchor had been seen, not believing it worth
+what was offered.  Cook's object was to manufacture it into tools and
+nails, of which he had run short.  He insisted on his presents being
+taken, and was glad to get the old iron for the object he had in view.
+Very many years afterwards the missionary Williams was, in the same
+manner, thankful to find an old anchor, out of which he manufactured the
+ironwork required for the missionary vessel he was building, the
+Messenger of Peace.
+
+As a ram had before been conveyed to the island, the captain made a
+present of a ewe to Opoony, hoping thus that the island might be stocked
+in time with a breed of sheep.
+
+He now prepared to take his departure for the north; and as this was the
+last visit paid by Cook to these islands his opinion may be quoted,--
+that it would have been better for the people of the Pacific Islands had
+they never been discovered by Europeans, than once having become
+acquainted with them and their goods to be afterwards left to their own
+resources.  "When their iron tools are worn out, and the use of their
+stone ones is forgotten, how are they to get others?" he asks; and adds,
+"it is incumbent, therefore, on Europeans, to visit them once in three
+or four years, in order to supply them with those conveniences which we
+have introduced to them."
+
+The minds of those enlightened and civilised visitors were occupied with
+the glory of their achievements as discoverers of hitherto unknown
+lands; their remaining thoughts, which they would have called patriotic,
+were principally occupied with the question how these discoveries might
+be turned to account for the profit and honour of England; and if a nook
+remained for a benevolent wish for "the savages," the wish was limited
+to the improvement of their material condition.  Otherwise, as the
+English discoverer found them, so he was willing that they should
+remain, satisfied with the idea that he had increased the productive
+powers of the different lands he visited.
+
+Thus, also, in the case of the wretched Omai, whose end we have seen.
+It seems scarcely to have entered the minds of those who, in England,
+petted and spoiled him, that he had a soul as valuable, or rather as
+invaluable, as theirs; and that he needed, as all need, the transforming
+influences of Divine grace to make him a future blessing, instead of a
+curse, to his poor countrymen.  We are told, indeed, of his being slow
+to receive Christian instruction; and we read also that, among his goods
+and chattels collected in England, he had a large quarto Bible, with
+coloured engravings--a book, however, which was a sealed book to him and
+his countrymen.
+
+The ships now stood north, and, on December 24, discovered an
+uninhabited island, with a lagoon.  It was hoped that turtle would
+abound here; they therefore came to an anchor.  The voyagers were not
+disappointed, and a considerable number were taken.  Two men, while thus
+employed, lost themselves in different parts of the island, and as there
+was not a drop of water to be found, they suffered greatly from thirst,
+especially one who would not drink turtle's blood.  They were both
+happily recovered.  The telescopes were landed, and on December 30 an
+eclipse of the sun was observed.  Not a trace of any inhabitants having
+ever been on the island could be discovered.  There were about thirty
+cocoanut trees, but the fruit was of an inferior quality.  Three hundred
+turtle were taken, and as many fish as could be consumed; but not a drop
+of fresh water could be found.  As Christmas was spent here, the name of
+Christmas Island was given to the new discovery.  It lies in latitude 1
+degrees 41 minutes North and longitude 157 degrees 15 minutes East.
+Some cocoanuts and yams were planted on the island, and some
+melon-seeds; while a bottle was deposited, with the names of the ships
+and the date of the visit.  The ships sailed thence on January 2, 1778,
+and proceeded northward.  The wind blew faintly at first, and then
+freshened, and albatrosses, with other birds, were seen increasing in
+number--all indications of land being near, though none was seen till
+the 18th, when first one high island and then another hove in sight.  On
+the 19th the first seen bore east, several leagues distant, and being to
+windward could not be approached.  On standing towards the other, a
+third island was discovered in the direction of west-north-west.  At
+first it was doubtful whether the islands were inhabited, but that
+question was soon solved by the appearance of several canoes, which came
+alongside; but the people in them would not at first venture on board,
+though they willingly exchanged a few fish and some sweet potatoes for
+nails and other articles offered them.  They spoke the language of
+Otaheite and of the other islands lately visited.  They were of a brown
+colour, of an ordinary size, and the cast of their features was not
+unlike that of Europeans.  Some wore their hair long, others short, but
+all had stained it of a brown colour.  Some were slightly tattooed, and
+all wore the usual girdle, stained red, white, and black.  As the ships
+sailed along the coast, looking for a harbour, numerous villages were
+observed, with plantations of sugar-canes and plantains, while vast
+numbers of people crowded the shore, or collected in elevated places, to
+watch the ships.
+
+The next day, the ships again standing in, several natives ventured on
+board, and showed by the wild looks and gestures with which they
+regarded everything on board that they had never before been visited by
+Europeans.  They knew the value of iron, however, when they saw it, and
+it was supposed that they had gained their knowledge of it from the fact
+that the masts and spars of a ship with iron attached, and casks with
+iron hoops, had been cast on their shore.  They soon proved themselves
+to be daring thieves, and unhappily, a boat being sent on shore, on
+their attempting to seize the oars they were fired at, and one man was
+killed.  Of this circumstance Captain Cook was not informed at the time.
+
+As soon as Captain Cook landed, the people assembled fell flat on their
+faces; nor would they rise till by expressive gestures he urged them to
+do so.  He understood that this was the way they paid respect to their
+own great chiefs.  Having arranged about getting a supply of water, he
+walked with Messrs. Anderson and Wilder into the country, to visit an
+obelisk of wickerwork, fifty feet high, standing in a morai.  A native
+had been selected as a guide, and wherever they went the people fell
+prostrate before the captain.  The morai was similar to those seen at
+Otaheite.  In and about it were a number of idols, one having on its
+head what resembled an ancient helmet.  They ascertained, without doubt,
+that human sacrifices were offered up at these morais.  On the
+wickerwork were pieces of grey cloth, such as was generally offered to
+idols, and a piece of which had been pressed on the captain on landing.
+The next day, among other articles brought off, were some beautiful
+cloaks of red and other feathers, and helmets and caps of the same.
+
+Captain Cook, in his journal, expresses his belief that the people were
+cannibals.  This arose from seeing a man on board who had a piece of
+salted meat done up in a cloth, and which he said that he ate to do him
+good.  It seems to have been highly dried and seasoned, and to have been
+taken as a stimulant.
+
+The natives called their island Atooi, and Captain Cook gave the name of
+the Sandwich Islands to the whole group.  The friendly disposition of
+the natives was shown on all occasions, especially when three boats went
+on shore, and, bad weather coming on, were detained for several days.
+Five islands were seen on this occasion, and were distinguished by the
+names of Woahoo, Atooi, Oneeheow, Oreehoua, and Tahoora.  The islands
+were mostly high, well watered, and apparently thickly populated.
+
+It was found that the taboo existed with even greater vigour than at
+Tongataboo, for the people constantly asked, with signs of fear, whether
+anything they desired to see, and the English were unwilling to show,
+was taboo, or, as they pronounced the word, tafoo.
+
+On February 2, 1778, the ships left the Sandwich Islands, and stood
+towards the coast of America.
+
+On March 7, early in the morning, the long-looked-for coast of New
+Albion, so-called by Sir Francis Drake, hove in sight.  The ships stood
+along the coast, now off and now on again, with uncertain weather, till
+at length, on March 29, an inlet appeared in latitude 49 degrees 15
+minutes North, and longitude 126 degrees 35 minutes East.  The ships
+sailed up this inlet for several miles, when they cast anchor.  Natives
+came off in three canoes, shaped like Norway yawls.  Having drawn near,
+a person stood up in one of them and invited the strangers, in a speech
+and by gesture, to land, at the same time strewing handfuls of red
+feathers towards them, while his companions threw red dust in the same
+way.  The next day a large number of people came off, who all behaved in
+the most peaceable manner, and offered for sale a number of skins of
+bears, foxes, wolves, deer, racoon, polecats, martens, and sea otters.
+The difficulty was to find articles to exchange for these really
+valuable commodities, for the natives would receive nothing but metal,
+and, at last, insisted on having brass.  To supply them, whole suits of
+clothes were stripped of their buttons, bureaus of their handles, and
+copper kettles, tin canisters, and candlesticks went to wreck.  The
+ships required a great deal of repairs, and even some fresh masts, and
+for this purpose they were hauled close into the shore and securely
+moored.  The natives called this inlet Nootka Sound, but Captain Cook
+gave it the name of King George's Sound.
+
+Two persons were on board the ships at this time whose names afterwards
+became well-known--Mr Vancouver, then a midshipman of the Resolution,
+who afterwards, as Captain Vancouver, made many important discoveries on
+the coast then visited, and gave his name to a valuable island, now a
+colony of Great Britain; and Corporal Ledyard, whose travels in Siberia
+were of a very extraordinary character.
+
+The clothing of the people of Nootka Sound consisted of a dress of flax,
+fringed with fur, and reaching to the feet; and over it a cloak of the
+same substance, with a hole cut in it, through which the head was
+thrust, and which hung down over the shoulders and arms as low as the
+waist.  The head was covered with a hat like a truncated cone of
+matting, with a knob or tassel at the top, and strung under the chin.  A
+large cloak of bear or wolf skin was occasionally worn over all.  They
+also, at times, wore wooden masks.  Their habitations were made of
+planks loosely put together, about seven or eight feet in height in
+front, and higher at the back.  Several families resided in each, with a
+very slight division between them.  Each had its own bench, and in the
+centre was the fire, without hearth or chimney.  At the ends were seen
+trunks of trees, carved into hideous images, and rudely painted,
+supposed to be their gods, though but little veneration was paid them.
+Two silver spoons, of old Spanish manufacture, were obtained here from a
+native, who wore them as ornaments round his neck.
+
+The progress of the ships along this coast can be but briefly described.
+Although the mercury in the barometer fell very rapidly, Captain Cook
+was so anxious to put to sea that he kept to his purpose of sailing on
+April 26.  A perfect hurricane came on ere long, in which the Resolution
+sprang a serious leak.  When the weather moderated one pump kept it
+under.  The ships proceeded along the coast, and several islands and
+headlands were seen and named.
+
+The voyagers landed at several places, and had some intercourse with the
+natives.  One inlet, where the ships brought up, was named Prince
+William's Sound.  Here the natives made a daring attempt to plunder the
+Discovery, a mob of them getting on board, evidently under the
+impression that she was feebly guarded.  But before they had time to
+carry out their nefarious design, the crew came on deck with their
+cutlasses, and the plunderers went off in their canoes.
+
+Captain Cook, believing that it was too late in the year to do anything
+of importance in the way of fresh discoveries, resolved to return to the
+south, and wait at the Sandwich Islands till the next season.
+
+From Prince William's Sound the ships proceeded along the coast,
+steering south-west, and passing many more capes, till the mouth of a
+large river was found, up which they sailed.  A volcano was here seen,
+emitting smoke, but no fire.
+
+A number of natives, of no very prepossessing appearance, now came off
+the banks of the river to the ships, and a considerable quantity of
+skins were obtained from them.  It was held by some on board that this
+river might be a strait, leading to Hudson's Bay; and to settle this
+question Captain Cook sailed up it nearly seventy leagues from its
+mouth, at which distance it still seemed to be a river, and nothing
+more, upon which the explorers returned.  On June 1, Lieutenant King was
+sent on shore to display the royal flag, and to take possession of the
+country, as in former instances, in the name of the King of Great
+Britain.  In describing this inlet Captain Cook left a blank in the
+chart, and therefore the Earl of Sandwich directed that it should be
+called Cook's Inlet.
+
+Leaving Prince William's Sound, the next place reached was the island of
+Oonolaschka.  Here, at different times, some canoes came off with
+natives, who had bows of the European fashion, and delivered two Russian
+letters, the purport of which could not be understood.
+
+During the stay of the ships at this island a canoe was upset, and the
+occupant, a fine young man, was brought on board the Resolution, when,
+without hesitation, he entered the captain's cabin, and exchanged his
+wet garments for a European suit of clothes, which he put on with
+perfect ease.
+
+Soon after this the expedition suffered a very great loss in the death
+of Mr Anderson, the surgeon of the Resolution, who had long been
+suffering from consumption.  The ships were proceeding northward at the
+time, along the coast of Asia, but were compelled to return on account
+of the shallowness of the water.  An island in sight was called
+Anderson's Island, to perpetuate the memory of that gentleman.
+
+On the 9th the ships anchored under a point of land to which the name of
+Cape Prince of Wales was given, and which was considered the most
+western point of America.  It is only thirteen leagues distant from the
+eastern cape of Siberia.  Thence they stood over to the coast of Siberia
+to the country of Tschutski.  Again sailing, the ships steered to the
+east, and on the 18th fell in with the ice, which, in latitude 70
+degrees 44 minutes, was as compact as a wall, and ten or twelve feet
+high, being much higher farther to the north.  It was covered with
+sea-horses, a number of which were caught, and, in spite of the
+prejudices of some of the crew, were found to be superior to salt pork.
+Cook continued to traverse the Arctic Sea, beyond Behring's Straits, in
+various directions till the 29th, when the ice beginning to form rapidly
+he abandoned all hope of attaining his object that year.
+
+On October 3 the ships anchored in the harbour of Samganoodha, in the
+island of Oonolaschka.  The carpenters at once set to work to repair the
+ships.  While they lay here, each of the captains received the present
+of a well-known Russian dish.  It consisted of a salmon, highly
+seasoned, and baked in a coating of rye bread like a loaf.  The loaves
+were accompanied by notes in Russian.  A few bottles of rum, wine, and
+porter were sent in return by Corporal Ledyard, who was directed to make
+the Russians understand that the strangers were English and their
+friends, and to gain all the information in his power.  On the 14th a
+visit was received from a Russian of considerable ability.  Cook
+entrusted to his care a letter and chart for the Lords Commissioners of
+the Admiralty, which were duly delivered.  The natives of this island
+were the best behaved and most peaceably disposed of any yet met with,
+while not one of them was found guilty of an act of dishonesty.  They
+were, however, far from moral in their conduct.
+
+Samganoodha Harbour was left on October 20, and the ships proceeded
+south towards the Sandwich Islands.  Cook's intention was to spend the
+winter there, and to return to Kamtschatka by the middle of May.  In
+case of separation he directed Captain Clerke to meet him at the
+Sandwich Islands for the first place of rendezvous, and the harbour of
+Fetropaulowska, in Kamtschatka, for the second.  The rigging of the
+ships had now become very bad; on board the Discovery the main-tack gave
+way, killed one man, and wounded the boatswain and two others.
+
+On November 25 one of the Sandwich Islands, called by the natives Mowee,
+hove in sight.  Several canoes came off, belonging to a chief named
+Terreeoboo; but as another island was discovered, called Owhyhee, [now
+altered in spelling to Hawaii] which it was found possible to fetch, the
+ships stood towards it, and their visitors accordingly left them.  On
+the morning of December 2 the summits of the mountains of Owhyhee were
+seen, covered with snow.  On the evening an eclipse of the moon was
+observed.  For several weeks the ships continued plying round the
+island, bartering with the natives, who came off with hogs, fowls,
+fruit, and roots.  On January 16, 1779, a bay being discovered, the
+masters were sent in to examine it, and having reported favourably, the
+ships, on the next day, came to an anchor in Karakakooa Bay.
+
+The ships were crowded with visitors, but not a single person had a
+weapon of any sort.  There must have been at least a thousand about the
+two ships, and one of them took the rudder out of a boat and made off
+with it.  Cook ordered some muskets and four-pounders to be fired over
+the canoe which was escaping.  The multitude, however, seemed more
+surprised than frightened.
+
+Besides those who had come off in canoes the shore of the bay was
+covered with spectators, and many hundreds were swimming round the
+ships, like shoals of fish.  Few of the voyagers now regretted that they
+had been unable to find a north-west passage home in the summer, as they
+"thus had it in their power to revisit the Sandwich Islands, and to
+enrich the voyage with a discovery which, though the last, seemed in
+many respects to be the most important that had hitherto been made by
+Europeans throughout the extent of the Pacific Ocean."
+
+This paragraph concludes Captain Cook's journal; they were probably the
+last words he ever wrote.  Captain King is our chief authority for the
+remaining transactions of the voyage.
+
+Among the chiefs who attached themselves to the English was a young man
+named Pareea, who introduced himself as an officer of the king of the
+island, then gone on a military expedition to Mowee.  That he had great
+influence among his people was evident, for so large a number of people
+had collected on one side of the Discovery that they made her heel over;
+Captain Cook pointed out the fact to him, and he immediately cleared the
+ship.  Another chief, the next day, cleared the Resolution in the same
+way; and one man loitering behind, he took him up in his arms and threw
+him into the sea.  They brought on board a third chief, once a warrior,
+now a priest, named Koah, a little old man of emaciated figure, his red
+eyes and scaly skin showing he was a hard drinker of cava.  Not far from
+the shore was a temple, or morai.  It was a square, solid pile of
+stones, about forty yards long, twenty broad, and fourteen in height.
+The top was flat and well-paved, and surrounded by a wooden rail, on
+which were fixed the skulls of the victims sacrificed on the death of
+their chiefs.  At one end was a kind of scaffold, and on the opposite
+side, towards the sea, two small houses with a covered communication.
+At the entrance were two large wooden images, with features violently
+distorted, and on the head of each was a large piece of carved wood, of
+a conical form, inverted.  The lower part was without form, and wrapped
+round with a red cloth.  Not far off, in a retired grove by the side of
+a pool, was a collection of huts, inhabited by priests who attended this
+temple, of which Koah was the chief.  There were two villages on the
+shores of the bay--one on the north point, called Kowrooa, and at the
+bottom of the bay one still larger, called Kakooa.
+
+Our narrative is now drawing near to the tragic scene which terminated
+both the labours and life of Captain James Cook.  But, to understand
+what led to that event, a preliminary explanation must be given.
+
+The natives of Owhyhee had a legend to the effect that a certain god,
+Rono, or Orono, formerly lived near Karakakooa Bay, and that, having
+killed his wife in a fit of jealousy, remorse drove him from the island.
+He set sail in a strangely shaped canoe, promising that he would return
+on a floating island, furnished with all that man could desire.  When,
+therefore, the English ships appeared, their commander was supposed to
+be the long-absent Rono, come to restore peace and prosperity to the
+country.
+
+The priest Koah having dined on board the Resolution, accompanied
+Captain Cook and Mr King on shore--Mr King being taken for the son of
+the former.  They were met by four men, having wands tipped with dog's
+hair, and who shouted a short sentence in which the word Orono was
+plainly distinguishable and frequently repeated.  During this progress
+the crowd either rushed away as in fear, or fell prostrate on the ground
+around the party.  Koah led the way into the morai, and, chanting a
+hymn, took the captain to a sort of altar, on which were arranged twelve
+idols in a semicircle, while on a table, before the centre one, which
+nearly resembled the idols of Otaheite, lay a putrid hog.  A tall young
+man, with a beard, Kaireekeea by name, having presented Cook to the
+idols, old Koah put the putrid hog to his nose, and then let it drop.
+At this time a procession approached, bearing a hog and red cloth.
+Kaireekeea went forward to meet them, when they all prostrated
+themselves.  The hog then was offered to the captain by Koah, who wound
+the red cloth round him.  Chanting followed.  Captain Cook, meanwhile,
+had considerable difficulty in keeping his seat upon the rotten
+scaffolding.  They then descended, and as Koah passed the images he
+snapped his fingers at them, and said something in a sneering tone.  He,
+however, prostrated himself before the centre figure, and kissed it, and
+induced the captain to do the same.  The captain and Mr King were then
+led to another division of the morai, where, in a sunk space, three or
+four feet deep, they took their seats between two wooden idols, Koah
+holding up one of the captain's arms, and King the other.  While here
+another procession arrived, with a baked hog and vegetables.  Cook put
+an end to the ceremony as soon as he could, and returned on board.
+
+No doubt the proceedings of the old priest and the people were in some
+measure incomprehensible to Captain Cook; but it is certain that, in
+bearing a prominent part in the mummery just narrated, he must have been
+aware that he was encouraging heathen idolatry and hero-worship in its
+grossest forms.  It is not to be supposed that he was acquainted with
+the legend of Rono; but the conduct of the people must have shown him
+their utter debasement, and he can scarcely have failed to perceive that
+by submitting to their ceremonies, and taking a part in them, he was
+lowering himself to their level.
+
+It is probable that Captain Cook expected, by yielding to the
+superstitions of the natives, to obtain greater facilities for trading,
+and keeping up amicable relations with them.  If so, the subsequent
+events prove how baseless were these anticipations, while the reader
+will scarcely fail to be reminded of the striking Scripture narrative of
+the king of whom the people shouted, "It is the voice of a god, and not
+of a man!" and who "gave not God the glory."
+
+The day following that on which the events described took place, Mr
+King, with a company of marines, landed, and erected an observatory near
+the morai, the ground being marked off by the priests.  For some unknown
+reason--but one probably connected with the previous exhibition--the
+entire bay was tabooed for a day or two, and no canoes ventured off with
+provisions.  The priests, however, sent to the observatory, and also to
+the ships, a regular supply of hogs and vegetables for Orono, as if they
+were discharging a religious duty, and would take nothing in return.
+Whenever, too, after this, Captain Cook went on shore, he was attended
+by one of the priests, who gave notice to the people to prostrate
+themselves; and inferior chiefs often requested to be allowed to make
+offerings of hogs, which they did with evident marks of fear in their
+countenances.
+
+On January 24, 1779, the bay was again tabooed on account of the arrival
+of the king, Terreeoboo, who soon came off privately in a canoe, with
+his wife and children.  He was found to be the same infirm old man who
+had come on board the Resolution when the ships were off Mowee.  The
+next day the king came off in state, on board a large canoe, attended by
+two others.
+
+In the first he himself came, dressed, as were his attendant chiefs, in
+rich feathered cloaks, and armed with long spears and helmets.  In the
+second were Kaoo, the chief of the priests, and his brethren, with idols
+of wickerwork of gigantic size, covered with feathers of different
+colours and red cloth.  Their eyes were large pearl oysters, with a
+black mark fixed in the centre; while their mouths were marked with
+double rows of dogs' fangs.  The whole had a most hideous appearance.
+In a third canoe were hogs and vegetables.  The visitors, however, did
+not go on board, but, inviting the captain on shore, returned.  Mr
+King, who was at the observatory, ordered out the guard to receive the
+party.  The king then threw a superb cloak over the captain's shoulders,
+and placed a helmet on his head; he then spread at his feet six other
+cloaks, all exceedingly beautiful; and his attendants brought four hogs,
+with sugar-canes, bread-fruit, and cocoanuts.  The ceremony was
+concluded by the king exchanging names with Cook.
+
+An old seaman, greatly attached to Captain Cook, died here, and was
+buried in the morai, with the usual funeral service read over him; but
+the priests thought they ought to do their part, and threw a dead hog
+and plantains into the grave, and for several nights sacrificed hogs,
+and chanted their hymns.
+
+When the ships were about to sail a magnificent present of provisions
+was made to the captain; and Terreeoboo and Kaoo waited on him and
+entreated that he would leave his supposed son, Mr King, behind.  On
+February 4 the ship sailed, but met with very bad weather, during which
+they picked up two canoes, driven off the land, the people in them
+nearly exhausted.  In this gale, also, the Resolution sprang her
+foremast, and fearing that, should the weather continue, another harbour
+might not be found, Cook returned, on the 10th of the month, to
+Karakakooa Bay.
+
+It was observed by some of the explorers on this occasion that the
+conduct of the natives had now undergone an ominous change.  The bay was
+found to be under taboo, and several circumstances occurred which gave
+evidence that, from some cause or other, the English were regarded by
+the natives with suspicion.  And this breach was unhappily widened by
+some of the common causes of dispute.  For instance, some people from
+the island visiting the Discovery, after the taboo was removed, went off
+with several articles they had stolen, whereupon the ship opened fire on
+the fugitives, and a chief on shore was killed.  The stolen articles
+were soon returned, but an officer commanding a party on shore not
+knowing this seized a canoe belonging to Pareea.  In a squabble which
+ensued that chief was knocked down.  Captain Cook, also, not knowing
+that the articles had been brought back, followed the supposed thieves
+for several miles in the interior, when, on its getting dark, he
+returned unmolested on board.
+
+The next morning the Discovery's cutter was found to have been carried
+off, and Captain Cook resolved to seize the king, and hold him captive
+till the boat was returned.  For this purpose, loading his
+double-barrelled gun, he went on shore with Mr Phillips and nine
+marines.  Mr King ordered the marines to remain within the tents, to
+load their pieces with ball, and not to quit their arms.  He then went
+up to the huts of the priests, and endeavoured to quiet their alarm,
+assuring them that no one would be hurt.  Captain Cook, meantime,
+proceeded to the king's house, and found him just awake.  He easily
+persuaded the old man to come on board with two of his sons; but as they
+were embarking, one of his wives came down and entreated him not to go
+off.
+
+A vast number of people now began to collect, armed with all sorts of
+weapons and their war mats.  Captain Cook held the king's hand, and
+pressed him to come on; but finding that the lives of many natives might
+be sacrificed if he persisted in the attempt, he abandoned it, and only
+now thought of how he might best draw off his party.  Unfortunately, the
+boats stationed in the bay had fired at some canoes trying to get out,
+and killed a chief of the first rank.  This news quickly reached the
+hostile natives.  Mr Phillips, on this, withdrew his men to some rocks
+close to the water-side.
+
+The natives now began to throw stones, and one man, especially,
+threatened the captain with his dagger.  In defence he fired.  As the
+barrel was only loaded with small shot it killed no one.  The other
+barrel had a ball in it, with which a man was killed.  By this time the
+marines had begun to fire, and the captain turned round, either to order
+them to cease or to direct the boats to come in, when a tall man struck
+him on the back with a long club, and he fell forward on his hands and
+knees, letting his fowling-piece drop.  A chief with a long dagger now
+plunged it into his back; he fell under the water, and the natives, who
+crowded round, prevented him from rising.  Nothing more was seen of him.
+All was now horror and confusion.  The natives pressed on the marines,
+four of whom were killed before they could reach the boats, and another,
+who could not swim, remained struggling in the water, when Lieutenant
+Phillips, with heroic gallantry, leaped overboard, and though badly
+wounded himself brought the man safely on board the pinnace.  Though the
+boats still kept up a hot fire, the chiefs were seen plunging their
+daggers in the body of Cook, seemingly with the idea that they were
+consecrated by the death of so great a man.  It was said that old Koah,
+who had been long suspected, had been seen going about with a dagger hid
+under his cloak, for the purpose, it was supposed, of killing Captain
+Cook or some of his officers.
+
+All this time Lieutenant King, with a party of men, had remained on
+shore, at the observatory near the morai.  Before long the natives began
+to attack them, but met with so warm a reception that they willingly
+agreed to a truce.  As soon as the murderers of Cook had retired, a
+party of young midshipmen pulled to the shore in a skiff, where they saw
+the bodies of the marines lying without sign of life; but the danger of
+landing was too great to be risked.
+
+Mr King went on shore to try and negotiate for the body of Cook.  On
+the 15th a man who had been his constant attendant came off with some
+human flesh, saying that the rest had been burnt, but that the head and
+bones and hands were in possession of the king.  The natives even now
+would not believe that Rono was killed.  When they saw him fall they
+cried out, "This is not Rono!"  Others inquired when he would come back,
+and whether he would punish them.  An order had been given to fire some
+houses, but unfortunately the flames communicated to the priests'
+dwellings, all of which were consumed, though they had been the best
+friends to the English.  Several people were shot, attempting to escape.
+On the 18th King Terreeoboo sent a chief with presents to sue for
+peace; and on the 20th the hands and various parts of the body of Cook
+were brought on board, wrapped in a quantity of fine cloth, and covered
+with a cloak of black and white feathers.  The feet and other parts were
+returned the next day, and being placed in a coffin they were committed
+to the deep, with the usual naval honours.
+
+We may imagine the feelings of the members of the expedition as they
+witnessed the ceremony, and thought that he who had been so long their
+chief, and who had led them successfully through so many dangers, was no
+more.  The officers might have felt many vain regrets; they might have
+asked themselves whether all had been done that could have been done to
+save the valuable life which had been so cruelly sacrificed, and whether
+the object which had been attempted was adequate to the risk that had
+been run.  So furious was the rage of the crews of the two ships that
+they almost mutinied against their officers, when prevented from going
+on shore, as they desired, to wreak their vengeance on the heads of the
+natives.  It is remarkable that Captain Clerke had received orders to go
+on shore and seize the king; but, suffering from the consumption which
+was rapidly hurrying him to his grave, he was too weak to leave his
+cabin; and, on hearing this, Cook immediately exclaimed that he would go
+himself.
+
+Captain Cook was in the fifty-first year of his age when he was thus
+suddenly cut off.  He was a man of great intelligence, perseverance,
+energy, and determination.  He possessed a calm judgment and cool
+courage under the most trying difficulties.  As a seaman he was probably
+unsurpassed.  By employing every moment he could snatch from his
+professional duties, with the aid of such books as came to his hand, he
+made himself a good mathematician and a first-rate astronomer, while few
+officers of his day could have equalled him as a marine surveyor and
+draughtsman.  All subsequent navigators, who have visited the regions he
+traversed, have borne evidence to the great accuracy of his surveys, and
+the exactness with which he laid down on his charts the numerous lands
+he discovered.
+
+Various opinions have been expressed as to Captain Cook's temper.  That
+he was, at times, hasty and irritable, there seems to be no doubt; but
+this fault was greatly counterbalanced by his kind-hearted and humane
+disposition.  He seems to have had the power of attracting both officers
+and men to his person; hence many who had accompanied him in his first
+voyage volunteered to serve under him again in his subsequent
+expeditions.  At the same time he was stern and determined, though
+always just; and he considered it his duty, when necessary, to carry out
+to the full the rigid discipline of the Navy in those days.  He was a
+kind and affectionate husband and father, and it is said that his
+portrait at Greenwich Hospital, from which numerous copies have been
+made, does not convey a satisfactory idea of the ordinary expression of
+his countenance.  It was painted, at the earnest desire of Sir Joseph
+Banks, by Sir Nathaniel Dance, just before Cook left England on his last
+expedition, and as the mind of the navigator was probably far away on
+board his vessels, the grave and preoccupied expression which the
+portrait exhibits is fully accounted for.
+
+His ability as a seaman, and his calmness in danger, inspired the most
+perfect confidence in all who served under him, so that in times of the
+greatest trial he could always reckon on being implicitly obeyed; it is
+said that, placing reliance on his officers, after he had given his
+directions, he would retire to rest, and sleep as soundly as though no
+danger were near.  Such is the character drawn of the great navigator by
+those who knew him; but we shall form a more just estimate of him if we
+consider the work he accomplished.  We have only to compare a chart of
+the Pacific before Cook's time, and to note the wide blanks and the
+erroneous position of lands, with one drawn from his surveys, to see at
+a glance the extent of his discoveries; but a still higher estimation
+will be formed of them if we judge of them by their value to the present
+generation.  Let us consider the importance of his admirable survey of
+the whole eastern coast of New Holland, showing its vast size and
+insular character.  Not less important was his survey of the islands of
+New Zealand, which, with New Holland, or Australia, are now among the
+most valuable possessions of the British crown.  He discovered New
+Caledonia, and surveyed most of the islands of the New Hebrides, and
+other islands in the Austral Ocean.  He made known to the world the
+larger portion of the Friendly Islands, or Tonga group, as also of the
+Marquesas.  Nothing can surpass the general accuracy of his description
+of the habits and customs of the inhabitants of Otaheite.  He completed
+the discovery and survey of the Society Islands.  He was successful in
+his search for Easter, or Davis Island, which had in vain been
+looked-for by several previous navigators.  He visited the groups of the
+Low, or Coral Archipelago, and discovered the numerous separate islands
+of Norfolk, Botany, Palmerston, Hervey, Savage, Mangaia, Wateeoo,
+Otakootaia, Turtle, Toobouai, and Christmas.  His most important
+discovery was his last--that of the Sandwich Islands--since become an
+independent and semi-civilised kingdom.  He sailed along the North
+American coast, where, from unavoidable circumstances, his surveys were
+less accurate than usual.  They were, however, completed, many years
+after, by his follower Captain Vancouver.  He ascertained the breadth of
+the strait between America and Asia to be eighteen leagues, a point left
+unsettled by Behring, and many years passed before any navigator
+penetrated farther to the north than he had done.  His explorations in
+the Antarctic Ocean showed a hardihood and determination seldom
+surpassed.  He brought to light Sandwich Land, settled the position of
+Kerguelen's Land, as also the Isle Grande of La Roche, while he made a
+survey, long unsurpassed, of the southern shores of Tierra del Fuego.
+Such is a rough and rapid sketch of the discoveries made by Cook daring
+his three voyages; but what he, with justice, chiefly prided himself on
+was the means by which he successfully maintained his crews in perfect
+health during his second and third voyages; and it is satisfactory to
+know that his successor in the command of the expedition, by following
+his system, brought home his ships' companies with few or no sick among
+them.  [Note 3.]
+
+As soon as the remains of Captain Cook had been committed to the deep
+the taboo which had been placed on the bay by the chief Eappo was
+removed, at the request of Captain Clerke, who said that, as the Orono
+was buried, the remembrance of what had passed was buried with him.  As
+soon as it was known that the people might bring their provisions as
+usual the ships were surrounded by canoes, and many chiefs came on
+board, expressing great sorrow at what had happened, and their
+satisfaction at the reconciliation which had taken place.  Several
+friends, who did not come themselves, sent presents of large hogs and
+other provisions.  Among the rest came the treacherous old Koah, but he
+was refused admittance.
+
+Captain Clerke was anxious to visit the islands to leeward before the
+news of the events which had occurred at Owhyhee could reach them, and a
+bad effect be produced.  He therefore gave orders to unmoor, and every
+preparation was made for quitting the bay.  In the evening all the
+natives were sent on shore, and Eappo and the friendly Kaireekeea took
+an affectionate farewell.  As the ships stood out of the bay the natives
+collected in great numbers on the shore, and received the last farewells
+of the English with every mark of affection and goodwill.
+
+The first island visited was that of Woahoo, which was found to be high
+and picturesque, and thickly populated; the next was the island of
+Atooi.  A party was here sent on shore to fill the casks with water,
+when the natives collected in great numbers, threatening to attack them,
+and it was with difficulty that they were enabled to reach the boats and
+return on board ship.  The next day, however, some chiefs arrived on the
+spot; and the day after Mr King, who commanded the party, going on
+shore, found the whole distance to the watering-place marked with little
+white flags, and the English were not in the slightest degree molested.
+While the ships were at this island it was ascertained that some goats
+which were left there at the first visit of the English soon increased
+in number, and had bidden fair to stock the island, when a quarrel took
+place about them, and the animals were killed.  A contest between two
+tribes or families was still going on about the matter, in which several
+people had lost their lives.
+
+It was now March 12, and preparations were made for quitting the islands
+and proceeding on the search for a passage, through Behring's Straits,
+into the Atlantic.  There was, from the first, very little prospect of
+its success.  Captain Clerke was sinking rapidly with consumption, and
+every one but himself knew that his days were numbered.  Still, in spite
+of his weakness, he kept up his spirits in a wonderful manner, and
+though fully aware that the cold climate he was going to encounter would
+prove injurious to his health, this did not prevent him from attempting
+to carry out the instructions of his late chief to the utmost of his
+power.
+
+On March 15 the ships left the Sandwich group, and steered for the
+harbour of Saint Peter and Saint Paul.  The ships encountered very
+severe weather on approaching the coast of Siberia.  The rigging and
+decks were so completely coated with ice that it was not without great
+difficulty the ropes could be handled, and the crew sensibly felt the
+change from the warm temperature to which they had been so long
+accustomed.  To add to their difficulties, the Resolution sprang a
+serious leak, and split her second suit of sails.  As the decks below
+were deluged with water, the only place in which the sail-makers could
+work was in the cabin of their dying captain.  At length, on April 28,
+the harbour of Saint Peter and Saint Paul was reached.  The town was
+found to consist of about thirty miserable log huts, and small conical
+buildings raised on poles.  The commandant was a sergeant, with a few
+men under him.  The appearance of the expedition at first caused great
+consternation among the inhabitants.  This arose from the circumstance
+that the celebrated Polish exile Beniowski had, a short time before,
+made his escape from Bolcheretsk with a couple of vessels and a
+considerable number of men.  It was supposed that the exploring squadron
+was in some way connected with him.  Another opinion was that the
+strangers were French, at that time enemies of the Russians.
+Fortunately, a German, of the name of Port, was at the place, and as Mr
+Webber spoke German well, the intercommunication was speedily
+established, and as soon as the Russians were convinced that their
+visitors were English nothing could exceed their kindness and
+hospitality.  As provisions were, however, very dear here, Captain
+Clerke despatched Captain Gore and Mr King, with Mr Webber and the
+German, to visit Major Behm, the Governor of Bolcheretsk, in order to
+obtain a supply through him.  They travelled partly in boats and canoes,
+and partly in sleighs drawn by dogs, and were well wrapped up in skins
+to protect them from the cold.
+
+On their arrival at Bolcheretsk, they were received with the greatest
+kindness and hospitality by Major Behm and the officers of the garrison.
+These kind-hearted and liberal men would not allow the English to pay
+for such stores as the town could produce.  Among other things, they
+presented the ships' companies with three bags of tobacco, of a
+hundredweight each, and loaf-sugar for the officers, while Madame Behm
+sent several delicacies to poor Captain Clerke.  Major Behm accompanied
+the English officers to the ships, and made arrangements that stores
+should be sent from Okotsk to meet them on their return, should they
+fail to discover the passage of which they were in search.  It is worthy
+of remark that when the English seamen received the tobacco which had
+been sent them from Bolcheretsk, they begged that their own allowance of
+grog might be stopped, and that it might be presented to the Russian
+garrison, who, they understood, were in want of spirits.  Knowing the
+value a sailor sets on his grog, the feeling of gratitude which prompted
+the proposal will be the better appreciated.  The generous Russian
+would, however, accept but a very small portion of what was offered.
+
+As Major Behm was on the point of returning to Saint Petersburg, Captain
+Gierke, feeling sure that he was a man of the strictest honour, resolved
+to entrust him with a copy of the journal of the voyage, and an account
+of all transactions up to the arrival of the ships in the harbour of
+Saint Peter and Saint Paul.  Mr Bayley and Mr King also sent home an
+account of all the astronomical and other scientific observations made
+during the voyage.  These were duly delivered, within a few months from
+the time of their being entrusted to Major Behm.
+
+It is remarkable that on the arrival of the expedition in the harbour of
+Saint Peter and Saint Paul, the whole Russian garrison of the place were
+found to be suffering more or less from scurvy, many of the men being in
+the last stage of that disease.  They were immediately placed under the
+care of the English surgeons, and, by a free use of sour-krout and
+sweet-wort, they nearly all quickly recovered.  Through the exertions of
+Major Behm, a supply of rye-flour was furnished to the ships, and a
+bullock was sent on board, which was served out to the men on Sunday.
+It was the first fresh beef they had tasted since leaving the Cape of
+Good Hope, two years and a half before.  Twenty head of cattle were
+afterwards sent on board, with other supplies, and the English
+themselves caught with their nets an abundance of fine fish.
+
+On June 12 the ships were unmoored for the purpose of putting to sea,
+but it was not till the 16th that they were able to get clear of the
+bay.  The eruption of a neighbouring volcano took place at this time,
+which covered the decks with cinders and small stones.  From the first
+the ships encountered bad weather.  The intense cold severely tried the
+crews.  The men had taken no care of their fur jackets and other warm
+clothing, but they had been collected by their officers, and cased up in
+casks, to be produced when most required.
+
+The expedition passed through Behring's Straits on July 5, and having
+run along the coast of Asia, stretched across to that of America, with
+the intention of exploring it between the latitudes 68 degrees and 69
+degrees.  In this attempt, however, the explorers were disappointed,
+being stopped, on the 7th, by a large and compact field of ice connected
+with the land.  They therefore altered their course to the westward, in
+the hopes of finding some opening, and thus being able to get round to
+the north of the ice.  They continued sailing in that direction till the
+9th, for nearly forty leagues, without discovering an opening.  Still
+their dying chief persevered in his efforts till the 27th, although
+unable to penetrate farther north than 70 degrees 33 minutes, which was
+five leagues short of the point which had been gained the previous year.
+In the attempt the Discovery was nearly lost, and received very severe
+damage.  She became so entangled by several large pieces of ice that her
+way was stopped, and immediately dropping bodily to leeward she fell
+broadside on to the edge of a considerable mass.  At the same time,
+there being an open sea to windward, the surf made her strike violently
+on it.  The mass of ice, however, at length either so far removed, or
+broke, as to set the ship at liberty, when another attempt to escape was
+made; but, unfortunately, before she gathered sufficient way to be under
+command she again fell to leeward on another fragment.  The swell now
+making it unsafe to lie to windward of the ice, and there being no
+prospect of getting clear, the ship was pushed into a small opening, the
+sails were furled, and she was made fast with ice-hooks.  In this
+dangerous position she was seen at noon by her consort, a fresh gale
+driving more ice towards her.  It is easy to conceive the anxiety felt
+on board the Resolution, which was kept in the neighbourhood, firing a
+gun every half-hour.  At last, towards evening, there was a shift of
+wind, and by nine o'clock the Discovery appeared, having, by setting all
+sail, forced her way out of the ice.  She had, however, lost a
+considerable amount of sheathing from the bows, and had become very
+leaky from the blows received.
+
+While in these latitudes several sea-horses were killed, which the
+seamen were persuaded, without much difficulty, to eat in preference to
+their salt provisions.  Two white bears were also killed, which, though
+having a somewhat fishy taste, were considered dainties.  Finding that
+all prospect of carrying the ships through any passage which might exist
+to the eastward was utterly hopeless, Captain Gierke announced his
+intention of returning to Awatska Bay to repair damages, and thence to
+continue the voyage in the direction of Japan.  Joy brightened every
+countenance as soon as these resolutions were made known.  All were
+heartily tired of a navigation full of danger, in which the utmost
+perseverance had not been repaid with the slightest prospect of success.
+Notwithstanding the tedious voyage to be made, and the immense distance
+to be run, every one seemed to feel and speak as though they were once
+again approaching the shores of Old England.
+
+There was one, however--the gallant commander of the expedition, Captain
+Clerke--who was destined never again to see his native land.  On the
+17th he was too weak to get out of bed, and therefore gave directions
+that all orders should be received from Mr King.  On the morning of
+August 22 he breathed his last, to the deep regret of all who served
+under him.  He had spent the whole of his life at sea, from his earliest
+boyhood.  He had been in several actions, and in one, between the
+Bellona and Courageux, having been stationed in the mizzen-top, he was
+carried overboard with the mast, but was taken up unhurt.  He was a
+midshipman in the Dolphin, commanded by Commodore Byron, on his first
+voyage round the world, and afterwards served on the American station.
+In 1768 he made his second voyage round the world, in the Endeavour,
+under Captain Cook, and returned a lieutenant.  His third voyage of
+circumnavigation was in the Resolution, and on her return, in 1775, he
+was promoted to the rank of Master and Commander.  When Captain Cook's
+third expedition was determined on he was appointed to command under
+him.
+
+On the 23rd the ships again anchored in the harbour of Saint Peter and
+Saint Paul.  No sooner had they brought up than their old friend the
+sergeant came on board, and all were greatly affected when he announced
+that he had brought some fruit for their captain.
+
+The charge of the expedition now devolved on Captain Gore, who took
+command of the Resolution, while Captain King was appointed to the
+Discovery.  Captain Gore immediately sent off an express to Bolcheretsk,
+requesting to be supplied with sixteen head of cattle.  The stores from
+the Discovery being landed, attempts were made to repair the damages she
+had received.  On stripping off the sheathing, three feet of the third
+strake under the wale were found to be stove in, and the timbers within
+started.  The farther they proceeded in removing the sheathing, the more
+they discovered the decayed state of the ship's hull.  The chief damage
+was repaired with a birch tree, which had been cut down when they were
+there before, and was the only one in the neighbourhood large enough for
+the purpose; but Captain King gave orders that no more sheathing should
+be ripped off, being apprehensive that further decayed planks might be
+met with which it would be impossible to replace.  This condition of his
+ship could not have been a pleasant subject of contemplation to the
+commander, when he considered that he had yet more than half the circuit
+of the world to make before he could reach home.
+
+Large quantities of salmon were now caught with the seine, and salted
+for sea stores, and the sea-horse blubber was also boiled down for oil,
+all the candles having long been expended.
+
+On Sunday, the 29th, the remains of Captain Gierke were interred with
+all the solemnity possible, under a tree, in a spot which the Russian
+Papa, or priest of the settlement, said he believed would form the
+centre of a new church it was proposed shortly to build.  The officers
+and men of both ships walked in procession to the grave, attended by the
+Russian garrison, while the ships fired minute guns, and the service
+being ended the marines fired three volleys.
+
+The remainder of the time in the harbour was spent in waiting for
+stores, in further repairing the ships, in two or three bear-hunting
+expeditions, in entertaining the garrison and natives in return for the
+hospitality which had been received, and in receiving a visit from the
+Acting Governor and other Russian officers.
+
+On October 9, the ships having cleared the entrance of Awatska Bay,
+steered to the southward for the purpose of examining the islands to the
+north of Japan, and then proceeding on to Macao.  The condition of the
+ships' hulls and rigging rendered it dangerous to make any more
+prolonged explorations.  Even the larger part of this plan it was found
+impossible to follow, for, strong westerly winds blowing, they were
+driven off the land, and after passing Japan they anchored at Macao.
+Here, not without some delay and difficulty, they procured the stores
+they required; Captain King having to make an excursion to Canton for
+the purpose.  He here sold about twenty sea otter and other skins,
+belonging chiefly to their deceased commanders, for the sum of eight
+hundred dollars.  On returning, he found that the larger portion of
+those on board had been sold, and had realised not much less than two
+thousand pounds.  The large profits on the skins, which had been looked
+upon as of little value beforehand, had so excited the minds of the men
+that two of them made off with a six-oared cutter, for the purpose of
+returning to North America; and as they were not overtaken, they
+probably very soon perished.
+
+The reports brought home by the expedition probably set on foot that
+trade in furs with the west coast of North America which afterwards
+became of considerable importance.  In consequence of hearing, at Macao,
+of the war which had broken out between England and France, the ships
+mounted all their guns; but Captain Gore being informed, at the same
+time, that the French had issued orders to their cruisers that the ships
+under the command of Captain Cook should be treated as belonging to
+neutral or friendly powers, resolved himself to preserve, throughout the
+remainder of the voyage, the strictest neutrality.
+
+The expedition left Macao on January 12, 1780, and on the 20th anchored
+in a harbour of Pulo Condore.  Here a supply of buffaloes was obtained.
+They were large animals, and very wild.  Two were kept on board the
+Discovery by Captain King, who intended to take them to England.  They
+soon became perfectly tame, but, unfortunately, one of them suffered a
+severe injury, and both were killed.
+
+On leaving Pulo Condore the ships passed through the Straits of Banca,
+in sight of the island of Sumatra.  The Resolution brought up off the
+island of Cracatoa, in the Straits of Sunda, and filled up her casks
+with water, which the Discovery was unable to do, in consequence of
+being becalmed.  On reaching Cape Town the English were treated with the
+same kindness and attention which they had received on their former
+visits.  Here they obtained confirmation of the intelligence that the
+French had given directions to their cruisers not to molest them.
+Having taken their stores on board, they sailed out of Table Bay on May
+9, and on June 12 passed the equator for the fourth time during their
+voyage.
+
+The ships made the coast of Ireland on August 12, but southerly winds
+compelled them to run to the north.  On October 4 the ships arrived at
+the Nore, after an absence of four years, two months, and twenty-two
+days.  During that time the Resolution had lost but five men by
+sickness, three of whom were in a precarious state of health when
+leaving England, while the Discovery did not lose a man.  It is
+remarkable that during the whole time they were at sea the ships never
+lost sight of each other for a day together, except twice; the first
+time owing to an accident which happened to the Discovery off the coast
+of Owhyhee, and the second to the fogs that were met with at the
+entrance of Awatska Bay.  A stronger proof cannot be given of the skill
+and vigilance of the subaltern officers, to whom the merit of this
+entirely belonged.
+
+The death of Captain Cook was already known in England by means of the
+despatches sent home through Major Behm.  All that a nation could do was
+done to testify respect for his memory.  His widow received a pension of
+200 pounds a year, and each of his children had 25 pounds a year settled
+on them.  Other sums were granted to his widow, and medals were struck
+to commemorate his achievements, while a coat of arms was granted to his
+family.
+
+Of his six children, three died in their infancy, and the other three
+were cut off in their early manhood.  The second, Nathaniel, a promising
+youth, was lost, when a midshipman, on board the Thunderer, in a
+hurricane off Jamaica on October 3, 1780.  The youngest, Hugh, was
+intended for the ministry, and died at Oxford, in the seventeenth year
+of his age.  The eldest, James, who was in the Navy, commanded the
+Spitfire sloop-of-war.  He was drowned, in 1794, at the age of thirty,
+when attempting to push off from Poole, during a gale of wind, to rejoin
+his ship.
+
+It is said that the bereaved mother, on receiving tidings of the death
+of her last surviving son, destroyed all the letters she had received
+from her husband, in the vain hope of banishing recollection of the
+past.  She survived, however, to the year 1835, when she died, at the
+age of ninety-three.
+
+A handsome piece of plate was presented to Major Behm, in acknowledgment
+of the attention and liberality with which he treated the English in
+Siberia; while gold medals were offered to the French king for his
+generous orders with regard to the ships of the expedition, as also to
+the Empress of Russia, as it was in her dominions, and by one of her
+officers, that they had been so liberally treated.
+
+------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+Note 1.  It should be mentioned that Lieutenant Pickersgill was sent
+out, in 1776, with directions to explore the coast of Baffin's Bay, and
+that in the next year Lieutenant Young was commissioned not only to
+examine the western parts of that bay, but to endeavour to find a
+passage on that side from the Atlantic to the Pacific Ocean.  Both
+officers returned without effecting anything.  The first was severely
+censured for his conduct; but we who know the difficulties he would have
+had to encounter may readily excuse him.
+
+Note 2.  Amongst the presents left by Cook at Mangaia was an axe,
+roughly fashioned, on the ship's arrival, out of a piece of iron.  It is
+still treasured in the Island as a relic of his visit.
+
+Note 3.  A promotion of officers necessarily followed the death of
+Captain Cook.  Captain Clerke, having succeeded to the command of the
+expedition, removed to the Resolution.  By him Mr Gore was appointed
+Captain of the Discovery, and the rest of the lieutenants obtained an
+addition of rank in their proper order.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER FIVE.
+
+SUBSEQUENT HISTORY OF POLYNESIA.
+
+In the concluding pages of this work it is proposed to give a brief
+sketch of the progress of Christianity and civilisation in the islands
+of the Pacific visited by Captain Cook.  [Note 1.]
+
+The accounts brought home by the discoverers of the degraded moral
+condition of the islanders, stirred up the hearts of Christians in
+England, and when, in 1795, the London Missionary Society was formed,
+one of its first proceedings was to send to those distant lands the
+Gospel of Christ's salvation.
+
+They began their labours upon an extensive scale.  They purchased a
+ship, and sent out twenty-five labourers to commence missions
+simultaneously at the Marquesan, Tahitian, and Friendly Islands.
+
+The following is the account given of the reception of this band of
+Christian evangelists:--
+
+"On March 7, 1797, the first missionaries from the Duff went on shore,
+and were met on the beach by the king, Pomare, and his queen.  By them
+they were kindly welcomed, as well as by Paitia, an aged chief of the
+district.  They were conducted to a large, oval-shaped native house,
+which has been but recently finished for Captain Bligh, whom they
+expected to return.  Their dwelling was pleasantly situated on the
+western side of the river, near the extremity of Point Venus.  The
+islanders were delighted to behold foreigners coming to take up their
+permanent residence among them, as those they had heretofore seen had
+been transient visitors.
+
+"The inhabitants of Tahiti, having never seen any European females or
+children, were filled with amazement and delight when the wives and
+children of the missionaries landed.  Several times during the first
+days of their residence on shore large parties arrived from different
+places, in front of the house, requesting that the white women and
+children would come to the door and show themselves.  The chiefs and
+people were not satisfied with giving them the large and commodious
+`Fare Beritani' (British house), as they called the one they had built
+for Captain Bligh, but readily and cheerfully ceded to Captain Wilson
+and the missionaries, in an official and formal manner, the district of
+Matavai, in which their habitation was situated.  The king and queen,
+with other branches of the royal family, and the most influential
+persons in the nation, were present; and Haamanemane, an aged chief of
+Raiatea, and chief priest of Tahiti, was the principal agent for the
+natives on this occasion.
+
+"Whatever advantages the king or chiefs might expect to derive from this
+settlement on the island, it must not be supposed that any desire to
+receive moral or religious instruction formed a part.  A desire to
+possess European property, and to receive the assistance of the
+Europeans in the exercise of the mechanical arts or in their wars, was
+probably the motive by which the natives were most strongly influenced.
+
+"Having landed ten missionaries at Tongataboo, in the Friendly Islands,
+Captain Wilson visited and surveyed several of the Marquesan Islands,
+and left Mr Crook, a missionary, there.  He then returned to Tahiti,
+and on July 6 the Duff again anchored in Matavai Bay.  The health of the
+missionaries had not been affected by the climate.  The conduct of the
+natives had been friendly and respectful, and supplies in abundance had
+been furnished during his absence.  On August 4, 1797, the Duff finally
+sailed from the bay.  The missionaries returning from the ship, as well
+as those on shore, watched her course, as she slowly receded from their
+view, under no ordinary sensations.  They now felt that they were cut
+off from all but Divine guidance, protection, and support, and had
+parted with those by whose counsels and presence they had been assisted
+in entering upon their labours, but whom, on earth, they did not expect
+to meet again.
+
+"Their acquaintance with the most useful of the mechanic arts not only
+delighted the natives, but raised the missionaries in their estimation,
+and led them to desire their friendship.  This was strikingly evinced on
+several occasions, when they beheld them use their carpenters' tools,
+cut with a saw a number of boards out of a tree, which they had never
+thought it possible to split into more than two, and make with these
+chests and articles of furniture.  When they beheld a boat built,
+upwards of twenty feet long and six tons burden, they were pleased and
+surprised; but when the blacksmith's shop was erected, and the forge and
+anvil were first employed on their shores, they were filled with
+astonishment.  When the heated iron was hammered on the anvil, and the
+sparks flew among them, they fancied it was spitting at them, and were
+frightened, as they also were with the hissing occasioned by immersing
+it in water; yet they were delighted to see the facility with which a
+bar of iron was thus converted into hatchets, adzes, fish-spears,
+fish-hooks, and other things.  Pomare, entering one day when the
+blacksmith was employed, after gazing a few minutes at the work, was so
+transported at what he saw that he caught up the smith in his arms, and,
+unmindful of the dirt and perspiration inseparable from his occupation,
+most cordially embraced him, and saluted him, according to the custom of
+his country, by touching noses."  [Abridged from _Polynesian
+Researches_, by the Rev. W. Ellis.]
+
+It is not to be wondered at that the favourable reports sent home by
+these missionaries encouraged those who received them to believe that
+almost all difficulties had already been, or were in a fair way of being
+speedily overcome, and that these distant islands were, to use the
+figurative language of Scripture, "stretching out their hands unto God."
+They did not know--it was wisely and mercifully hidden from them--that
+a long night of toil had yet to be passed before the dawn of that better
+day they longed to see, and for which they prayed and strove.
+
+"Decisive and extensive as the change has since become," says the writer
+just quoted, "it was long before any salutary effects appeared as the
+result of their endeavours; and although the scene is now one of
+loveliness and quietude, cheerful, yet placid as the smooth waters of
+the bay, it has often worn a very different aspect.  Here the first
+missionaries frequently heard the song accompanying the licentious
+areois dance, the deafening noise of the worship, and saw the human
+victim carried by for sacrifice.  Here, too, they often heard the
+startling cry of war, and saw their frightened neighbours fly before the
+murderous spear and plundering hand of lawless power.  The invader's
+torch reduced the native hut to ashes, while the lurid flame seared the
+green foliage of the trees, and clouds of smoke, rising up among their
+groves, darkened, for a time, surrounding objects.  On such occasions,
+and they were not infrequent, the contrast between the country and the
+inhabitants must have been most affecting; appearing as if the demons of
+darkness had lighted up infernal fires in the bowers of paradise."
+
+These representations probably did not reach England until after the
+missionaries had been some time in the islands, and meanwhile the ship
+Duff was sent out a second time, with a strong reinforcement of thirty
+additional labourers.
+
+"God, however, for a time, appeared to disappoint all their
+expectations; for this hitherto favoured ship was captured by the
+Buonaparte privateer.  The property was entirely lost, and the
+missionaries, with their families, after suffering many difficulties and
+privations, returned to England."  In addition to this trial "the
+Marquesan mission failed.  At Tongataboo some of the missionaries lost
+their lives, and that mission was, in consequence of a series of
+disastrous circumstances, abandoned."  More discouragements were in
+store, for "those settled at Tahiti, under such favourable auspices,
+had, from fear of their lives, nearly all fled to New South Wales; so
+that, after a few years, very little remained of this splendid embassy
+of Christian mercy to the South Seas.  A few of the brethren, however,
+never abandoned their posts; and others returned after having been a
+short time absent."
+
+In addition to all other disappointments, these returned missionaries
+and their brethren appeared to be labouring in vain and spending their
+strength for nought.  "For sixteen years," we are told, "notwithstanding
+the untiring zeal, the incessant journeys, the faithful exhortations of
+these devoted men, no spirit of interest or inquiry appeared, no
+solitary instance of conversion took place; the wars of the natives
+continued frequent and desolating, and their idolatries abominable and
+cruel.  The heavens above seemed to be as brass, and the earth as iron.
+
+"At length," continues the Christian historian, "two native servants,
+formerly in the families of the missionaries, had received, unknown to
+them, some favourable impressions, and had united together for prayer.
+To these many other persons had attached themselves, so that, on the
+return of the missionaries to Tahiti, at the termination of the war,
+they found a great number of `pure Atua,' or `praying people'; and they
+had little else to do but to help forward the work which God had so
+unexpectedly and wonderfully commenced.
+
+"Another circumstance, demanding special observation in reference to the
+commencement of the great work at Tahiti, is that, discouraged by so
+many years of fruitless toil, the directors of the Society entertained
+serious thoughts of abandoning the mission altogether.  A few
+undeviating friends of that field of missionary enterprise, however,
+opposed the measure."  Their persuasions prevailed, and after special
+and earnest prayer to God, instead of a recall, "letters of
+encouragement were written to the missionaries.  And while the vessel
+which carried these letters was on her passage to Tahiti, another ship
+was conveying to England not only the news of the entire overthrow of
+idolatry, but also the rejected idols of the people.  Thus was fulfilled
+the gracious promise, `Before they call I will answer, and while they
+are yet speaking I will hear.'"  [Williams's _Missionary Enterprises in
+the South Sea Islands_.]
+
+Among the converts of Tahiti was the king, Pomare, who, having been
+severely tried by the rebellion of some part of his subjects, became
+deeply impressed with the insufficiency of his idol gods to help him,
+and, after having recalled the banished missionaries, listened to their
+instructions, and embraced the faith of Christianity.  His example being
+followed by a majority of his people the idols were renounced, as
+already mentioned; and, as soon as he was firmly re-established on his
+throne, he built a Christian church, which was opened in the year 1819;
+and the first baptism of a native Tahitian was administered within its
+walls, in the presence of upwards of four thousand spectators, the king
+himself being the subject of the rite.
+
+Thus inaugurating a new era in his reign, Pomare introduced a code of
+useful laws, and brought about many much-needed reforms in his kingdom.
+He not only proved himself a warm friend of the missionaries, but gave
+them valuable assistance in the important work of translating the
+Scriptures into the Tahitian tongue--a fact which proves Pomare to have
+been a man of no ordinary natural abilities.  He did not live long
+enough, however, to see the completion of this design, but, dying in
+1821, he left it to his daughter, who succeeded him in his sovereignty,
+taking her father's name Pomare.
+
+Among the laws passed in Tahiti at this time was one prohibiting the
+importation and sale of ardent spirits, which had been so great a bane
+to the people; and the law was found to be beneficial to the prosperity
+and moral character of the country, though the foreign traders, who had
+made a large profit by its importation, were enraged when this source of
+gain was cut off.
+
+In 1835 the translation of the Bible was completed, and its publication
+was attended and followed by happy accompaniments and results.  At this
+time the number of natives in communion with the Christian churches
+throughout the island numbered over two thousand; and among the
+candidates for Church fellowship were the queen herself, her husband,
+and her mother.
+
+And now arose a dark cloud which, for a time, brought great distress
+upon the faithful followers of Christ in Tahiti, and was permitted to
+try their constancy, while, at the same time, the freedom, and liberty,
+and prosperity of the island were grievously threatened.  It may be
+stated, in few words, that Louis Philippe, at that time King of the
+French, had set his eyes on Tahiti, and had introduced his agents into
+the country that an excuse might be found for taking possession of the
+island.  First, the consuls insisted that, as the law prohibiting the
+introduction of liquor interfered with trade, it should be rescinded.
+This was firmly refused.  Then, two French Roman Catholic priests were
+landed, but were ordered by the queen to quit the country.  They
+complied; but one shortly returned with a companion, and the French
+admiral, appearing directly afterwards, insisted, with his guns bearing
+on the town, that they should be allowed to remain, and demanded 400
+pounds for the injury they had been supposed to suffer when compelled to
+quit the island.
+
+French ships continued to be sent, at frequent intervals, and French
+troops were landed; the queen fled to a neighbouring island; the people
+fought bravely, but were defeated; the mission-houses and stations were
+destroyed; the missionaries were driven out of the country, and Mr
+Pritchard, who had been a missionary, and was now British consul, was
+imprisoned and otherwise ill-treated.
+
+The Protestant missionary societies throughout Europe and America were
+indignant at this conduct of a civilised nation.  In consequence of the
+representations of England, France desisted from her attacks on the
+other islands, but Tahiti fell into her power in 1846.  The French,
+however, could not turn the people from the simple faith they had
+learned from the English missionaries.  They chose ministers from their
+own people, and continued to meet and worship God with the simple forms
+to which they had been accustomed, and it is a remarkable fact that
+Romanism, notwithstanding its gorgeous ceremonies and corrupt practices,
+did not captivate them.
+
+One only of their beloved missionaries was allowed to remain, the Rev.
+William Howe, as chaplain to the British consul, and who was ever ready
+to give the native pastors the benefit of his advice and assistance,
+though opposed by the Romish bishop and the priests.  At length, through
+his earnest representations to the French Protestant missionary
+societies, an appeal was made to the Emperor Napoleon, who permitted
+French Protestant missionaries to go out.  They were cordially received
+by Mr Howe and the native preachers, and the greater part of the Romish
+priests were subsequently withdrawn.
+
+In the words of a recent report of the British and Foreign Bible
+Society, [that of 18 8] "The Bible still continues to supply the
+inhabitants of the Tahitian group of islands with a safe guide amidst
+all the errors to which they are exposed, and a sure ground of hope in
+the prospect of eternity.  The sale and distribution of the Scriptures
+progresses steadily, and the strong attachment of the people to the
+truths of the Gospel remains unabated, and forms a security against the
+seductions of Popery which it is not easy to over-estimate.  Games, and
+sports, and feasts are all alike tried to seduce the natives from their
+allegiance to Him whom they have learnt to love and to serve; and
+though, through the weakness of the flesh, some are attracted and drawn
+aside, yet, for the most part, they soon become convinced of the
+emptiness and folly of these things, and return to the sound and
+wholesome food which they had been tempted to forsake."
+
+After leaving Tahiti, the first place at which Captain Cook touched was
+the lovely and fertile island of Huaheine.  This became the refuge of
+the first party of missionaries when, in 1808, they were driven from
+Tahiti; and it was afterwards visited by John Williams, Ellis, and
+others, accompanied by some chiefs from Eimeo, who purposed forming a
+mission there.  As this place became, in a certain degree, the centre of
+operations, that particular missionary enterprise in the Society Islands
+is generally known as the Huaheine Mission.
+
+While Mr Williams was residing at Huaheine, Tamatoa, the King of
+Raiatea, who had, while visiting Eimeo and Tahiti, learned something of
+the principles of Christianity, arrived with several chiefs, entreating
+that missionaries might be sent to instruct their people in the truth.
+Messrs. Williams and Threlkeld promptly responded to the call, and
+accompanied the king back to Raiatea.  The population of the island was
+at that time only thirteen hundred, though the island is the largest of
+the group, and, from its reputed sanctity, and from being the centre and
+headquarters of all the idolatries and abominations of the neighbouring
+islands, its chiefs exercised great authority over them.
+
+Tamatoa, instructed by the Holy Spirit, and aided by others who had
+learnt something of the truths of Christianity, had for some time been
+labouring among his fellow-islanders.  He had himself been converted by
+what might well be considered a providential circumstance.  Two years
+before, a small vessel, having on board the king, Pomare, Mr Wilson,
+the missionary, and several Tahitians, had been driven by a storm from
+her anchorage at Eimeo down to Raiatea.  Here they were hospitably
+received, and continued three months, the whole of which time was
+employed by Mr Wilson and the king in preaching the Gospel to the
+inhabitants.  The chief, Tamatoa, was among their principal converts.
+
+After their teachers had departed, Tamatoa and his fellow-inquirers felt
+an earnest desire to learn more of the truth.  They built a place of
+worship, met together for mutual instruction, kept holy the Sabbath, and
+put away their idols and heathen practices.  Several times the heathens
+laid plots to destroy them, but were each time signally foiled in their
+wicked plans.
+
+At length, Tamatoa paid that memorable visit to Huaheine which resulted
+in Messrs. Williams and Threlkeld taking up their abode at Raiatea.
+Having collected the hitherto scattered inhabitants into villages, he
+built a substantial mission-house as a model, which was readily
+imitated.  Places of worship and schoolhouses were also built; and
+though many years elapsed before the abominations of heathenism were
+eradicated, the great mass of the people became not only well educated
+and moral, but earnest and enlightened Christians.  The satisfactory
+progress made by the inhabitants of the islands where Mr Williams
+resided was owing, humanly speaking, to the wonderful rapidity with
+which he had acquired their language, and was able to preach to them, in
+it, the Gospel of Jesus Christ.
+
+Soon after the mission at Huaheine was established Mr Ellis set up a
+printing-press, from which quickly issued the Gospel by Luke, eight
+hundred copies of which were sent to Raiatea.  Small school-books were
+also printed in the native language.  The desire for instruction became
+general wherever missionary stations were established.  Not only the
+children, but adults became scholars.  During the hours of instruction
+other engagements were suspended, and the various scenes of busy
+occupation throughout the settlements forsaken.
+
+Such was the picture to be seen at that time in several islands of the
+Society group.  Borabora, or Bolabola, whose inhabitants in Cook's time
+had been the fiercest warriors of the neighbouring islands, yielded to
+the benign influence of the Gospel.  The history of the last island
+visited by the great navigator before he left the eastern side of the
+Pacific for New Zealand, called by him Oheteroa, but known generally as
+Rurutu, is of great interest.  It is situated about two hundred and
+fifty miles to the south of Raiatea.  A destructive pestilence having
+visited the island, two chiefs, one named Auura, built two canoes, and,
+with as many of the people as they could convey, left their native
+shores in search of a happier land, and to escape from their infuriated
+deities.
+
+After touching at Tubuai, they were cast on the reef surrounding Maurua.
+Here, instead of being murdered, as might once have been their fate,
+the starving voyagers were received with all kindness and charity.  How
+was this?  Through the agency of native teachers the people had learned
+the blessed truths of the Gospel, and were trying to obey its precepts.
+Auura and his companions, hearing that the white men, who had brought to
+their seas that beautiful religion the practical fruits of which they
+had just experienced, were living in the islands the summits of whose
+mountains they could see, set sail once more, with the desire of hearing
+from their own lips a fuller account of the religion they taught.  They
+missed Borabora, but reached Raiatea.  Here they remained rather more
+than three months.  When they were landed they were ignorant savages,
+wild in appearance and habits.  Before they left Auura could read the
+Gospel of Matthew, had learned the greater part of the catechism drawn
+up for the natives, and could write correctly.  Several others could do
+nearly as well, though previously ignorant that such an art as writing
+existed.
+
+But these earnest men were not content to go back to their people alone;
+they entreated that some missionaries would accompany them.  Two native
+deacons at once offered themselves, and were accepted.  Auura's great
+fear was that many of his countrymen would have been carried off by the
+pestilence before the glad tidings of salvation could be preached to
+them.  At that time a vessel belonging to a friend of the mission
+touched at Eaiatea, and the captain agreed to carry Auura and his
+companions, with the missionaries, to their home.
+
+Within fifteen months after this, Rurutu was visited by Dr Tyerman and
+G. Bennet, Esquire, who had been sent out by the directors of the London
+Missionary Society to visit their stations in the Pacific.  When they
+reached it they were not certain what island it was, but were greatly
+surprised at seeing several neat-looking white houses at the head of the
+bay.  A pier, a quarter of a mile in length, had been constructed of
+vast coral blocks, affording a convenient landing-place.  Besides the
+two comfortable mission-houses, there was a large place of worship,
+eighty feet by thirty-six, wattled, plastered, well floored and seated,
+built within a twelvemonth, under the direction of the two native
+missionaries, who performed much of the work with their own hands.  Many
+of the chiefs were dressed in European clothing, and all were attired in
+the most decent and becoming manner.  Not a vestige of idolatry was to
+be seen, not an idol was to be found in the island.
+
+Mr Turnbull, in his account of a voyage he made to the Pacific in 1804,
+describes the way in which the then savage inhabitants of Raiatea
+attempted to cut off the ship in which he sailed.  See the contrast in
+the conduct of the people of Rurutu shortly after they had embraced
+Christianity.  Captain Chase commanded the Falcon, an American trader,
+which was cast away on a reef off their island.  He says; "The natives
+have given us all the assistance in their power from the time the ship
+struck to the present moment.  The first day, while landing the things
+from the ship, they were put into the hands of the natives, and carried
+up to the native mission-house, a distance of half a mile, and not a
+single article of clothing was taken from any man belonging to the ship,
+though they had it in their power to have plundered us of everything
+that was landed.  Since I have lived on shore, I, and my officers and
+people, have received the kindest treatment from the natives that can be
+imagined, for which I shall ever be thankful."
+
+Aitutaki, one of the Hervey group, was another of the islands discovered
+by Captain Cook.  It contained about two thousand inhabitants, described
+as especially wild and savage.  Mr Williams heard of it from Auura, and
+on a voyage to Sydney, which he was compelled to take on account of the
+health of his wife, he landed on its shores two native missionaries,
+Papeiha and Vahapata.  On first landing they were led by the people to
+the morai and given up to the gods; but their lives were spared and they
+were left at liberty.  Wars broke out in the island, and all their
+property was stolen; but they persevered in preaching the Gospel, and,
+by degrees, gained converts.  The king, Tamatoa, became a Christian; but
+his old grandfather refused to give up his gods.  While holding a high
+festival in their honour, a beloved daughter was taken ill.  In vain he
+besought his gods to restore her to health; she died.  In his rage, he
+ordered his son to set fire to his morai, and to destroy it with his
+idols; two others caught fire near it, and the son was proceeding to
+burn others, when the people dragged him away, expecting to see him
+struck down by the vengeance of the outraged gods.  As no evil
+consequences followed, the idolaters began to call in question the power
+of their deities.
+
+Shortly after a vessel arrived from Raiatea, bringing another
+missionary, with many books, and several pigs and goats, which Papeiha
+and his companion had promised the people.  This raised the missionaries
+in their estimation, and they with one accord threw away all their
+idols, and resolved to listen to the teaching of the Gospel.  On his
+return from Sydney, Mr Williams, calling at Aitutaki, found that all
+the inhabitants had nominally embraced Christianity, while a chapel, two
+hundred feet long, had been built for the worship of the true God.  They
+have now the entire Scriptures in their own language, and their desire
+after and reverence for the Word of God are very remarkable.
+
+The description given of the inhabitants of Aitutaki applies equally to
+numerous other islands of the Pacific, which have been for some time
+under missionary instruction, provided there are no ports where the
+crews of foreign vessels remain any length of time, and set a bad
+example to the surrounding population.
+
+Rarotonga, one of the Hervey group, about seven hundred miles south of
+Tahiti, and discovered by Williams, in 1823, when the people were in the
+most savage condition, is now the chief missionary station in the
+Pacific.  In 1839 a missionary college was established, the buildings
+consisting of a number of separate neat stone cottages, in which the
+married students and their wives could reside, a lecture-room, and a
+room for female classes.  Up to 1844 thirty-three native missionaries,
+male and female, had received instruction, and six of the young men had
+gone forth as pioneers to Western Polynesia.  Up to 1860 two hundred
+students had been admitted, a considerable number of whom were married,
+and the institution had been greatly enlarged in many respects.  The
+course of instruction embraces theology, Church history, Biblical
+exposition, biography, geography, grammar, and composition of essays and
+sermons.  The students are also taught several mechanical arts, and for
+two or three hours every day are employed in the workshop.  At the
+printing establishment on the island a variety of works have been
+translated, printed, and bound.  In three months, ending March 1859,
+_Bogue's Lectures_, the _Pilgrim's Progress_, twelve hundred copies of
+_Voyages of Mission Ship_, hymn-books, Scripture lessons, and several
+other works were turned out of hand.  The press-work of these various
+books, comprising nearly three hundred thousand sheets a year, had all
+been performed by young men, the first-fruits of missionary labours
+before their fathers had any written language.
+
+We must now describe the present state of other solitary islands and
+groups discovered by Captain Cook.  In the course of his second voyage
+(1774) he fell in with a low, solitary island, which, from the ferocity
+of the inhabitants, he called Savage Island.  The inhabitants, numbering
+between three and four thousand, for very many years remained in the
+condition in which Cook found them.  The first attempt to leave native
+missionaries was made by the Rev. John Williams, in 1830.  But the
+natives refused to receive them.  In 1840, and in 1842, other attempts
+were made.  In the latter year the Rev. A. Buzacott nearly lost his
+life.
+
+Still these visits had a good effect on the younger part of the
+population, who desired to see more of the strangers.  Several found
+their way to Samoa, where they embraced the Gospel, and two of them,
+after a course of instruction at the training college in Samoa, were
+found well fitted to return, and to spread its glad tidings among their
+benighted countrymen.  They were accordingly conveyed to Savage Island
+in the John Williams, missionary ship, but were received with a good
+deal of suspicion by the natives, and only one remained.  He narrowly
+escaped being put to death, but undauntedly persevered, and, by degrees,
+gathered converts around him.  When visited in 1852 by the Rev. A.W.
+Murray, he had upwards of two hundred sincere believers gathered into a
+church, and many heathen practices had been abandoned by others.
+
+In 1861 the John Williams conveyed Mr and Mrs Lawes to Savage Island.
+They were the first European missionaries appointed to labour there.
+Hundreds of men and women, all well clothed, were assembled on the shore
+to receive them.  Outwardly, not a vestige of heathenism remained among
+them.  There were five good chapels in the island, one of which held
+eleven hundred, but it was too small for the congregation.  Prayer
+meetings were frequently held, at which all the people in the district
+attended.  On each occasion when they were held by Mr Lawes not less
+than eight hundred were present.  The whole of the inhabitants are now
+professing Christians, and a very large proportion are earnest and
+enlightened believers.
+
+------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+The reader will call to mind the incidents of Captain Cook's visit to
+the Tonga, or Friendly group, the high state of cultivation in which he
+found the islands, the apparently friendly reception he met with from
+the chiefs, and their treacherous purposes to cut off the ship, as they
+shortly afterwards did a merchantman which visited their shores,
+murdering most of the crew.
+
+In consequence of Captain Cook's too favourable report, a number of
+missionaries were sent out by the London Missionary Society, in the ship
+Duff, already mentioned, under the command of Captain Wilson.  These
+pious men landed on the islands in 1797, but they made no apparent
+progress, and war breaking out, three of them lost their lives, and the
+rest escaped to Sydney.  This was in the year 1800.
+
+In 1802, Mr Lawry, of the Wesleyan Missionary Society, commenced a
+mission at Nukualofa, in Tongataboo.  Though compelled for a time to
+abandon it, he returned in 1826, and, through his instrumentality,
+Tubou, the king, and many of his chiefs and people embraced
+Christianity.  It is worthy of remark that, just before this time, the
+London Missionary Society had commenced a mission on the island; but
+they yielded up the field to the Wesleyans, while the latter retired
+from Samoa, where they had commenced a mission.  The Wesleyans have
+since then laboured exclusively, and with most encouraging success, in
+the Friendly and Fiji Islands and New Zealand, leaving to the London
+Missionary Society the wide scope of the Pacific.
+
+In 1827 the Revs. Nathaniel Turner and William Cross took up their
+residence at Nukualofa.  At that time Josiah Tubou was king in Tonga.
+Taufaahau, now King George, was king only of Haabai, and Feenau was king
+of Vavou.  The first became a Christian, as did his queen, and was
+baptised on January 10, 1830.  He died in 1845, Feenau having previously
+died; thus George became king in chief, and reigns over the three
+groups, Tonga, Haabai, and Vavou, or the whole of the Friendly Islands.
+The labours of the two zealous missionaries just mentioned were largely
+blessed, and when Tubou was baptised the congregation amounted to six
+hundred professing Christians.
+
+King Josiah's reign was not altogether free from difficulties.  The
+heathen party was strong, and took up arms against him, being supported
+by some French Roman Catholic priests who had settled in the islands.
+They tried to embroil him, as they had already done Queen Pomare, of
+Tahiti, with their own government, but were unsuccessful, and with the
+assistance of King George the rebels were put down.
+
+King George had himself become a Christian and a preacher, and
+contributed greatly to the spread of the Gospel among his countrymen.
+He is thus described by Mr Lawry, after he had become sovereign of the
+whole group; it was in the large chapel of Nukualofa: "The king was in
+the pulpit.  The attention of his audience was riveted while he
+expounded the words of our Lord, `I am come that ye might have life.'
+The king is a tall, graceful person; in the pulpit he was dressed in a
+black coat, and his manner was solemn and earnest.  He held in his hand
+a small bound manuscript book, in which his sermon was written, but he
+seldom looked at it.  His action was dignified, his delivery fluent and
+graceful, and not without majesty.  His hearers hung upon his lips with
+earnest and increasing interest.  Much of what he said was put
+interrogatively, a mode of address which is very acceptable among the
+Tongans.  It was affecting to see this dignified man stretching out his
+hand over his people, and to observe that one of his little fingers had
+been cut off: this was formerly done as an offering to a heathen god, a
+custom among his people before they became Christians.  But while he
+bore this mark of Pagan origin, he clearly showed that to him was grace
+given to preach among the Gentiles the unsearchable riches of Christ."
+
+The Tongans have been especially blessed in having had several
+missionaries of high character, abilities, and zeal sent among them.
+There are schools sufficient for the wants of the whole population,
+under native teachers, and overlooked by the missionaries, whose duties
+are somewhat arduous.  There is a training institution at Nukualofa, for
+missionaries, and for masters and mistresses of schools.  There are also
+schools, or colleges, for the upper classes; indeed, many of the wants
+of a civilised and intelligent community are supplied in the Tonga
+Islands.  The population of the whole group is supposed to amount to
+between thirty and forty thousand.
+
+The islands of Western Polynesia--New Hebrides, Loyalty, and Britannia--
+were little-known, or, at all events, little thought of, till the year
+1839, when they were brought into melancholy prominence by the
+distressing tragedy which occurred in one of them, the island of
+Erromanga.
+
+The Rev. John Williams, after his return from England in the previous
+year, sailed in the Camden missionary vessel, resolved to convey the
+Gospel message to the inhabitants of these remote islands, hitherto sunk
+in the deepest heathen darkness.  It is not too much to say that there
+was no species of wickedness practised by heathens in any part of the
+world which could not have found its parallel in those countries.
+Barbarous rites, nameless abominations, and cannibalism in its most
+fearful forms characterised the whole population.  Mr Williams was
+accompanied by several European, and a considerable number of native
+missionaries, who were to be landed as opportunities might offer, to
+preach the Gospel.
+
+Having landed missionaries at the island of Tanna and elsewhere, with
+every prospect of success, the Camden proceeded to Erromanga, off which
+island she arrived on November 20, 1839.  Here Mr Williams, Mr Harris,
+Mr Cunningham, and Captain Morgan landed, and while the two former were
+at a distance from their companions, the natives attacked and killed
+them.  The murder had been provoked, not by the crew of the Camden, but
+by that of some other ship, who had ruthlessly shot down several of the
+natives and carried off their provisions.  Thus the innocent suffered
+for the guilty, and while the life of one eminent missionary was
+sacrificed, that of another was cut off at the commencement of what
+might have been a course of similar usefulness.  Let it be added, as an
+interesting fact, that the murderer of John Williams was afterwards
+converted to God, and lived as a sincere and consistent Christian.
+
+Notwithstanding the sad commencement of this missionary enterprise, it
+was resolved to pursue it with vigour.  At Aneiteum, the first island of
+the New Hebrides visited by the missionary ship in 1841, two Samoan
+missionaries were landed.  These devoted men had much to endure, and it
+was not till after years of toil that they saw any really satisfactory
+results from their labours.  By degrees many came to seek instruction,
+some of whom abandoned their heathen practices; and subsequently other
+native teachers were introduced; but when, in 1848, the Rev. J. Geddie
+arrived at Aneiteum, he still found the great mass of the people
+fearfully degraded, and addicted to the most horrible cruelties.  Soon
+after his arrival eight women were strangled--one, an interesting young
+woman whose husband he had been attending till he died; he attempted to
+save her, and was very nearly clubbed to death by her relatives in
+consequence.
+
+A wonderful change is now evident.  In 1858 there were sixty villages on
+the island, each of which had a school-house or a chapel, with a
+resident teacher.  Nearly the whole of the New Testament, and some books
+of the Old, had been translated, and a large number of these lately
+degraded heathens could both read and write.
+
+Fatuna is a small island, containing about a thousand inhabitants.  Here
+Williams touched just before his death; but no teachers were left there.
+A couple of years afterwards, however, two Samoan evangelists, Samuela
+and Apela, were landed, the former accompanied by his wife.  They
+laboured for four years with some success, when a severe epidemic
+breaking out among the inhabitants they were accused of being its cause,
+and were killed and eaten.  Samuela's faithful wife was offered her life
+if she would become one of the wives of the chief.  She replied, "I came
+to teach you what is right, not to sin amongst you."  No sooner had she
+uttered the words than she fell beneath the club of a savage.
+Notwithstanding this tragedy, missionaries from the lately heathen
+Aneiteum have gone to Fatuna, and many of the savages have been
+converted.
+
+At Tanna, supposed to possess fifteen thousand inhabitants, Mr Williams
+left three missionaries the day before he was murdered at Erromanga; but
+two of them soon died, the climate being more injurious to the natives
+of Eastern Polynesia than to Europeans.  In 1842 Messrs. Turner and
+Nisbet were sent to occupy the island, but were driven away by the
+savages, and sought shelter in Samoa.  Native teachers from Aneiteum,
+however, took their places, and met with some success; and in 1858
+several European missionaries landed on the island; and the larger part
+of the people have come to the truth.
+
+With Erromanga the name of Williams will always be associated.  After
+his death, native evangelists from Samoa and Rarotonga landed on its
+shores, but died, or were compelled to leave, from the effects of the
+climate.  In 1857 the Rev. G.N. Gordon, and his wife, took up their
+residence on the island.  They laboured on with considerable success,
+Oviladon, the chief of the district, being among the first-fruits of
+their toils.  The greater number of the inhabitants of his district also
+became Christians.
+
+An epidemic, however, broke out in 1860, and the heathen inhabitants of
+another district, believing that it was caused by the Christians,
+attacked the settlement, and killed Mr and Mrs Gordon.  The day after
+they were buried, amidst the tears and lamentations of the people; the
+native teacher, who had escaped, stood beside the grave, and delivered
+an address which powerfully affected the bystanders.
+
+In the large island of Fate or Vate, Christian teachers have been landed
+at different times, but some have been killed and eaten, and others have
+died of disease.  In 1858, however, three teachers, with their wives,
+were landed under encouraging circumstances.  From Nina, a small island
+near Tanna, several of the natives, hearing of the wonderful things
+taking place on the latter island, proceeded thither to procure a
+teacher.  In consequence of their application, in 1858, the John
+Williams took them two from Aneiteum, who are now labouring successfully
+among them.
+
+The Loyalty group must be briefly noticed.  Native teachers were landed
+in 1841, and after they had induced many natives to abandon heathenism,
+Messrs. Jones and Creagh arrived in the island in 1854.  Their labours
+have been blessed; the Gospels and other parts of the Scriptures have
+been printed in the Nengonese language, and upwards of three thousand of
+the inhabitants are under Christian instruction, although a large number
+of the natives still follow their heathen customs.
+
+The mission in Lifu was not commenced till 1843, when native evangelists
+were landed, and in 1858 two European missionaries arrived to take
+charge of the work.  The inhabitants amount to about ten thousand, and
+of these very few, if any, now remain heathens, though it is to be
+feared that the great mass of the converts can only be looked on as
+nominal Christians.
+
+The small Britannia group, near New Caledonia, has been occupied by
+teachers from Rarotonga and Mars since 1837, but Roman Catholic priests
+have arrived on the principal island, sent, they say, by the French
+governor of New Caledonia.  They have built a capital, called Porte de
+France, but it is a penal colony, and free emigrants have not been
+attracted to its shores.
+
+The last islands visited by Captain Cook were those to which he gave the
+name of the Sandwich Islands, and which now form the small but
+independent kingdom of Hawaii, having a capital called Honolulu, with a
+population of eleven thousand, not less than a thousand of whom are
+white foreigners.  With its well-paved, lighted streets, its king's
+palace, its houses of parliament, its cathedral church, its numerous
+hotels, its police, and other accompaniments of high civilisation, it is
+difficult to imagine that a hundred years ago this was the home of
+tattooed savages.  To Englishmen in advanced years, indeed, the murder
+of Captain Cook at Owhyhee seems like an event that happened in their
+own childhood.  And, in truth, not fifty years ago the natives of Hawaii
+were ignorant and idolatrous heathens, while it is but as yesterday that
+a refined, elegant, and well-educated lady, the queen of those islands,
+was visiting England.
+
+When Cook was killed Kalampupua was king.  He was succeeded by his
+nephew, Kamehamea the First, who made himself sovereign of the entire
+group.  When visited by Captain Vancouver, in 1793, it is said that he
+requested that Christian missionaries might be sent to him.  Whether
+Captain Vancouver delivered the message to the English Government or
+not, no attention was paid to it.  Captain Vancouver, however, returned
+the next year with some horned cattle and sheep, which he presented to
+the king, obtaining a promise that none should be killed for the space
+of ten years.  This promise was faithfully kept; but so rapidly did the
+animals increase that they became exceedingly troublesome to the natives
+by injuring their fences and taro plantations.  They were accordingly
+driven into the mountains, where they now form a source of considerable
+wealth to the nation.
+
+Kamehamea was about to abolish the taboo system when he died in 1819,
+and was succeeded by his son Liholiho, who took the name of Kamehamea
+the Second.  He carried into effect his father's intention, and also
+destroyed his temples and gods.
+
+In that very year the American Board of Missions resolved to send to the
+Sandwich Islands an efficient band of missionaries with three native
+youths who had been educated in the States.  Joyful and totally
+unexpected news awaited them on their arrival.  Idolatry was overthrown,
+and the king and most of his chiefs were ready to afford them protection
+and support.  They had, however, an arduous task before them in their
+efforts to impart instruction to a population numbering at least one
+hundred thousand, dwelling in eight islands, with a superficial area of
+seven thousand square miles; Owhyhee alone, now written Hawaii, being
+four hundred and fifteen miles in circumference.
+
+In 1824 there were fifty native teachers and two thousand scholars, and
+so rapidly did education advance, that in 1831 there were eleven hundred
+schools, in which fully seventeen hundred scholars had obtained the
+branches of a common education, and were able to read, write, and sum up
+simple accounts.  The prime minister, seven leading chiefs, and the
+regent were members of the Christian Church; and a very decided change
+was manifest in the general population.
+
+Within a few years the language was reduced to a written form, and two
+printing-presses were at work at Honolulu.  A large edition of the
+Gospels in the Hawaii language, printed in the United States, was in
+circulation and there were no less than nine hundred schools and
+forty-five thousand scholars.  In 1853, after a great awakening, there
+were above twenty-two thousand church members, and there were chapels at
+all the stations.  One at Lahaina could hold three thousand persons.
+
+In 1853 the mission of the American Board was dissolved, their object
+having been fully realised in Christianising the people, planting
+churches, and making them self-supporting.  Kamehamea the Third, the
+brother and successor of the king, who died in England, reigned well and
+wisely till 1854.  On his death, Prince Alexander Liholiho, a
+well-educated and religiously disposed young man, became king.  His wife
+is the Queen Emma who once visited England.  They lost their only son in
+1862.  This so affected the king that he never recovered from the shock.
+
+He was succeeded by his brother who reigned over the kingdom for some
+years, under the title of Kamehamea the Fifth.  His uncle had
+established a too democratic constitution; he has given the people one
+more suited to their ideas and the state of the country.  The chamber of
+nobles and that of the representatives of the people are convoked every
+two years.  It is their duty to make the laws and to vote supplies.
+Several foreigners are employed in the government, and the foreign
+population of English, Americans, French, and Germans is increasing
+rapidly.
+
+The Hawaiians own a considerable number of vessels, which trade to
+China, California, British Columbia, and other parts of the Pacific.
+The national flag is composed of coloured stripes with the Union-Jack of
+old England quartered in the corner.  The independence of the island
+kingdom is guaranteed by England, France, and America, and it will
+probably continue, as it is at present, in advance of all the other
+states which may arise in the Pacific.  With these signs of prosperity,
+it is no wonder that Romish priests are doing all in their power to
+spread their tenets through the Sandwich Islands.  But the Bible and a
+free press will, it is devoutly to be hoped, triumph.
+
+Among other publications constantly issuing from the Hawaiian press are
+several newspapers, both in English and the native language, which have
+a wide circulation.  That there is a steady increase in the commerce of
+the country is shown by the exports of sugar, coffee, and other produce,
+while several manufactures have been introduced to give employment
+especially to the women.  The port of Honolulu has long been the chief
+resort of whale ships in the Pacific, and now many others, trading
+between the coasts of America and Asia, call there for supplies.
+
+Other islands and shores visited by Cook remain in much the same
+condition as in his day.  The sorrowful history of the attempt to convey
+the Gospel to the inhabitants of Tierra del Fuego, by Captain Allan
+Gardiner, is too well-known to require further mention.  Java has been
+restored to its original masters, the Dutch; and the Cape of Good Hope
+is now a British colony.  The great southern land of which Cook went in
+search has been found to exist, though its approach is guarded by
+immense barriers of ice; and the great problem of a north-west passage
+has been solved by the sacrifice of some of England's bravest sons.
+
+Not much need be added in the closing paragraphs of this volume.  In
+following the interesting narrative of the voyages of the eminent
+discoverer whose name is a household word in English biography, the
+reader, while he sees some things to regret, will award to him a
+well-deserved tribute of admiration for his courage and skill, his
+perseverance and enterprising spirit.  One thing was set before him, and
+that one thing he did.  His main object was scientific; his first voyage
+was undertaken to observe the transit of the planet Venus, the Royal
+Society having represented that important service would be rendered to
+the interests of astronomical science by the appointment of properly
+qualified individuals to observe that phenomenon.  The second was in
+search of a southern continent, which, at that time, was a favourite
+object of geographical speculation.  The third and last was to endeavour
+to find a passage from the Pacific into the Atlantic Ocean.  These
+objects were praiseworthy, yet they were not the highest aims of the
+truest and purest ambition.  To be a martyr for science was earthly
+glory; but to be a willing martyr for God is glory, honour, immortality,
+and eternal life.
+
+The discoveries made by Captain Cook were barren of any results beyond
+those which are necessarily doomed to perish when the world and all that
+is in it shall be dissolved, until God was pleased, in His own good
+time, and by the influence of His gracious Spirit operating on the minds
+of His servants, to make them show forth His praise.  Then was made
+manifest His almighty power, His infinite wisdom, and His amazing love,
+in the triumphs of the Gospel of the Lord Jesus Christ in the very
+strongholds of Satan and sin; conveying to His waiting people the
+assurance also that He had listened, and still listens, to their
+aspirations and prayers.
+
+------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+Note 1.  Australia, Tasmania, and New Zealand, having become parts of
+the British empire, and colonised by British subjects, are not included
+in this sketch; their history belongs to that of the mother country.
+The wonderful progress they have made is due to the influx of European
+settlers, not to the elevation of the native races.
+
+THE END.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Captain Cook, by W.H.G. Kingston
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK CAPTAIN COOK ***
+
+***** This file should be named 24755.txt or 24755.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        http://www.gutenberg.org/2/4/7/5/24755/
+
+Produced by Nick Hodson of London, England
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+http://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+http://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at http://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit http://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
+To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     http://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.